Sociology Psychology - McGraw

Transcription

Psychology
&
Sociology
2010
L ES S MA N A G IN G .
M OR E T E A C H IN G .
GRE AT E R L E A R N IN G .
What is Connect?
Connect Features:
McGraw-Hill Connect™ is an online assignment and
assessment solution that connects your students
with the tools and resources they’ll need to achieve
success.
McGraw-Hill Connect offers a number of powerful
tools and features to make managing assignments
easier, so you can spend more time teaching.
With Connect, students can engage with their
coursework anytime and anywhere, making the
learning process more accessible and efficient.
With Connect, enjoy simple course management
so you can spend less time administering and more
time teaching. You’ll have access to rich course
resources and tools that drive performance like
never before.
Simple assignment management
With Connect, creating assignments is easier
than ever, so you can spend more time teaching
and less time managing.
Smart grading
When it comes to studying, time is precious.
Connect helps students learn more efficiently by
providing feedback and practice material when
they need it, where they need it.
Personalized Diagnostic and Learning Plan
Personal learning Plan assess students
understanding of key concepts with diagnostics
and adaptive questions; then tailor coaching
and practice materials to each student’s skills
and knowledge gaps
ConnectPlus eBooks
Connect reinvents the textbook learning
experience for the modern student. Every
Connect subject area is seamlessly integrated
with ConnectPlus eBooks, which are designed
to keep students focused on the concepts key
to their success.
Learning is more than memorizing concepts. It’s figuring out how to apply them. And no other web-based
solution gives you the power to turn learning into success than Connect Psychology.
Easily Create Assignments
Connect Psychology allows you
to create and deliver online, autograded homework assignments,
quizzes, and tests directly from your
textbook’s end –of-chapter materials
or test bank. You customized
assignments can be created in just 4
simple steps.
Impressive Reporting Solutions
With Connect’s detailed reporting,
you can quickly assess how students
are doing in regards to overall class
performance; specific objectives;
individual assignments; and each
question!
McGraw-Hill reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student with Connect Plus. A
seamless integration of an eBook and Connect, Connect Plus provides all of the Connect features plus the
following:
An integrated, printable eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook.
Dynamic links between the problems or questions you assign to your students and the location in
the eBook where that problem or questions is covered.
Assign sections of the eBook to your students as readings with engaging audio files, animations and
videos embedded within the eBook.
Instructors have the ability to share notes, highlights, bookmarks, figures and animations with their
students.
A powerful search function to pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap!
Pagination that exactly matches the printed text, allowing students to rely on Connect Plus as the
complete resource for your course.
Learn and View Connect Psychology Demo at www.mcgrawhillconnect.com
Built around metacognition learning theory, LearnSmart
provides your students with a GPS (Guided Path to
Success) for your course. Using artificial intelligence,
LearnSmart intelligently assesses a student’s knowledge
of course content through a series of adaptive questions.
It pinpoints concepts the student does not understand
and maps out a personalized study plan for success.
Connect to Content:
Simulation allows students to practice course
critical content.
Learn More Effectively:
Personal learning path is created based upon
student knowledge level.
Anywhere, At Your Pace:
Students can access LearnSmart anytime
and from anywhere that has internet access
including the iPhone or iPod Touch.
Connect Psychology is available with:
Feist
Psychology: Marking Connections,1e, 2010
Feldman
Essential of Understanding Psychology, 8e, 2009
Feldman
Understanding Psychology, 9E, 2009
To view a demo, visit
www.mhhe.com/learnsmart
King
The Science of Psychology:
An Appreciative View, 1e, 2008
Passer
Psychology:
The Science of Mind and Behavior,4e, 2008
McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)
4UAS"ASIN,INKs3INGAPORE
4ELs&AX
Contact your local McGraw-Hill representative
to learn more about Connect Psychology and
Learnsmart.
#USTOMER3ERVICE(OTLINE
Email: [email protected]
Website: www.mheducation.asia
Your Partner in
Test Generation
Imagine being able to create and access you test anywhere, at any time without installing the testing
software. Now, with the newest release of EZ Test Online, instructors can select questions from multiple
McGraw-Hill test banks, author their own and then either print the test for paper distribution or give it online.
Features and Functions
N Test Creation
N
Online Test Management
N
Online Scoring and Reporting
N EZ Test is designed to make it simple for you to select questions from McGraw-Hill test banks. You can
use a single McGraw-Hill test bank, or easily choose questions from multiple McGraw-Hill test banks.
N EZ Test supports the use of following question types:
NTrue or False
NFill In the Blank
NYes or No
NNumeric Response
NMultiple Choice
NMatching
NCheck All That Apply
NRanking
NShort Answer
NSurvey
NEssay
N Uses variables to create algorithmic questions for any question type.
N You can create multiple versions of the same test.
N You can scramble questions to create different versions of your test.
N
Automated scoring for most of EZ test’s numerous questions types.
How do you get it?
To learn if it is available with your book, contact your local McGraw-Hill Education Representatives
or email [email protected].
www.blackboard.com
/
www.webct.com
course management systems
Course Management Systems like Blackboard and WebCT offer you another way to integrate
digital McGraw-Hill content into your class. McGrawHill Online Learning Center content is formatted to
save you hours of computer inputting.
How instructors use it
Load McGraw-Hill content into your
platform and you will have a fully populated
course online. You can then customize the
content to match your syllabus. You will
also be able to assign specific exercises,
quizzes, or readings to your students.
Grades are posetd automatically to let you
know how students are doing as a whole,
or individually. Built-in communication
allows you to conduct live chats, oversee
bulletin board topics, and e-mail students
who might need more help than others.
How students use it
Students can visit your online course via
the Internet to check the coursework you
have assigned. The platform will record the
students’ progress through your course,
which will enable you to see where they
are studying most. Self-grading quizzes
also indicate exactly where students
need further review. The platform’s
communicaiton
system
encourages
student collaboration with features such
as live chat rooms, asynchronous bulletin
boards, or traditional e-mail.
Introductory Psychology .......................................................................................5
Introductory Psychology ........................................................................................................... 7
Introductory Psychology – Readers ....................................................................................... 16
Developmental Psychology ................................................................................19
Adolescence – Reader / Cases .............................................................................................. 34
Adolescence – Texts .............................................................................................................. 32
Adulthood and Aging .............................................................................................................. 35
Adulthood and Aging – Readers............................................................................................. 36
Child Development – Chronological ....................................................................................... 27
Child Development – Topical .................................................................................................. 29
Child Development – Readers / Cases .................................................................................. 30
Child, Family & Society .......................................................................................................... 31
Developmental Psychopathology ........................................................................................... 39
Gender Role Development ..................................................................................................... 40
Human Development / Lifespan – Chronological ................................................................... 21
Human Development / Lifespan – Topical .............................................................................. 24
Human Development / Lifespan – Readers ........................................................................... 25
Educational Psychology .....................................................................................43
Death and Dying..................................................................................................................... 51
Child, Family & Society – Readers ......................................................................................... 50
Educational Psychology ......................................................................................................... 45
Educational Psychology – Readers........................................................................................ 48
Infants & Toddlers ................................................................................................................... 50
Social and Personality Psychology.....................................................................53
Advanced Social Psychology ................................................................................................. 58
Attitudes and Behavior ........................................................................................................... 57
Health Psychology.................................................................................................................. 62
Interpersonal Relations .......................................................................................................... 62
Intimacy .................................................................................................................................. 59
Motivation and Emotion .......................................................................................................... 63
Personality.............................................................................................................................. 57
Psychology of Prejudice ......................................................................................................... 62
Psychology of Women and Gender ........................................................................................ 60
Psychology of Women and Gender – Reader ........................................................................ 60
Social Psychology – Texts ...................................................................................................... 55
Social Psychology – Readers................................................................................................. 56
Cover design images©istockphoto.com
1
DEVELOPMENT
OF CONTENT
TABLEENGLISH
PSYCHOLOGY
TABLE OF CONTENT
Clinical Psychology.............................................................................................65
Abnormal Psychology............................................................................................................. 67
Abnormal Psychology – Readers ........................................................................................... 68
Counseling ............................................................................................................................. 69
Developmental Psychopathology ........................................................................................... 72
Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology ............................................................................................... 69
Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology – Readers.............................................................................. 70
Experimental Psychology ...................................................................................73
Cognitive Psychology ............................................................................................................. 79
Perception .............................................................................................................................. 79
Physiological Psychology / Psychobiology ............................................................................. 80
Research Methods ................................................................................................................. 75
SPSS/SAS.............................................................................................................................. 77
Tests and Measurements ....................................................................................................... 78
Applied Psychology ............................................................................................81
Industrial Psychology – Organizational Behavior ................................................................... 83
Sports Psychology.................................................................................................................. 83
Psychology History & Systems ...........................................................................85
History and Systems .............................................................................................................. 86
Human Sexuality ................................................................................................87
Human Sexuality .................................................................................................................... 89
Human Sexuality – Readers................................................................................................... 90
2
Sociology ..........................................................................................................117
Comparative Societies ......................................................................................................... 156
Criminology .......................................................................................................................... 145
Criminology – Readers ......................................................................................................... 146
Drugs & Society.................................................................................................................... 143
Drugs & Society – Readers .................................................................................................. 144
Gerontology / Sociology of Aging – Readers........................................................................ 123
Introductory Sociology ............................................................................................................ 99
Introductory Sociology – Readers ........................................................................................ 104
Marriage & the Family ...........................................................................................................111
Marriage & the Family – Readers......................................................................................... 113
Medical Sociology – Readers ............................................................................................... 122
Political Sociology ................................................................................................................ 129
Race and Ethnicity ............................................................................................................... 126
Race and Ethnicity – Readers .............................................................................................. 128
Race, Class, Gender, and Sexuality..................................................................................... 118
Research Methods ............................................................................................................... 141
Sex Roles ............................................................................................................................. 154
Social Inequality / Social Stratification.................................................................................. 131
Social Problems ................................................................................................................... 108
Social Problems – Readers .................................................................................................. 108
Social Psychology ................................................................................................................ 139
Social Psychology – Readers............................................................................................... 141
Sociological Theory .............................................................................................................. 133
Sociological Theory – Readers ............................................................................................ 135
Sociology of Death ............................................................................................................... 124
Sociology of Death – Readers.............................................................................................. 124
Sociology of Education – Readers ....................................................................................... 147
Sociology of Family .............................................................................................................. 114
Sociology of Family – Readers............................................................................................. 116
Sociology of Gender ............................................................................................................. 137
Sociology of Health – Readers ............................................................................................. 149
Sociology of Law – Readers................................................................................................. 146
Sociology of Sexuality – Readers......................................................................................... 151
Sociology of Sport ................................................................................................................ 147
Sociology of Women ............................................................................................................ 136
Special Topics ...................................................................................................................... 157
Special Topics – Readers ..................................................................................................... 158
SPSS / SAS.......................................................................................................................... 142
Statistics ............................................................................................................................... 142
Technology & Society ........................................................................................................... 155
Urban Sociology ................................................................................................................... 125
3
DEVELOPMENT
OF CONTENT
TABLEENGLISH
SOCIOLOGY
5
DEVELOPMENT
INTRODUCTORY
ENGLISH PSYCHOLOGY
Introductory Psychology .......................................................................................7
Introductory Psychology – Readers....................................................................16
NEW TITLES
INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY
2011
Author
Annual Editions: Psychology 10/11, 41e
Buskist
9780078050534
17
M Intro Psych
McGraw-Hill
9780078035234
7
Psychology: The Science of Mind and Behavior, 5e
Passer
9780073532127
7
Buskist
9780073516394
17
Psychology and Your Life
Feldman
9780077354732
8
Psychology: Making Connections
Feist
9780073531830
9
Experience Psychology
King
9780073405476
10
Science of Psychology: An Appreciative View Study Edition, The
King
9780073532141
11
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Psychological Issues, 16e
Slife
9780078139420
18
Psych 2.0 Online Experience Guide
Rahhal
9780077275884
16
Psychology for Nurses (Asian Pub)
Salgado
9789833850761
12
ISBN
Page
2010
2009
6
Introductory to Psychology
Introductory Psychology
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Psychology
2. Neuroscience and Behavior
3. Sensation and Perception
4. Consciousness
5. Learning
6. Memory
7. Cognition, Language, and Intelligence
8. Motivation and Emotion
9. Lifespan Development
10. Personality
11. Stress, Coping, and Well-Being
12. Psychological Disorders and Their Treatments
13. Social Psychology
NEW
*9780078035234*
M INTRO PSYCH
McGraw-Hill
2011 / 448 pages
ISBN: 9780078035234
Available: January 2010
www.mhhe.com/psychsmart1e2001
Are your students reading effectively?
NEW
Are your students performing as well as they hope and expect to in
your course?
*9780073532127*
Meet PsychSmart from McGraw-Hill. PsychSmart is the newest
member of the McGraw-Hill M Series family … and the M Series
started with YOUR students.
PSYCHOLOGY: THE SCIENCE OF MIND AND
BEHAVIOR
5th Edition
Through extensive student research, we have created a textbook
and learning system designed to meet the needs and maximize the
workflow habits of today’s college students. Students told us they
wanted a briefer text with more visual appeal…and a less expensive
price.
Michael W Passer and Ronald E Smith of University of Washington
2011 / 832 pages
ISBN: 9780073532127
Available: July 2010
We listened.
[Details unavailable at press time]
We also listened to instructors.
We learned about the challenges that they faced in their classrooms
everyday and what their ideal course materials would look like. They
told us they needed an engaging solution for their course needs – but
without sacrificing quality and content.
The result is PsychSmart. Authored by master teachers, PsychSmart
uses a wealth of real world examples, media and online interactivities
to create a dynamic and engaging learning solution designed to reach
today’s students.
FEATURES
v Dynamic design format inspired by contemporary magazines to
enhance student engagement in the text material. Stunning images,
charts, and graphs throughout grab the reader’s attention and make
serious scholarship enjoyable to read.
v Intro Psych M Series is offered at a significant discount to
traditional introductory psychology textbooks.
v Pedagogy that works for students. Each chapter offers a wealth
of usable and effective pedagogical tools from the beginning to the
conclusion of each chapter, ensuring students read, understand, and
learn the material.
v Engaging features of high interest to today’s students. Recurring
features in each chapter, such as Psych in the Media and Buy It?,
speak directly to today’s generation of students showing them the
connections between what they are reading and learning and what
they are living.
v Proven content quality. Based on the highly successful core of
material from Bob Feldman’s other texts, this M Series title offers a
tested and trusted presentation of the science of psychology.
7
*9780077354732*
This feature includes scenarios such as how to evaluate advertising,
and how to determine if one should seek counseling.
NEW
v Full Circle feature is an end-of-chapter map that identifies the
correlation of the overarching chapter key concepts. Visual learners
will benefit from the Chapter Maps which “tie everything together” by
revisiting and reinforcing the key concepts for every module within
each chapter.
International Edition
v PsychInteractive includes many activities and assessments,
online and hands-on, that allow students to conduct experiments
tied directly to the content. Free! See www.mhhe.com/feldmaness7
to preview the activities. Psychology and Your Life will map the
activities to the modules in the text. PsychInteractive will be
available with Psychology and Your Life upon publication. The
PsychInteractive exercises can be completed alone or in class.
They provide experiential, applied activities which are frequently
described as “interesting and fun!” Great for students who prefer to
“learn by doing”.
PSYCHOLOGY AND YOUR
LIFE
Robert S Feldman, University of Mass-Amherst
2010 / Softcover / 448 pages
ISBN: 9780077354732 [MP]
ISBN: 9780070167117 [IE]
v Looking Forward/Looking Back feature introduces the key
concepts of every chapter; Looking Back summarizes content from
the chapter as a whole to reinforce the learning outcomes of each
module. (For a visual representation of the Looking Back Feature,
see the explanation of the Full Circle feature). Looking Forward
introduces each chapter so students can examine the overarching
chapter concepts. Looking Back provides them with an overall
chapter summary, restating what they should have learned during
their chapter review.
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/psychlife
This text also provides instructors with a fully-integrated supplements
package to help instructors objectively gauge their students’ mastery
of psychology’s key principles and concepts and to create dynamic
class experiences—whether in the classroom or online. All ancillary
materials are organized by the measurable learning outcomes of each
module within the text—there is no more wondering whether the text
in use will meet the accreditation guidelines for schools! Emphasizing
practical application, Psychology and Your Life offers examples and
perspectives from the healthcare industry (including Allied Health),
technology, criminal justice, legal, and business, among others to
prepare students to readily prepare and apply psychology throughout
their lives and careers.
v Key terms, definitions, and glossary. Key terms are easily
identifiable (bolded and called out in the margins with definitions)
within each module and are listed, with page references at the end of
every module. The glossary includes enhanced definitions—additional
explanations of difficult or confusing terms using synonyms or
expanded parenthetical definitions—allowing students to expand their
knowledge of the terminology associated with psychology. Providing
the most clear, accessible definitions helps students recognize,
identify, define, and describe the terminology and definitions.
Enhancements to the glossary definitions are designed to provide
extra support to students at a variety of reading levels and abilities.
FEATURES
v “From the Perspective of” highlights how psychology impacts
a variety of professions. Created to show the correlation between
psychology and different professions, students learn to comprehend
what psychology means to their chosen program of study and answers
the “why does psychology matter to me” question. Whether students
are in an Allied Health, Nursing, criminal justice, technology, business,
or legal studies track, they will have the chance to make connections
between their area of study and their lives after completing their
program.
v Recap/Evaluate/Rethink end-of-module activities are tied directly
to the module’s learning outcomes boosting students’ opportunities to
apply and analyze their knowledge beyond the definitions or simple
explanations. These activities allow instructors to move students
from memorization to application and analysis in a cohesive, logical
manner through a variety of activities and exercises tied to the
learning outcomes of the module. Instructors who are familiar with
Bloom’s Taxonomy or who want to provide activities for students with
different learning styles will find a variety of exercises for homework
or class discussion.
v Try It! Experiential self-assessment quizzes reinforce chapter
concepts and enable students to consider, compare, and contrast their
preferences, behaviors, and attitudes. Similar to the fun quizzes students
may take online or in magazines, the Try It! boxes are self-assessment
quizzes that tie directly to and reinforce the chapter concepts in
a non-threatening (even fun!) manner. Active learning at its best!
v Case Studies, found at the end of each chapter, allow students
to apply and analyze the chapter content and discuss what they have
learned in the context of a story or situation. Students will analyze
a situation through critical thinking, discussion, and interaction with
other students whose perspectives may differ from their own.
v Study Alert study tips tied into chapter content promote positive
learning behaviors within the context of psychology. Students can
prepare and apply the learned skills in their current course. Provides
additional information to help students understand tough or confusing
concepts and provides guidance for what information will follow later
in each chapter.
v Psychology on the Web consists of various web-based activities
found at the end of every chapter to promote internet research of key
chapter concepts. Great for active learning and increasing students’
abilities to conduct internet research and critique internet resources
within the context of their psychology class!
v Exploring Diversity strategically placed within the modules
address how diversity and perspective relate to the study of
psychology. Exploring Diversity promotes critical thinking about
psychology concepts through the discussion and assessment of
cultural and ethnic differences in direct correlation to research, study,
and our lives.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction to Psychology
Module 1: Psychologists at Work
Module 2: A Science Evolves: The Past, the Present, and the
Future
Module 3: Research in Psychology
Module 4: The Ethics of Research
v Becoming an Informed Consumer of Psychology—Psychology
concepts are discussed in the context of the student as a consumer.
These real-life scenarios enable students to consider and even
implement psychological concepts within the world around them and
apply critical thinking skills to their personal and professional lives.
8
*9780073531830*
Chapter 2: Neuroscience and Behavior
Module 5: Neurons: The Basic Elements of Behavior
Module 6: The Nervous System and the Endocrine System:
Communicating Within the Body
Module 7: The Brain
Chapter 3: Sensation and Perception
Module 8: Sensing the World Around Us
Module 9: Vision: Shedding Light on the Eye
Module 10: Hearing and the Other Senses
Module 11: Perceptual Organization: Constructing Our View of the
World
Chapter 4: States of Consciousness
Module 12: Sleep and Dreams
Module 13: Hypnosis and Meditation
Module 14: Drug Use: The Highs and Lows of Consciousness
Chapter 5: Learning
Module 15: Classical Conditioning
Module 16: Operant Conditioning
Module 17: Cognitive Approaches to Learning
Chapter 6: Thinking: Memory, Cognition, and Language
Module 18: The Foundations of Memory
Module 19: Recall and Forgetting
Module 20: Thinking, Reasoning, and Problem Solving
Module 21: Language
Chapter 7: Motivation and Emotion
Module 22: Explaining Motivation
Module 23: Human Needs and Motivation: Eat, Drink, and Be Daring
Module 24: Understanding Emotional Experiences
Chapter 8: Development
Module 25: Nature and Nurture, and Prenatal Development
Module 26: Infancy and Childhood
Module 27: Adolescence: Becoming an Adult
Module 28: Adulthood
Chapter 9: Personality and Individual Differences
Module 29: Psychodynamic Approaches to Personality
Module 30: Trait, Learning, Biological and Evolutionary, and
Humanistic Approaches to Personality
Module 31: Assessing Personality: Determining What Makes Us
Distinctive
Module 32: Intelligence?
Chapter 10: Psychological Disorders
Module 33: Normal Versus Abnormal: Making a Distinction
Module 34: The Major Psychological Disorders
Module 35: Psychological Disorders in Perspective
Chapter 11: Treatment of Psychological Disorders
Module 36: Psychotherapy: Psychodynamic, Behavioral, and
Cognitive Approaches to Treatment
Module 37: Psychotherapy: Humanistic and Group Approaches to
Treatment
Module 38: Biomedical Therapy: Biological Approaches to
Treatment
Chapter 12: Social Psychology
Module 39: Attitudes and Social Cognition
Module 40: Social Influence and Groups
Module 41: Prejudice and Discrimination
Module 42: Positive and Negative Social Behavior
Module 43: Stress and Coping
NEW
PSYCHOLOGY: MAKING
CONNECTIONS
Gregory J Feist, San Jose State University
Erika Rosenberg, University of California Davis
2010 / Hardcover / 768 pages
ISBN: 9780073531830
ISBN: 9780071285339 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/feist1e
Connect with science. Connect with students. Connect with Feist
and Rosenberg’s Psychology. In Psychology: Making Connections,
Greg Feist and Erika Rosenberg provide the tools for students
to make meaningful connections with the material encompassed
in Introductory Psychology while still presenting psychology as a
scientific endeavor. With its focus on connections, Feist helps your
students to understand both the discipline and concepts of psychology
as well as psychology’s relevance to their lives. Feist provides you with
the science you are seeking while bringing it alive for your students
in an accessible way. By challenging students to make connections
between what they are reading and learning about in class and the
world around them outside the classroom, Psychology: Making
Connections fosters students’ critical thinking skills. At the same time,
the authors consistently reinforce the idea that science is a process
and not just a collection of resulting outcomes to be memorized. In
doing so, they bring to life the names and experiments on the page
and vividly illustrate the human element in the scientific method.
FEATURES
v Connecting nature and nurture. Feist and Rosenberg explore the
interplay of nature and nurture throughout the text, breaking down
any preconceived misconceptions students may have about a nature
OR nurture dichotomy. This is accomplished in the narrative and in
recurring marginal Nature/Nurture features.
v Connecting psychologists and their scientific discoveries.
“Breaking New Ground” sections in each chapter highlight
breakthrough discoveries that have fundamentally altered the field
of psychology.
v Connecting key concepts within the chapter. Making Connections
sections at the conclusion of each chapter reiterate the major ideas
in the chapter and show how they can be applied to a common
problem.
v Connecting topics and subfields across chapters. “Connection”
marginal features emphasize links among subdisciplines of
psychology, reminding students that psychology is an integrated
discipline and not a hodgepodge of topics thrown together.
v Connecting Psychology with Student Experiences. In the
narrative and in Psychology in the Real World features in each chapter,
the authors consistently demonstrate the ways that psychology
impacts students’ everyday lives.
v Biological art inserts. Recognizing that biological concepts
and structures are often some of the more difficult aspects for
Introductory Psychology students to master, Feist and Rosenberg
include transparency inserts in the text to foster better understanding
of this material.
9
CONTENTS
FEATURES
Preface
Foreword by Paul Ekman
1 Introduction to Psychology
2 Conducting Psychological Research
3 Biological Foundations
4 Sensation and Perception
5 The Developing Human
6 Consciousness
7 Memory
8 Learning
9 Language and Thought
10 Intelligence, Problem-Solving, and Creativity
11 Motivation
12 Emotion
13 Stress, Coping, and Health
14 Personality and the Uniqueness of the Individual
15 Social Behavior
16 Psychological Disorders
17 Treatment of Psychological Disorders
Glossary
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
v What is your experience with students’ completion or
comprehension of the assigned reading?
v Experience Psychology provides an adaptive questioning
diagnostic that ensures students understand the key concepts in
the chapter. Whether they use this dynamic resource before or after
class (or doing the reading), your students will read more and more
effectively.
v With Experience Psychology, your students hear the story of the
science of psychology from an engaging author who speaks to them
personally and directly, actively drawing them into the reading.
v How many students come to your course less than adequately
prepared for the experience of a college psychology survey?
v A recent survey of professors by the Chronicle of Higher Education
showed that 84 percent believe their students are “unprepared’’ or
only “somewhat prepared’’ to pursue a college degree.
v The dynamic adaptive questioning diagnostic quickly shows
students they are not likely to perform as well as they would like--or
as previous performance might predict--if they are only “reading”
the text to memorize key terms, facts, and people. Applied and
conceptual items are included in this diagnostic system, along with
purely factual questions to ensure students are prepared to perform
to your expectations before the reckoning of the first big exam. At-aglance visual reporting allows you to quickly identify students who are
struggling or even entire sections that might be lagging.
v Laura King provides a variety of means within the text to
ensure students are prepared to meet the demands of Introductory
Psychology. Section previews prepare students for the reading ahead
and section-ending Self-Quizzes give them an opportunity to check
their understanding of key concepts. End-of-chapter Self-Tests serve
a similar purpose. Marginal notes from the author alert students to pay
additional attention to concepts students often find difficult or “tricky.”
Biological art acetates are built into the text to help students in one
of the typically difficult areas by allowing them to build from basic to
more complex structures.
*9780073405476*
NEW
EXPERIENCE PSYCHOLOGY
Laura A King, University of Missouri-Columbia
2010 / 576 pages
ISBN: 9780073405476
ISBN: 9780070172500 [IE]
Available: October 2009
v How has the experience of teaching introductory psychology
changed over the past 5-10 years? What are you doing differently
to address the changing nature of students as well as changes in
personnel, technology, etc.?
http://www.mhhe.com/kingep
v Through thousands of hours of research with you and your
students, we have identified some consistent trends that are
nearly universal. At the top of the list, clearly time is at a premium
as faculty are stretched thinner and asked to do more with less.
Experience Psychology is ideal for this environment as its flexibility
allows instructors to use as little or as much (or none) of the digital
component as they choose. Turnkey course setups are available
almost immediately, or the course can be customized at virtually any
level of granularity. This makes Experience Psychology perfect for
face-to-face, online, or hybrid course delivery.
Do you want your students to just take psychology or to experience
psychology?
Experience Psychology is a first. Its groundbreaking adaptive
questioning diagnostic and personalized study plan help students
“know what they know” while guiding them to experience and learn
what they don’t know through engaging interactivities, exercises,
and readings. After all, to truly understand psychology and all its
wonders, one must experience it firsthand. And, luckily, there are so
many natural opportunities to do so. Psychology is all around us—in
our relationships, our homes, our communities, our schools, and our
work. But linking everyday experiences to the academic discipline
of Psychology is not always so easy. Laura King’s Experience
Psychology was built to do just that. Experience Psychology
introduces function before dysfunction, building student awareness
and understanding by looking first at typical, everyday behavior
before delving into the less common—and likely less personally
experienced—rare and abnormal. Experience Psychology places
the science of psychology and the research that helps students see
the academic underpinnings at the forefront of the course and at the
same time offers an abundance of applications that helps students
connect the science of psychology to the world around them. At the
same time, “Intersections” ensure students experience psychology
as the interconnected discipline it is. Experience Psychology helps
students to perform to their maximum potential in and out of the
classroom, fully engaging them in the content and experiences that
comprise the world’s most popular undergraduate major.
v Experience Psychology’s recurring features such as Challenge
Your Thinking, Intersection, and Do It! exercises complement the
on-line tools by encouraging active engagement with the assigned
reading as well as critical thinking. Their inclusion in the text means
less time spent by you looking for current debates in psychological
research for discussion and development of critical thinking skills
(Challenge Your Thinking), connections between subfields that
show students psychology is interconnected and not a series of
unrelated topics or chapters (Intersection), and hands-on exercises
students can do in and out of the classroom to apply the science of
psychology (Do It!).
10
v Integrated supplements development. The text author, Laura
King, and all of the supplement authors met before the writing of the
ancillaries to accompany the text to ensure a true integration of book
and supporting material. After meeting initially, the team continued to
communicate with one another and the author to ensure the highest
quality and consistency.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1--The Science of Psychology
Chapter 2--The Brain and Behavior
Chapter 3--Sensation and Perception
Chapter 4--States of Consciousness
Chapter 5--Learning
Chapter 6--Memory
Chapter 7--Thinking, Intelligence, and Language
Chapter 8--Human Development
Chapter 9--Motivation
Chapter 10--Personality
Chapter 11--Social Psychology
Chapter 12--Psychological Disorders
Chapter 13--Therapies
Chapter 14--Health Psychology
v Up-to-date research and coverage. Psychology is a vigorous
young science, and knowledge changes quickly. The Science of
Psychology features the most current research interwoven with classic
findings to give students a sense of this vitality.
v Multiple choice practice questions. At the end of each major
section within chapters, at the end of every chapter, and in a new
Appendix, The Science of Psychology offers numerous opportunities
for students to assess their comprehension of key concepts.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 What Is Psychology? Defining Psychology
Chapter 2 Psychology’s Scientific Methods
Chapter 3 Biological Foundations of Behavior
Chapter 4 Human Development
Chapter 5 Sensation and Perception
Chapter 6 States of Consciousness
Chapter 7 Learning
Chapter 8 Memory
Chapter 9 Thinking, Language, and Intelligence
Chapter 10 Motivation and Emotion
Chapter 11 Personality
Chapter 12 Social Psychology
Chapter 13 Psychological Disorders
Chapter 14 Therapies
Chapter 15 Health Psychology
Appendix A: Practice Mid-term and Final Exams
Appendix B: Answers to the Assess Your Knowledge Chapter Quizzes
and the Practice Mid-term and Final Exams
NEW
*9780073532141*
THE SCIENCE OF
PSYCHOLOGY
An Appreciative View
Study Edition
Laura A King, University of
Missouri-Columbia
2010 / 816 pages
ISBN: 9780073532141
www.mhhe.com/king1
Why Things Go Right. The Science of Psychology: An Appreciative
View Study Edition by Laura King (University of Missouri at Columbia)
is the first text to bring a truly appreciative view of psychology-as a
science and for exploring behavior-to introductory students. It is built
around the idea that students must study the discipline of psychology
as a whole, that the sub-disciplines are intricately connected, and that
human behavior is best understood by exploring its functioning state
in addition to its potential dysfunctions. In this new Study Edition,
Laura King maintains her extremely popular blend of contemporary
research and writing that maximizes students’ interest. This edition
offers multiple choice review questions throughout each chapter as
well as practice quizzes and exams.
FEATURES
v Psychology as an integrated whole. Presents psychology as
an integrated field in which many specialized subfields overlap and
where research findings in one subfield support important studies
and exciting discoveries in another.
v Function before dysfunction. The Science of Psychology begins
with the premise that we need to explore functional behavior in its own
right and as a context for abnormal behavior. In other words, we need
to study why things go right before studying why things go wrong.
v Innovative Biological Art Program. The Science of Psychology
has an innovative art program that includes transparency inserts –
bound into the text - on the brain and nervous system as well as the
senses. These unique eye-opening visuals are just one more way
that the text works to engage and inform students.
v Health and Wellness. Illustrates the relevance of psychology to
students by focusing on the implications of the material covered for
their own health and wellness.
11
Module 6 The Nervous System and the Endocrine System:
Module 7 The Brain
Module 8 Sensing the World Around Us
Module 9 Vision: Shedding Light on the Eye
Module 10 Hearing and the Other Senses
Module 11 Perceptual Organization: Constructing Our View of the World
Module 12 Sleep and Dreams
Module 13 Hypnosis and Meditation
Module 14 Drug Use: The Highs and Lows of Consciousness
Chapter 5 Learning
Module 15 Classical Conditioning
Module 16 Operant Conditioning
Module 17 Cognitive Approaches to Learning
Chapter 6 Memory
Module 18 The Foundations of Memory
Module 19 Recalling Long-Term Memories
Module 20 Forgetting: When Memory Fails
Module 21 Thinking and Reasoning
Module 22 Language
Module 23 Intelligence
Module 24 Explaining Motivation
Module 25 Human Needs and Motivation: Eat, Drink, and Be Daring
Module 26 Understanding Emotional Experiences
Chapter 9 Development
Module 27 Nature and Nurture and Prenatal Development
Module 28 Infancy and Childhood
Module 29 Adolescence: Becoming an Adult
Module 30 Adulthood
Module 31 Psychodynamic Approaches to Personality
Module 32 Trait, Learning, Biological, Evolutionary, and Humanistic
Approaches to Personality
Module 33 Assessing Personality: Determining What Makes Us
Distinctive
Chapter 11 Health Psychology: Stress, Coping, and Well-Being
Module 34 Stress and Coping
Module 35 Psychological Aspects of Illness and Well-Being
Module 36 Promoting Health and Wellness
Module 37 Normal Versus Abnormal: Making the Distinction
Module 38 The Major Psychological Disorders
Module 39 Psychological Disorders in Perspective
Chapter 13 Treatment of Psychological Disorders
Module 40 Psychotherapy: Psychodynamic, Behavioral, and Cognitive
Approaches to Treatment
Module 41 Psychotherapy: Humanistic, Interpersonal, and Group
Module 42 Biomedical Therapy: Biological Approaches to Treatment
Module 43 Attitudes and Social Cognition
Module 44 Social Influence
Module 45 Prejudice and Discrimination
Module 46 Positive and Negative Social Behavior
Glossary G-1
References R-1
Credits C-1
Name Index I-1
Subject Index I-15
NEW
*9789833850761*
PSYCHOLOGY FOR NURSES
Arnel Banaga Salgado, UCSI University-Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
2009 / 188 pages
ISBN: 9789833850761
Available: June 2009
[An Asian Publication]
A comprehensive book written for those taking diploma and degree
programmes in nursing. It is also for the registered nurses (RN) who
would like to enrich their nursing practice.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Psychology for Nurses
Chapter 2: Psychology, Human Behavior, and Nursing Practice
Chapter 3: Human Development
Chapter 4: The Biological and Physiological Basis of Behavior
Chapter 6: Consciousness, Sleep, and Awareness
Chapter 7: Theories of Personality
Chapter 8: Intelligence, Learning, and Cognitive Psychology
Chapter 9: Motivation
Chapter 10: Emotions
Chapter 11: Stress, Conflict, and Coping Mechanisms
Chapter 12: The Psychology of Social Behavior
C h a p t e r 1 3 : P s y c h o l o g i c a l A s s e s s m e n t a n d Te s t i n g
(Psychometrics)
ESSENTIALS OF UNDERSTANDING
PSYCHOLOGY
8th Edition
ISBN: 9780073370200
ISBN: 9780071285346 [IE]
Students First. Bob Feldman’s Essentials of Understanding
Psychology guides students through Introductory Psychology
concepts in an accessible manner, bringing comprehension of difficult
material into the grasp of all students — because when students
understand psychology, they learn psychology. The thoroughly revised
Eighth Edition integrates a variety of elements that foster students’
understanding of psychology and its impact on their everyday
lives, including a new Neuroscience and Life feature, alerts to key
topics, and study skills for specific concepts. This text also provides
instructors with a fully integrated supplements package to objectively
gauge their students’ mastery of psychology’s key principles and
concepts and to create dynamic lectures.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction to Psychology
Module 1 Psychologists at Work
Module 2 A Science Evolves: The Past, the Present, and the Future
Module 3 Psychology’s Key Issues and Controversies
Module 4 Research Challenges
Chapter 2 Neuroscience and Behavior
Module 5 Neurons: The Basic Elements of Behavior
12
Module 29 Explaining Motivation
Module 30 Human Needs and Motivation: Eat, Drink, and Be Daring
Module 31 Understanding Emotional Experiences
Chapter 11 Sexuality and Gender
Module 32 Gender and Sex
Module 33 Understanding Human Sexual Response: The Facts of
Life
Module 34 The Diversity of Sexual Behavior
Chapter 12 Development
Module 35 Nature and Nurture: The Enduring Developmental
Issue/
Module 36 Prenatal Development: Conception to Birth
Module 37 Infancy and Childhood
Module 38 Adolescence: Becoming an Adult
Module 39 Adulthood
Module 40 Psychodynamic Approaches to Personality
Module 41 Trait, Learning, Biological, Evolutionary, and Humanistic
Approaches to Personality
Module 42 Assessing Personality: Determining What Makes Us
Distinctive
Chapter 14 Health Psychology: Stress, Coping, and Well-Being
Module 43 Stress and Coping
Module 44 Psychological Aspects of Illness and Well-Being
Module 45 Promoting Health and Wellness
Module 46 Normal Versus Abnormal: Making the Distinction
Module 47 The Major Psychological Disorders
Module 48 Psychological Disorders in Perspective
Module 49Psychotherapy: Psychodynamic, Behavioral, and Cognitive
Module 50 Psychotherapy: Humanistic, Interpersonal, and Group
Module 51iomedical Therapy: Biological Approaches to Treatment
Module 52 Attitudes and Social Cognition
Module 53 Social Influence
Module 54 Prejudice and Discrimination
Module 55 Positive and Negative Social Behavior
Appendix Going by the Numbers: Statistics in Psychology A-1
Module 56 Descriptive Statistics A-3
Module 57 Measures of Variability A-7
Module 58 Using Statistics to Answer Questions: Inferential Statistics
and Correlation A-11
Glossary G-1
References R-1
Credits C-1
Name Index I-1
Subject Index I-15
UNDERSTANDING PSYCHOLOGY
9th Edition
ISBN: 9780073370194
ISBN: 9780071285353 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/feldmanup9e
Students First. Bob Feldman’s Understanding Psychology guides
students through Introductory Psychology concepts in an accessible
manner, bringing comprehension of difficult material into the grasp of
all students — because when students understand psychology, they
learn psychology. The thoroughly revised Ninth Edition integrates a
variety of elements that foster students’ understanding of psychology
and its impact on their everyday lives, including a new Neuroscience
In Your Life feature, alerts to key topics, and study skills for specific
concepts. This text also provides instructors with a fully integrated
supplements package to objectively gauge their students’ mastery
of psychology’s key principles and concepts and to create dynamic
lectures.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction to Psychology
Module 1 Psychologists at Work
Module 2 A Science Evolves: The Past, the Present, and the
Future
Module 3 Psychology’s Key Issues and Controversies
Chapter 2 Psychological Research
Module 4 The Scientific Method
Module 5 Conducting Psychological Research
Module 6 Critical Research Issues
Chapter 3 Neuroscience and Behavior
Module 7 Neurons: The Basic Elements of Behavior
Module 8 The Nervous System and the Endocrine System:
Module 9 The Brain
Module 10 Sensing the World Around Us
Module 11 Vision: Shedding Light on the Eye
Module 12 Hearing and the Other Senses
Module 13 Perceptual Organization: Constructing Our View of the
World
Module 14 Sleep and Dreams
Module 15 Hypnosis and Meditation
Module 16 Drug Use: The Highs and Lows of Consciousness
Chapter 6 Learning
Module 17 Classical Conditioning
Module 18 Operant Conditioning
Module 19 Cognitive Approaches to Learning
Chapter 7 Memory
Module 20 The Foundations of Memory
Module 21 Recalling Long-Term Memories
Module 22 Forgetting: When Memory Fails
Chapter 8 Cognition and Language
Module 23 Thinking and Reasoning
Module 24 Problem Solving
Module 25 Language
Chapter 9 Intelligence
Module 26 What Is Intelligence?
Module 27 Variations in Intellectual Ability
Module 28 Group Differences in Intelligence: Genetic and
Environmental Determinants
13
PSYCHOLOGY: THE SCIENCE OF MIND AND
BEHAVIOR
4th Edition
PSYCHOLOGY: AN INTRODUCTION
10th Edition
Benjamin B Lahey, University of Chicago
ISBN: 9780073531984
ISBN: 9780071280006 [IE]
Michael W. Passer, University of Washington
Ronald E. Smith, University of Washington
2009 / 800 pages
ISBN: 9780073382760
ISBN: 9780071270861 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/lahey10e
A contemporary take on a time tested classic. Students will master
the central concepts of psychology with the new 10th edition of
Psychology from Benjamin Lahey. A new chapter on the Interplay
of Nature and Nurture highlights the 10th edition’s new organization
and streamlined content . Lahey weaves scholarship based on
empirical research throughout the text, ensuring an accurate portrait
of contemporary psychology. The text’s student-friendly writing, new
chapter openers, and fresh applications make the material more
relevant to students than ever before, and the proven learning system
ensures that all students will grasp the concepts presented in the
book. Lahey’s hallmark emphasis on diversity and culture remains
integrated throughout the text, making this the text for a well rounded
introduction to all areas of psychology.
www.mhhe.com/passer4
Psychology: The Science of Mind and Behavior imparts students with
a scientific understanding of the field of psychology while showing
them the impact on their day-to-day existence. A simple conceptual
framework within the text emphasizes relations between biological,
psychological, and environmental levels of analysis and portrays the
focus of modern psychology. Together with Research Close-Ups in
each chapter and Beneath the Surface discussions and What Do You
Think? questions, the text challenges students to think critically about
psychology as a science and its impact on their lives.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 The Science of Psychology
Chapter 2 Studying Behavior Scientifically
Chapter 3 Genes, Environment, and Behavior
Chapter 4 The Brain and Behavior
Chapter 7 Learning and Adaptation: The Role of Experience
Chapter 8 Memory
Chapter 9 Language and Thinking
Chapter 10 Intelligence
Chapter 12 Development over the Life Span
Chapter 14 Adjusting to Life: Stress, Coping, and Health
Chapter 17 Social Thinking and Behavior Appendix: Statistics in
Psychology A-1
CONTENTS
Part 1: Introduction And Foundations
Chapter 1: Introduction to Psychology
Chapter 2: Research Methods in Psychology
Chapter 3: Biological Foundations in Behavior
Chapter 4: The Interplay of Nature and Nurture
Part 2: Awareness
Chapter 6: States of Consciousness
Part 3: Learning And Cognition
Chapter 7: Basic Principles of Learning
Chapter 8: Memory
Chapter 9: Cognition, Language, and Intelligence
Part 4: Developmental Psychology
Chapter 10: Developmental Psychology
Part 5: The Self
Chapter 11: Motivation and Emotion
Chapter 12: Personality Theories and Assessment
Part 6: Health and Adjustment
Chapter 13: Stress and Health
Chapter 14: Abnormal Behavior
Chapter 15: Therapies
Part 7: Social Context
Chapter 16: Social Psychology
Chapter 17: Psychology Applied to Business and other Professions
14
THE SCIENCE OF PSYCHOLOGY
AN APPRECIATIVE VIEW
ESSENTIALS OF PSYCHOLOGY WITH
MAKING THE GRADE CD-ROM
Laura King, University of Missouri--Columbia
2008 / 864 pages
ISBN: 9780073531885
ISBN: 9780071284035 [IE]
Available: November 2007
Website: www.mhhe.com/laheye1
Benjamin B. Lahey, University of Chicago
ISBN: 978072487626
ISBN: 9780071121200 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/king1
CONTENTS
Ch 1 - What is Psychology?
Ch 2 - Biological Foundations of Behavior
Ch 3 - Sensation and Perception
Ch 4 - States of Consciousness
Ch 5 - Basic Principles of Learning
Ch 6 - Memory
Ch 7 - Cognition, Language, and Intelligence
Ch 8 - Developmental Psychology
Ch 9 - Motivation and Emotion
Ch 10 - Gender
Ch 11 - Personality Theories and Assessment
Ch 12 - Stress and Health
Ch 13 - Abnormal Behavior
Ch 14 - Therapies
Ch 15 - Social Psychology
Appendix: Measurement, Research Design, and Statistics
Why Things Go Right. The Science of Psychology: An Appreciative
View by Laura King (University of Missouri at Columbia) is the first
text to bring a truly appreciative view of psychology—as a science
and for exploring behavior—to introductory students. It is built around
the idea that students must study the discipline of psychology as a
whole, that the sub-disciplines are intricately connected, and that
human behavior is best understood by exploring its functioning state
in addition to its potential dysfunctions. For example, imagine that
you have been asked to create a science of “watchology.” You have
two watches that both have had the unfortunate “trauma” of being left
in the pocket of someone’s jeans through the washer and dryer. One
watch has suffered the worst possible fate—it no longer tells time. The
other has emerged from the traumatic event still ticking. Which watch
would you use to develop your new science of watchology? Clearly,
the working watch will help you understand watches better than the
broken one. What does watchology have to do with psychology? Quite
simply, in psychology as in watchology, it makes sense to start with
what works: to gain a general understanding of human behavior and
then apply that knowledge to those who have emerged from life’s
experiences in dysfunction.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 What Is Psychology? Defining Psychology
Chapter 2 Psychology’s Scientific Methods
Chapter 3 Biological Foundations of Behavior
Chapter 4 Human Development
Chapter 7 Learning
Chapter 8 Memory
Chapter 13 Industrial and Organizational Psychology
Chapter 15 Therapies
Chapter 16 Health Psychology
15
Introductory Psychology –
Readers
Levels of Processing: Transferring Information from
Short Term Memory to Long Term Memory
Eyewitness Fallibility: Witnessing a Crime Eyewitness Fallibility:
Focusing Attention* Alzheimer’s Disease
Language, Cognition, and Intelligence
Thinking and Reasoning: Centenarians*
Heuristics
Gardner’s Theory of Multiple Intelligences
IQ Tests: Are they accurate measures of intelligence?*
Group Differences in IQ*
Mental Retardation: Down Syndrome*
Language Development*
Motivation and Emotion
The Need for Achievement
Emotion: Language of the Face*
Emotion: Body Language*
Detection of Deception
Sexuality and Gender
Gender Stereotypes: Implicit Associations Test
Sexual Response: Masters and Johnson*
Sex and Medicine: Sex, Sin, and Sickness*
Sex and Medicine: Alfred Kinsey*
Biological Aspects of Sexuality: Sexual Identity*
Adolescence: Sexual Identity*
Sexual Response: Viagra*
Science of Sexuality: Evolutionary Psychology & Mate Selection*
Adulthood: Interracial Relationships*
Development
Nature and Nurture
Genes and Behavior: Twin Studies*
Infant Vision: Seeing Through the Eyes of a Child*
Cognitive Development: Categorization*
Conservation
Stages of Moral Development
Adolescence: Adolescent Development*
Suicide Risk Factors
Personality
Defense Mechanisms
Your Ideal Self
Trait Theory of Personality*
Personality Assessment
Health Psychology
College Stress Test
Type A Behavior
Abnormal Psychology, Therapy and Treatment
Distinguishing Abnormality: A Continuum Approach*
Understanding the DSM
Depression*
Bipolar Disorder
Phobia
Anxiety Disorder*
Schizophrenia
Historical Perspectives: Treatment of Schizophrenia*
Substance Abuse*
Eating Disorders*
Borderline Personality Disorder
Systematic Desensitization
Compare and Contrast Approaches to Therapy
Social Psychology
Fundamental Attribution Error
Prejudice
Social Cognition: Stereotype Threat*
Asch’s Conformity Study*
Milgram’s Obedience Study*
The Stanford Prison Study: How Power Corrupts*
First Impressions and Attraction
Social Neuroscience: Using fMRI to Study Morality*
NEW
*9780077275884*
PSYCH 2.0 ONLINE EXPERIENCE GUIDE
Tamara A Rahhal, University of Mass-Amherst
2009 (June 2008)
ISBN: 9780077275884
http://www.mhhe.com/psych2
Psych 2.0: It’s what you need. Are you looking for a solution for
online or hybrid courses? A set of engaging content-based activities
to reinforce the foundational concepts in your lectures and reading
assignments? Want to integrate or upgrade a lab, recitation section,
or more course activities? If you answered yes to one or more of
these questions, Psych 2.0 is for you.
CONTENTS
Student Activities in Psych 2.0
New activities are marked with *. The instructor site includes all student
content, plus related instructional material.
Psychological Perspectives
Multiple Causes of Behavior
Five Perspectives in Psychology
Subfields and Careers*
Science and Methodology
The Scientific Method
Naturalistic Observation
Self-Report Bias in Surveys
Correlation
Designing an Experiment: Dependent and Independent Variables*
Ethical Dilemmas
The Brain and Behavior
The Structure of Neurons
Areas and Functions of the Brain
Brain Lateralization
Localization of Function: 2nd Language Learning and Brain Plasticity*
Sensation and Perception
Weber’s Law
How Do We See?
Basic Sensory Processes*
Perception: Integrating the Senses*
Top-down v Bottom-up processing*
Depth Perception
Visual Illusions*
States of Consciousness
REM Sleep: Thinking*
REM Sleep: Dreaming*
Drug Effects
Hypnosis*
Learning
Classical Conditioning: Pavlov’s Dogs
Classical Conditioning and Advertising*
Operant Conditioning: Teaching a Dog New Tricks
Reinforcement and Punishment*
Shaping
Schedules of Reinforcement*
Observational Learning: Monkey See, Monkey Do*
Memory
Sensory Memory
Working Memory: Decay v Interference
Working Memory: Putting Memory to Work*
Long Term Memory
16
NEW
NEW
*9780078050534*
*9780073516394*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: PSYCHOLOGY 10/11
41st Edition
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
PSYCHOLOGY 09/10
40th Edition
William Buskist, Auburn University
2011 / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780078050534
William Buskist, Auburn University
Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to
provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current
articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,
and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a
regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical
sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,
researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The
Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational
features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:
a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic
guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites;
and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an
online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using
Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for
instructors and is available in print or online. Visit www.mhcls.com
for more details.
ISBN: 9780073516394
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073516392.mhtml
guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and
a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online
Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual
Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our
popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)
or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v To purchase an electronic eBook version of this title, visit www.
CourseSmart.com (ISBN 0077309162)
v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Psychology_0910.
pdf
v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions:
Psychology 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in three of our bestselling McGraw-Hill Psychology textbooks by Lahey and Feldman.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1: The Science of Psychology
1. Why Study Psychology?.
2. Does Psychology Make a Significant Difference in Our Lives?
3. The 10 Commandments of Helping Students Distinguish Science
from Pseudoscience in Psychology
4. Science vs. Idealogy: Rebecca A. Clay
UNIT 2: Biological Bases of Behavior
5. The Amazing Brain, Richard Restak
6. The Threatened Brain
7. Phantom Pain and the Brain
8. The Home Team Advantage … and Other Sex Hormone Secrets
UNIT 3: Perceptual Processes
9. Extreme States
10. A Matter of Taste
11. What Dreams Are Made Of
12. About Face
UNIT 4: Learning and Remembering
13. Conversing with Copycats
14. Move Over, Mice
15. The Perils and Promises of Praise
UNIT 5: Cognitive Processes
16. What Was I Thinking?
17
17. The Culture-Cognition Connection
18. Talk to the Hand: New Insights into the Evolution of Language
and Gesture
UNIT 6: Emotion and Motivation
19. The Success Delusion
20. Feeling Smart: The Science of Emotional Intelligence
21. Ambition: Why Some People Are Most Likely to Succeed
22. Eating into the Nation’s Obesity Epidemic
23. A Nurturing Relationship: Mothers as Eating Role Models for
their Daughters
24. All the Rage: Why Everyone is so Angry and Why We Must Calm
Down
UNIT 7: Development
25. A Learning Machine
26. The Joke’s in You, Michael Price
27. A Question of Resilience
28. Growing Up Online
29. Making Relationships Work: A Conversation with Psychologist
30. Blessed Are Those Who Mourn—and Those Who Comfort
Them
UNIT 8: Personality Processes
31. Culture and the Development of Self-Knowledge
32. Frisky, but More Risky
33. Second Nature
UNIT 9: Social Processes
34. Bad Apples or Bad Barrels?
35. Young and Restless
36. We’re Wired to Connect
UNIT 10: Psychological Disorders
37. A New Approach to Attention Deficit Disorder
38. Treating War’s Toll on the Mind
39. Soldier Support
40. We Love to be Scared on Halloween
UNIT 11: Psychological Treatments
41. Couple Therapy
42. À Struggle for Hope,’
43. PTSD Treatments Grow in Evidence, Effectiveness
44. When Do Meds Make the Difference?
Test-Your-Knowledge Form
Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078139420*
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING
VIEWS ON
PSYCHOLOGICAL ISSUES
16th Edition
Brent Slife, Brigham Young University-Provo
2010 / 448 pages
ISBN: 9780078139420
Taking Sides volumes present current controversial issues in a
debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop
critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an
issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript or challenge
questions. Taking Sides readers feature an annotated listing of
selected World Wide Web sites. An online Instructor’s Resource Guide
with testing material is available for each volume. Using Taking Sides
in the Classroom is also an excellent instructor resource.
CONTENTS
Unit 1 Research Issues
Issue 1. Are Traditional Empirical Methods Sufficient to Provide
Evidence for Psychological Practice?
Issue 2. Classic Dialogue: Was Stanley Milgram’s Study of Obedience
Unethical?
Issue 3. Does the Research Support Evolutionary Accounts of Female
Mating Preferences?
Unit 2 Biological Issues
Issue 4. Must Women and Men Communicate Differently?
Issue 5. Is Homosexuality Biologically Based?
Issue 6. Is Evolution a Good Explanation for Psychological
Concepts?
Unit 3 Human Development
Issue 7. Does Divorce Have Positive Long-term Effects on the
Children Involved?
Issue 8. Do Online Friendships Hurt Adolescent Development?
Issue 9. Are Today’s Youth More Self-Centered than Previous
Generations?
Unit 4 Cognitive Processes
Issue 10. Is the Theory of Multiple Intelligences Valid?
Issue 11. Are Recovered Memories of Psychological Trauma Valid?
Unit 5 Mental Health and Treatment
Issue 12. Does ADHD a Real Disorder?
Issue 13. Does Taking Antidepressants Lead to Suicide?
Issue 14. Do Brain Deficiencies Determine Learning Disabilities?
Unit 6 Social Psychology
Issue 15. Should Psychologists Abstain from Involvement in Coercive
Interrogations
Issue 16. Do Video Games Lead to Violence?
Issue 17. Can Sex Be Addictive?
18
19
DEVELOPMENT
PSYCHOLOGY
DEVELOPMENTAL
ENGLISH
Adolescence – Reader / Cases ..........................................................................34
Adolescence – Texts...........................................................................................32
Adulthood and Aging ..........................................................................................35
Adulthood and Aging – Readers .........................................................................36
Child Development – Chronological ...................................................................27
Child Development – Topical ..............................................................................29
Child Development – Readers / Cases ..............................................................30
Child, Family & Society.......................................................................................31
Developmental Psychopathology .......................................................................39
Gender Role Development .................................................................................40
Human Development / Lifespan – Chronological ...............................................21
Human Development / Lifespan – Topical ..........................................................24
Human Development / Lifespan – Readers........................................................25
NEW TITLES
DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY
2011
Author
Annual Editions: Aging 10/11, 23e
Cox
9780078050596
36
Annual Editions: Human Development 10/11, 39e
Freiberg
9780078050626
25
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Lifespan Development, 3e
Guest
9780078049958
25
Adolescence, 9e
Steinberg
9780073532035
32
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Gender, 5e
White
9780078049941
40
Cox
9780078127731
37
Taking Sides: ClashIng Views in Childhood and Society, 8e
Del Campo
9780078127571
30, 31
Annual Editions: Dying, Dealth, and Bereavement 09/10, 11e
Dickinson
9780078127670
38
Annual Editions: Human Development 09/10 (2010 Update), 38e
Freiberg
9780078127779
25
Annual Editions: The Family 10/11, 36e
Gilbert
9780078135880
31
Annual Editions: Gender 10/11
Hutchison
9780078050527
40
Annual Editions: Child Growth and Development, 17e
Junn
9780078127847
30
Adolescence, 13e
Santrock
9780073370675
32
Children, 11e
Santrock
9780073532004
27
Topical Approach to Lifespan Development, A, 5e
Santrock
9780073370934
24
Annual Editions: Adolescence Psychology, 7e
Stickle
9780078127755
34
ISBN
Page
2010
20
Developmental Psychology
Human Development /
Lifespan – Chronological
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT ACROSS THE
LIFESPAN
7th Edition
John S Dacey and John Travers of Boston College
ISBN: 9780073382654
ISBN: 9780071270762 [IE]
Available: April 2008
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
9th Edition
Thomas L Candell and Corinne Haines Crandell of Broome Community
College
James W Vander Zanden, Ohio State University
ISBN: 9780073370422
ISBN: 9780071285308 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/dacey7
All of the lifespan without all of the bells and whistles. This
chronologically-organized text is less expensive and briefer than
most Lifespan texts. Its numerous examples drawn from education,
nursing, and psychology make the content relevant to students from
a variety of majors and backgrounds, while a highly praised study
guide integrated into the text promotes and reinforces conceptual
understanding.
http://www.mhhe.com/crandell9e
This long-trusted text features an interdisciplinary, cross-cultural, and
contextual perspective on development. Applications to psychology,
health care, social work, education, and family dynamics make this a
perfect book for classes with a mixed population of majors. Continuing
the hallmark diversity coverage of the prior eight editions, Crandell
et al once again do an incomparable job examining populations at
risk and explaining how they experience development and why their
experience is different. With more than 1200 new references, the 9th
edition has been updated throughout to reflect the latest information
available in human development.\
CONTENTS
Part 1 Introduction
Chapter 1 An Example of Development Through The Lifespan
Chapter 2 The Psychoanalytic Tradition
Part 2 Beginnings
Chapter 3 The Fertilization Process
Chapter 4 The Prenatal World
Part 3 Infancy
Chapter 5 Physical Development In Infancy
Chapter 6 The Meaning of Relationships
Part 4 Early Childhood
Chapter 7 Physical and Motor Development
Chapter 8 The Family in Development
Part 5 Middle Childhood
Chapter 9 Physical Development
Chapter 10 The Changing Sense of Self
Part 6 Adolescence
Chapter 11 Physical and Cognitive Development in Adolescence
Chapter 12 Psychosocial Development in Adolescence
Part 7 Early Adulthood
Chapter 13 Physical and Cognitive Development in Early
Adulthood
Chapter 14 Psychosocial Development in Early Adulthood
Part 8 Middle Adulthood
Chapter 15 Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle
Adulthood
Chapter 16 Psychosocial Development in Middle Adulthood
Part 9 Late Adulthood
Chapter 17 Physical and Cognitive Development in Late Adulthood
Chapter 18 Psychosocial Development in Late Adulthood
Chapter 19 Dying and Spirituality
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 2 Theories of Development
Chapter 3 Reproduction, Heredity, and Prenatal Development
Chapter 4 Birth and Physical Development
Chapter 5 Infancy : Cognitive and Language Development
Chapter 6 Infancy : The Development of Emotional and Social Bonds
Chapter 7 Early Childhood: Physical and Cognitive Development
Chapter 8 Early Childhood: Emotional and Social Development
Chapter 9 Middle Childhood: Physical and Cognitive Development
Chapter 10 Middle Childhood: Emotional and Social Development
Chapter 11 Adolescence: Physical and Cognitive Development
Chapter 12 Adolescence: Emotional and Social Development
Chapter 13 Early Adulthood: Physical and Cognitive Development
Chapter 14 Early Adulthood: Emotional and Social Development
Chapter 15 Middle Adulthood: Physical and Cognitive Development
Chapter 16 Middle Adulthood : Emotional and Social Development
Chapter 17 Late Adulthood: Physical and Cognitive Development
Chapter 18 Late Adulthood: Emotional and Social Development
Chapter 19 Dying and Death
21
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
11th Edition
LIFE-SPAN DEVELOPMENT
12th Edition
Diane E Papalia
Sally Wendkos Olds
Ruth Duskin Feldman
ISBN: 9780073370163
ISBN: 9780071280747 [IE]
John W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas
ISBN: 9780073370217
ISBN: 9780071280839 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/papaliahd11e
Driven by learning goals, previous editions of this text have been
widely adopted for their accurate, complete, and up-to-date coverage.
While maintaining these hallmarks, this revision includes increased
coverage of adulthood and aging, a new “Interlude” feature on
applications, and updated research with more 21st-century citations
than ever before.
http://www.mhhe.com/santrockld12
The 11th edition of this classic best-seller retains the extensive and
integrated cross-cultural and multicultural coverage, the proven
Guidepost-Checkpoint learning system, and the balance between
research and real-life applications that have made this text a long time
favorite of students and faculty. In the warmly-written and engaging
style that is their hallmark, Papalia, Olds, and Feldman once again
paint an engaging chronological portrayal of development through
the lifespan. This new edition features enhanced treatment of brain
development and evolutionary psychology research as well as
new Research in Action features highlighting interesting and timely
topics.
CONTENTS
Preface
Section One--The Life-Span Developmental Perspective
Chapter 1. Introduction
Appendix .Careers in Life-Span Development
Section Two--Beginning
Chapter 2. Biological Beginnings
Chapter 3. Prenatal Development and Birth
Section Three--Infancy
Chapter 4. Physical Development in Infancy
Chapter 5. Cognitive Development in Infancy
Chapter 6. Socioemotional Development in Infancy
Section Four--Early Childhood
Chapter 7. Physical and Cognitive Development in Early Childhood
Chapter 8. Socioemotional Development in Early Childhood
Section Five--Middle and Late Childhood
Chapter 9. Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle and Late
Childhood
Chapter 10. Socioemotional Development in Middle and Late
Childhood
Section Six--Adolescence
Chapter 11. Physical and Cognitive Development in Adolescence
Chapter 12. Socioemotional Development in Adolescence
Section Seven--Early Adulthood
Chapter 13. Physical and Cognitive Development in Early
Childhood
Chapter 14. Socioemotional Development in Early Childhood
Section Eight--Middle Adulthood
Chapter 15. Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle
Adulthood
Chapter 16. Socioemotional Development in Middle Adulthood
Section Nine--Late Adulthood
Chapter 17. Physical Development in Late Adulthood
Chapter 18. Cognitive Development in Late Adulthood
Chapter 19. Socioemotional Development in Late Adulthood
Section Ten--Endings
Chapter 20. Death, Dying and Grieving
CONTENTS
Part 1 About Human Development
Chapter 1: The Study of Human Development
Chapter 2: Theory and Research
Part 2 Beginnings
Chapter 3: Forming a New Life
Chapter 4: Birth and Physical Development During the First Three
Years
Chapter 5: Cognitive Development during the First Three Years
Chapter 6: Psychosocial Development during the First Three Years
Part 3 Early Childhood
Chapter Seven: Physical and Cognitive Development in Early
Childhood
Chapter 8: Psychosocial Development in Early Childhood
Part 4 Middle Childhood
Chapter 9: Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle
Childhood
Chapter 10: Psychosocial Development in Middle Childhood
Part 5 Adolescence
Chapter 11: Physical and Cognitive Development in Adolescence
Chapter 12: Psychosocial Development in Adolescence
Part 6 Young Adulthood
Chapter 13: Physical and Cognitive Development in Emerging and
Young Adulthood
Chapter 14: Psychosocial Development in Emerging and Young
Adulthood
Part 7 Middle Adulthood
Adulthood
Chapter 16: Psychosocial Development in Middle Adulthood
Part 8 Late Adulthood
Chapter 17: Physical and Cognitive Development in Late Adulthood
Chapter 18: Psychosocial Development in Late Adulthood
Part 9 The End of Life
Chapter 19: Dealing with Death and Bereavement
22
Chapter 10: Socioemotional Development in Adolescence
The Self and Emotional Development
Families
Peers
Culture and Adolescent Development
Adolescent Problems
Chapter 11: Physical and Cognitive Development in Early
Adulthood
The Transition from Adolescence to Adulthood
Physical Development
Sexuality
Cognitive Development
Careers and Work
Chapter 12: Socioemotional Development in Early Adulthood
Stability and Change from Childhood to Adulthood
Attraction, Love, and Close Relationships
Adult Life Styles
Marriage and the Family
Gender, Relationships, and Self Development
Adulthood
The Nature of Middle Adulthood
Physical Development
Careers, Work, and Leisure
Religion and Meaning in Life
Chapter 14: Socioemotional Development in Middle Adulthood
Personality Theories and Development
Stability and Change
Close Relationships
Chapter 15: Physical and Cognitive Development in Late
Adulthood
Longevity, Biological Aging, and Physical Development
Health
Cognitive Functioning
Work and Retirement
Mental Health
Chapter 16: Socioemotional Development in Late Adulthood
Theories of Socioemotional Development
Personality and Society
Families and Social Relationships
Ethnicity, Gender, and Culture
Chapter 17: Death and Grieving
Defining Death and Life/Death Issues
Death and Sociohistorical, Cultural Contexts
Facing One’s Own Death
Coping with the Death of Someone Else
ESSENTIALS OF LIFE-SPAN DEVELOPMENT
John W Santrock
2008 / 512 pages
ISBN: 9780073405513
ISBN: 9780071283441 [IE]
Available: August 2007
www.mhhe.com/santrockessls
What’s the single, most often expressed issue in the Life-Span
Development course? Covering a lifetime of material. Instructors
from across the country are clamoring for a streamlined text capturing
the core concepts of life-span development. Essentials of Life-Span
Development was carefully designed and constructed to deliver these
core concepts, along with a strong applications focus reflecting the
broad range of interests and backgrounds of students taking this
course. and as always, with John Santrock’s texts, the latest research
in the field is incorporated throughout.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction
The Life-span Perspective
The Nature of Development
Theories of Development
Research in Life-span Development
Chapter 2: Biological Beginnings
The Evolutionary Perspective
Genetic Foundations of Development
Heredity and Environment Interaction: The Nature-nurture Debate
Prenatal Development
Chapter 3: Physical and Cognitive Development in Infancy
Motor Development
Sensory and Perceptual Development
Language Development
Chapter 4: Socioemotional Development in Infancy
Emotional and Personality Development Attachment
Social Contexts
Chapter 5: Physical and Cognitive Development in Early Childhood
Physical Changes
Cognitive Changes
Early Childhood Education
Chapter 6: Socioemotional Development in Early Childhood
Emotional and Personality Development
Families
Relations, Play, and Television
Chapter 7: Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle and
Late Childhood
Physical Changes and Health
Children with Disabilities
Cognitive Changes
Chapter 8: Socioemotional Development in Middle and Late
Childhood
Emotional and Personality Development
Families
Peers
Friends
Schools
The Nature of Adolescence
Physical Changes
Issues in Adolescent Health
Adolescent Cognition
Schools
23
Human Development /
Lifespan – Topical
v Visual Assets Database. VAD, McGraw-Hill’s online database
of hundreds of developmental video & audio clips, photographs,
and illustrations for instructors is available to adopters. All of these
resources are playable online or downloadable to any location you
choose.
CONTENTS
Section 1: The Life-Span Perspective
Appendix: Careers in Life-Span Development
Section 2: Biological Processes, Physical Development, and Health
Chapter 3: Physical Development and Biological Aging
Chapter 4: Health
Chapter 5: Motor, Sensory, and Perceptual Development
Section 3: Cognitive Processes and Development
Chapter 6: Cogntive Developmental Approaches < Cognitive of
Theory>
Chapter 7: Information Processing
Chapter 8: Intelligence
Chapter 9: Language Development
Section 4: Socioemotional Processes and Development
Chapter 10: Emotional Development
Chapter 11: The Self, Identity, and Personality
Chapter 12: Gender and Sexuality
Chapter 13: Moral Development, Values and Religion
Section 5: Social Contexts of Development
Chapter 14: Families, Lifestyles, and Parenting
Chapter 15: Peers and the Sociocultural World
Chapter 16: Schools, Achievement, and Work
Section 6: Endings
Chapter 17: Death, Dying, and Grieving
NEW
*9780073370934*
A TOPICAL APPROACH TO LIFESPAN
DEVELOPMENT
5th Edition
2010 / 768 pages
ISBN: 9780073370934
Available: December 2009
http://www.mhhe.com/santrockldt5e
John Santrock’s A Topical Approach to Life-Span Development
combines the most current research with a proven pedagogical
system to provide instructors and students with the best-selling
topically arranged introduction to lifespan development. Drawing on
a who’s who list of expert consultants in all areas of developmental
psychology, Santrock once again provides a trusted, comprehensive,
readable, and engaging survey of the field. Rich applications and
examples from a range of areas such as parenting, health care, and
education ensure that students will remain engaged with the material.
Significant revisions for the 5th edition include updated discussions
of health and well-being as well as expanded coverage of diversity,
culture, and gender.
FEATURES
v Contemporary and classic research. The 5th edition boasts
more than 1,200 new research citations from 2007-2010, as well
as classic references from the twentieth century. To ensure this
currency and accuracy across all the stages of the life-span, a
panel of leading experts in many different areas of developmental
psychology provide detailed evaluations and recommendations in
their areas of expertise.
v Proven Learning System. To keep students from drowning in
the sea of information covered in the course, the Learning System
keeps the key ideas in front of them from the beginning to the end
of the chapter. Learning goals are presented at the beginning of
each chapter (in conjunction with a chapter outline/map), revisited
in the “Review and Reflect” summary that concludes each section,
and summarized in a “Reach Your Learning Goals” end-of-chapter
visual.
v Coverage of career opportunities in life-span development.
Careers in Life-Span Development inserts in each chapter profile
an individual whose career relates to the chapter’s content. The
Careers Appendix describes a number of careers in education/
research, clinical/counseling, medical/nursing/physical, and family/
relationships categories.
v Connections between theory and applications. Santrock provides
a wealth of applied examples to show students the personal meaning
life-span development has for them. In addition to the narrative’s
applications, each chapter also boasts an Applications in Life-Span
Development interlude. These focus on health and well-being,
parenting, and education.
24
Human Development /
Lifespan – Readers
NEW
*9780078127779*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
09/10 (2010 UPDATE)
38th Edition
NEW
*9780078050626*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMAN
DEVELOPMENT 10/11
39th Edition
Karen L Freiberg, University of MarylandBaltimore County
ISBN: 9780078127779
Available: February 2009
Karen L Freiberg, University of Maryland-Baltimore County
2011 / 224 pages
ISBN: 9780078050626
Available: March 2010
www.mhhe.com/annualeditions
and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular
basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources.
The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers,
and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions
volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to
make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction;
an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of
selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section.
Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with
testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered
as a practical guide for instructors and is available in print or online.
Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Human_
Development_0910Update.pdf
Human Development 09/10 (2010 Update) with the corresponding
chapters in three of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Human Development
textbooks by Santrock and Dacey et al.
NEW
*9780078049958*
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN
LIFESPAN DEVELOPMENT
3rd Edition
CONTENTS
Unit 1: Genetic and Prenatal Influences on Development
Part A. Genetic Influences
1. The Identity Dance
2. The Power to Divide, Rick Weis
Part B. Prenatal Influences
3. The Mystery of Fetal Life: Secrets of the Womb
4. Fat, Carbs and the Science of Conception
5. The Hunt for Golden Eggs
6. The Curious Lives of Surrogates
Unit 2: Development During Infancy and Early Childhood
Part A. Infancy
7. HHS Toned Down Breast-Feeding Ads: Formula Industry Urged
Softer Campaign
8. Reading Your Baby’s Mind
9. 20 Ways to Boost Your Baby’s Brain Power
Part B. Early Childhood
10. Long-Term Studies of Preschool: Lasting Benefits Far Outweigh
Costs
11. Accountability Comes to Preschool: Can We Make It Work for
Young Children?
Unit 3: Development During Childhood: Cognition and Schooling
Part A. Cognition
12. Informing the ADHD Debate
Andrew Guest, University of Portland
2011 / 480 pages
ISBN: 9780078049958
www.mhhe.com/takingsides
25
LIFESPAN DEVELOPMENT
2nd Edition
13. Why We Need “The Year of Languages”
Part B. Schooling
14. The New First Grade: Too Much Too Soon?
15. Ten Big Effects of the No Child Left Behind Act on Public
Schools
16. The Power of Teaching Students Using Strengths
17. A “Perfect” Case Study: Perfectionism in Academically Talented
Fourth Graders
Unit 4: Development During Childhood: Family and Culture
Part A. Family
18. You and Your Quirky Kid
19. The Blank Slate
20. Parents Behaving Badly
21. Where Personality Goes Awry
Part B. Culture
22. Girls Gone Bad?
23. Disrespecting Childhood
Unit 5: Development During Adolescence and Young Adulthood
Part A. Adolescence
24. Parents or Pop Culture? Children’s Heroes and Role Models
25. A Peaceful Adolescence
26. Homeroom Zombies
27. Jail Time Is Learning Time
Part B. Young Adulthood
28. How Spirit Blooms
29. What Addicts Need
30. Getting Back on Track
31. Men & Depression: Facing Darkness
UNIT 6: Development During Middle and Late Adulthood
Part A. Middle Adulthood
32. Emotions and the Brain: Laughter
33. 50 Reasons to Love Being 50+
34. The Myth of the Midlife Crisis
Part B. Late Adulthood
35. The Wonder of Work
36. Second Time Around
37. Secrets of the Centenarians
38. Lost and Found
39. Life after Death
40. Navigating Practical Dilemmas in Terminal Care, Helen Sorenson,
Emphysema/COPD: The Journal of Patient-Centered Care, Vol. 1.,
No. 1
Article Rating Form
Andrew Guest, University of Portland
2009 / 432 pages
ISBN: 9780073515281
Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515 280/mhtml
This Second Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN
LIFESPAN DEVELOPMENT presents current controversial issues
in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and
develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed
with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An
instructor’s manual with testing material is available for each volume.
USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent
instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this
effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader
features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and
is supported by our student website, www.dushkin.com/online.
CONTENTS
Unit 1 General Issues in the Study Of Lifespan Development
Issue 1. Does the Cultural Environment Influence Lifespan
Development More than Our Genes?
Issue 2. Are Peers More Important than Parents during the Process
of Development?
Issue 3. Do Significant Innate Differences Influence the Career
Success of Males and Females?
Unit 2 Prenatal Development and Infancy
Issue 4. Does Prenatal Exposure to Drugs Such as Cocaine Create
“Crack Babies” with Special Developmental Concerns?
Issue 5. Is There a “Myth of the First Three Years”?
Issue 6. Are There Good Reasons to Allow Infants to Consume
Electronic Media, Such as Television?
Unit 3 Early Childhood and Middle Childhood
Issue 7. Is Advertising Responsible for Childhood Obesity?
Issue 8. Does Emphasizing Academic Skills Help At-Risk Preschool
Children?
Issue 9. Is Attention Deficit Disorder (ADD/ADHD) a Legitimate
Medical Condition That Affects Childhood Behavior?
Unit 4 Adolescence
Issue 10. Are Efforts to Improve Self-Esteem Misguided?
Issue 11. Should Contemporary Adolescents Be Engaged in More
Structured Activities?
Issue 12. Does Violent Media Cause Teenage Aggression?
Unit 5 Youth and Early Adulthood
Issue 13. Are Contemporary Young Adults More Selfish than Previous
Generations?
Issue 14. Are College Graduates Unprepared for Adulthood and the
World of Work?
Unit 6 Middle Adulthood
Issue 15. Is the Institution of Marriage at Risk?
Issue 16. Can Lesbian and Gay Couples Be Appropriate Parents
for Children?
Issue 17. Is Religion a Pure Good in Facilitating Well-Being during
Adulthood?
Unit 7 Later Adulthood
Issue 18. Can We Universally Define “Successful Aging”?
Issue 19. Are Brain Exercises Unhelpful in Preventing Cognitive
Decline in Old Age?
Issue 20. Should the Terminally Ill Be Able to Have Physicians Help
Them Die?
26
Child Development
– Chronological
Chapter 7: Socioemotional Development In Infancy
Section 4 Early Childhood
Chapter 8: Physical Development In Early Childhood
Chapter 9: Cognitive Development In Early Childhood
Chapter 10: Socioemotional Development In Early Childhood
Section 5 Middle And Late Childhood
Chapter 11: Physical Development In Middle And Late Childhood
Chapter 12: Cognitive Development In Middle And Late Childhood
Chapter 13: Socioemotional Development In Middle And Late
Childhood
Section 6 Adolescence
Chapter 14: Physical Development In Adolescence
Chapter 15: Cognitive Development In Adolescence
Chapter 16: Socioemotional Development In Adolescence
Glossary
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
*9780073532004*
NEW
CHILDREN
11th Edition
2010 / 704 pages
ISBN: 9780073532004
ISBN: 9780070182738 [IE]
A CHILD’S WORLD
11th Edition
http://www.mhhe.com/santrockc11e
Diane E Papalia
Ruth Duskin Feldman
2008 / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780073531977
ISBN: 9780071270304 [IE]
John Santrock’s Children combines proven pedagogy and the most
current research to provide a market leading presentation of child
development. This time tested text provides compelling contemporary
research, including updates from eight leading experts in the field.
The text’s accessible presentation, plentiful applications and engaging
writing foster increased mastery of the content. The new edition
includes substantially expanded material on subjects including
children’s health and well-being, parenting and education, diversity,
culture, and gender.
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/papaliaacwll
This fully-revised eleventh edition continues to provide the extensive
cross-cultural and multicultural coverage, the innovative pedagogical
learning system, and the balance between research and real-life
applications that have made A Child’s World a favorite of students
and professors alike. In the warmly-written and engaging style
that has become their hallmark, Diane Papalia and Ruth Feldman
continue to provide a chronological view of child development; the new
edition expands the coverage of cultural and historical influences on
development, highlights the latest research in cognitive neuroscience
and evolutionary theory, and features a new and improved Visual
Assets Database for instructors.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v The Latest Research. The 11th edition of Children contains the
most contemporary research, with more than 1,200 new research
citations from 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010 as well as classic
references from the twentieth century. To ensure this currency and
accuracy throughout the text, a panel of leading experts in many
different areas of child development provide detailed evaluations and
recommendations in their areas of expertise. The text also features a
Research in Children’s Development interlude in each chapter.
CONTENTS
v Expanded Contemporary Coverage of Children’s Health and
Wellness. This edition features an extensively revised and very
contemporary discussion of children’s health and well-being, including
new material in Caring for Children interludes.
v
Chapter 1: Studying A Child’s World
Chapter 2: A Child’s World: How We Discover It
Chapter 3: Forming a New Life: Conception, Heredity, and Environment
Chapter 4: Pregnancy and Prenatal Development
Chapter 5: Birth and the Newborn Baby
Chapter 6: Physical Development and Health During the First Three
Years
Chapter 7: Cognitive Development during the First Three Years
Chapter 8: Psychosocial Development during the First Three Years
Chapter 9: Physical Development and Health in Early Childhood
Chapter 10: Cognitive Development in Early Childhood
Chapter 11: Psychosocial Development in Early Childhood
Chapter 12: Physical Development and Health in Middle Childhood
Chapter 13: Cognitive Development in Middle Childhood
Chapter 14: Psychosocial Development in Middle Childhood
Chapter 15: Physical Development and Health in Adolescence
Chapter 16: Cognitive Development in Adolescence
Chapter 17: Psychosocial Development in Adolescence
Expanded and Updated Material on Parenting and Education
v Expanded and Updated Coverage of Diversity, Culture, and Gender.
In addition to significant new coverage, the text continues to feature
Diversity in Children’s Development interludes in each chapter.
CONTENTS
Contents
Section 1 The Nature Of Children’s Development
Appendix: Careers In Child Development
Section 2 Beginnings
Chapter 3: Prenatal Development
Chapter 4: Birth
Section 3 Infancy
Chapter 5: Physical Development In Infancy
Chapter 6: Cognitive Development In Infancy
27
CHILD DEVELOPMENT
CHILD DEVELOPMENT WITH MULTIMEDIA
COURSEWARE CD AND POWERWEB
5th Edition
Charlotte Patterson, University of VA-Charlottesville
2008 / 736 pages
ISBN: 9780072347951
ISBN: 9780071101707 [IE]
Ganie B. DeHart, SUNY-Geneseo, L. Alan Sroufe, University of
Minnesota-Minneapolis and Robert G. Cooper, San Jose State University
2004 / Hardcover with CD-ROM / 640 pages
ISBN: 9780072900088
ISBN: 9780071217033 [IE] (Out of Print)
www.mhhe.com/pattersoncd1e
Bringing the research to life through stories. What prompted
Virginia Apgar to develop what became the Apgar Test? Who knew
that Eleanor Gibson’s famous “visual cliff” experiment was inspired by
her own toddler’s experience at the Grand Canyon? These stories help
students appreciate the relevance of theory, and help them internalize
and learn the often research-intensive material.
Website: www.mhhe.com/dehart5
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: The Nature of Development
Part One: Beginnings
Chapter 2: The Contexts of Development
Chapter 3: Heredity and Prenatal Development
Part Two: Infancy
Chapter 4: First Adaptations
Chapter 5: Infant Cognitive Development
Chapter 6: Infant Social and Emotional Development
Part Two Epilogue: Infancy
Part Three: TODDLERHOOD
Chapter 7: Toddler Language and Thinking
Chapter 8: Toddler Social and Emotional Development
Part Three Epilogue: Toddlerhood
Part Four: Early Childhood
Chapter 9: Cognitive Development in Early Childhood
Chapter 10: Social and Emotional Development in Early Childhood
Part Four Epilogue: Early Childhood
Part Five: Middle Childhood
Chapter 11: Cognitive Development in Middle Childhood
Chapter 12: Social and Emotional Development in Middle
Childhood
Part Five Epilogue: Middle Childhood
Part Six: Adolescence
Chapter 14: Social and Emotional Development in Adolescence
Part Six Epilogue: Adolescence
Part Seven: Disorders And Resiliency
Chapter 15: Developmental Psychopathology
Part Seven Epilogue: Psychopathology and Individual Lives
CONTENTS
Beginnings
1 Introduction to Child Development
2 Heredity, Environment, and Prenatal Development
3 Birth and the Newborn Infant
Infancy and the Toddler Years
4 Physical Development and Health During Infancy and the Toddler
Years
5 Cognitive and Language Development During Infancy and the
Toddler Years
6 Social and Emotional Development During Infancy and the Toddler
Years
Early Childhood
7 Physical Development and Health During Early Childhood
8 Cognitive Development During Early Childhood
9 Social and Emotional Development During Early Childhood
Middle Childhood
10 Physical Development and Health During Middle Childhood
11 Cognitive Development During Middle Childhood
12 Social and Emotional Development During Middle Childhood
Adolescence
13 Physical Development and Health During Adolescence
14 Cognitive Development During Adolescence
15 Social and Emotional Development During Adolescence
28
Child Development –
Topical
CHILD DEVELOPMENT: AN INTRODUCTION
12th Edition
ISBN: 9780073370637
ISBN: 9780071280815 [IE]
CHILD PSYCHOLOGY: A CONTEMPORARY
VIEW POINT
7th Edition
http://www.mhhe.com/santrockcd12e
Thorough. Accurate. Reliable. Engaging. These are just a few of
the words used by adopters and reviewers of John Santrock’s
Child Development. Child Development is widely considered the
most accurate and up-to-date topically-organized text in the field.
Used by hundreds of thousands of students over eleven editions,
its learning goals-driven learning system provides a clear roadmap
to student understanding of the content. The fully revised twelfth
edition reinforces the highly contemporary tone and focus by featuring
hundreds of new citations.
Ross D Parke and Mary Gauvain of University of California-Riverside
ISBN: 9780073382685
ISBN: 9780071269896 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/parke7e
This classic text once again provides a compelling topically-organized
introduction to child development. Parke et al incorporate multiple
perspectives in exploring the processes of child development.
With recurring pedagogical features to ensure students see the
interrelatedness of chapters and concepts and the chronological
development of children, the authors have also taken care to further
their student-friendly presentation by shortening the text in this
edition. This has been accomplished without cutting the book’s highlyregarded child psychopathology chapter.
CONTENTS
Preface
Section One--The Nature of Child Development
Appendix. Careers in Child Development
Section Two--Biological Processes, Physical Development, and
Perceptual Development
Chapter 2. Biological Beginnings
Chapter 3. Prenatal Development and Birth
Chapter 4. Physical Development and Health
Chapter 5. Motor, Sensory, and Perceptual Development
Section Three--Cognitive and Language
Chapter 6. Cognitive Developmental Approaches
Chapter 7. Information Processing
Chapter 8. Intelligence
Chapter 9. Language Development
Section Four--Socioemotional Development
Chapter 10. Emotional Development
Chapter 11. The Self and Identity
Chapter 12. Gender
Chapter 13. Moral Development
Section Five--Social Context of Development
Chapter 14. Families
Chapter 15. Peers
Chapter 16. Schools and Achievement
Chapter 17. Culture and Diversity
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Child Development: Themes, Theories, and Methods
Chapter 2: Heredity and the Environment
Chapter 3: Prenatal Development and Birth
Chapter 4: Infancy: Sensation, Perception, and Learning
Chapter 5: The Child’s Growth: Brain, Body, Motor Skills, and Sexual
Maturation
Chapter 6: Emotional Development and Attachment
Chapter 7: Language and Communication
Chapter 8: Cognitive Development: Piaget and Vygotsky
Chapter 9: Cognitive Development: The Information-Processing
Approach
Chapter 10: Intelligence and Achievement
Chapter 11: The Family
Chapter 12: Expanding the Social World: Peers and Friends
Chapter 13: Gender Roles and Gender Differences
Chapter 14: Morality, Altruism, and Aggression
Chapter 15: Developmental Psychopathology
29
Child Development –
Readers / Cases
NEW
*9780078127847*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: CHILD
GROWTH AND
DEVELOPMENT
17th Edition
NEW
*9780078127571*
CHILDHOOD AND SOCIETY
8th Edition
Ellen N Junn, California State UniversityFullerton
Chris J Boyatzis, Bucknell University
2010 / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780078127847
Diana S Del Campo and Robert L Del Campo of New Mexico State
University-Las Cruces
2010 / 448 pages
ISBN: 9780078127571
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007812784X.mhtml
Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
CourseSmart.com (ISBN 0077304608).
CONTENTS
Unit 1: Conception to Birth
1. New Calculator Factors Chances for Very Premature Infants
2. Success at Last
Unit 2: Cognition, Language, and Learning
Part A. Early Cognition and Physical Development
3. Infants’ Differential Processing of Female and Male Face
4. The Other-Race Effect Develops during Infancy
5. New Advances in Understanding Sensitive Periods in Brain
Development
6. Contributions of Neuroscience to Our Understanding of Cognitive
Development
7. It’s Fun, but Does It Make You Smarter?
8. Language and Children’s Understanding of Mental States
9. Children’s Biased Evaluations of Lucky versus Unlucky People
and Their Social Groups
10. Future Thinking in Young Children
Part B. Learning in School
11. The Secret to Raising Smart Kids
12. When Should a Kid Start Kindergarten?
Unit 3: Social and Emotional Development
Part A. The Child’s Feelings: Emotional Development
13. A Neurobiological Perspective on Early Human Deprivation
14. Children’s Capacity to Develop Resiliency
15. Emotions and the Development of Childhood Depression: Bridging
the Gap
Part B. Entry into the Social World: Peers, Play, and Popularity
16. Cooperation and Communication in the 2nd Year of Life
17. The Serious Need for Play
18. Children’s Social and Moral Reasoning about Exclusion
19. When Girls and Boys Play: What Research Tells Us
20. A “Multitude” of Solitude
21. Girls Just Want to Be Mean
22. The Role of Neurobiological Deficits in Childhood Antisocial
Behavior
30
Unit 4: Parenting and Family Issues
23. Children of Lesbian and Gay Parents
24. Evidence of Infants’ Internal Working Models of Attachment
25. Physical Discipline and Children’s Adjustment
26. Children of Alcoholics
27. Within-Family Differences in Parent-Child Relations across the
Life Course
28. Tempering Toddler Tantrums Now May Prevent Aggression
Later
29. Adoption Is a Successful Natural Intervention Enhancing Adopted
Children’s IQ and School Performance
30. Parental Divorce and Children’s Adjustment
31. The Case against Breast-Feeding
Unit 5: Cultural and Societal Influences
Part A. Social and Cultural Issues
32. Goodbye to Girlhood
33. The Developmental Costs of High Self-Esteem for Antisocial
Children
34. Trials for Parents Who Choose Faith over Medicine
35. The Baby Deficit
Part B. Special Challenges
36. How to Win the Weight Battle
37. The Impact of Trafficking on Children
38. The Epidemic That Wasn’t
39. What Autistic Girls Are Made Of
40. Three Reasons Not to Believe in an Autism Epidemic
41. Getting Back to the Great Outdoors
42. What Causes Specific Language Impairment in Children?
43. Treatment and Prevention of Posttraumatic Stress Reactions in
Children and Adolescents Exposed to Disasters and Terrorism: What
Is the Evidence?
Test-Your-Knowledge
Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078135880*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
THE FAMILY 10/11
36th Edition
Kathleen R Gilbert, Indiana
University-Bloomington
2010 / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780078135880
Available: September 2009
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Child, Family & Society
v
Correlation Guide:
v w w w. m h h e . c o m / m h c p / C o r r e l a t i o n G u i d e s / A E _ T h e _
Family_1011.pdf
v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: The
Family 10/11 with the corresponding chapters in two of our best-selling
McGraw-Hill Family textbooks by Newman and DeGonova/Rice.
NEW
CONTENTS
*9780078127571*
UNIT 1: Evolving Perspectives on the Family
1. Marriage and Family in the Scandinavian Experience
2. Interracial Families
3. Children as a Public Good
4. Family Partnerships
UNIT 2: Exploring and Establishing Relationships
Part A. Love and Sex
5. This Thing Called Love
6. Pillow Talk
7. 24 Things Love and Sex Experts are Dying to Tell You
Part B. Choosing a Mate
8. On-Again, Off-Again
Part C. Pregnancy and the Next Generation
9. Fats, Carbs and the Science of Conception
10. Starting the Good Life in the Womb
11. Not Always ‘the Happiest Time’
12. Adopting a New American Family
UNIT 3: Family Relationships
Part A. Marriage and Other Committed Relationships
13. Free As a Bird and Loving It
14. Gay Marriage Lite
15. Two Mommies and a Daddy
Part B. Relationships between Parents and Children
16. Good Parents, Bad Results
17. Do We Need a Law to Prohibit Spanking?
8th Edition
2010 / 448 pages
ISBN: 9780078127571
31
Adolescence – Texts
19. Prickly Pere
Part C. Other Family Relationships
20. The Forgotten Siblings
21. Being a Sibling
22. Aunties and Uncles
23. Roles of American Indian Grandparents in Times of Cultural
Crisis
UNIT 4: Challenges and Opportunities
Part A. Family Violence and Chaos
24. Recognizing Domestic Partner Abuse
25. Domestic Abuse Myths
Part B. Substance Abuse
27. Impact of Family Recovery and Pre-Teens and Adolescents
Part C. Infidelity
28. My Cheatin’ Heart
29. Love But Don’t Touch
30. Is This Man Cheating on His Wife?
Part D. Economic Concerns
31. The Opt-Out-Myth
32. Making Time for Family Time
Part E. Illness and Death in the Family
33. Partners Face Cancer Together
34. Dealing Day-to-Day With Diabetes: A Whole Family Experience
35. Caring for the Caregiver
36. Bereavement after Caregiving
37. Love, Loss—And Love
Part F. War the Stress of Separation
38. Stressors Afflicting Families During Military Deployment
39. Children of the Wars
Part F. Divorce and Remarriage
40. A Divided House
41. Civil Wars
42. Stepfamily Success Depends on Ingredients
UNIT 5: Families, Now and into the Future
43. Get a Closer Look
44. The Joy of Rituals
45. Sustaining Resilient Families for Children in Primary Grades
46. The Consumer Crunch
47. Sparking Interest in Nature—Family Style
Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780073532035*
ADOLESCENCE
9th Edition
Laurence Steinberg, Temple University-Philadelphia
2011 / 608 pages
ISBN: 9780073532035
*9780073370675*
NEW
ADOLESCENCE
13th Edition
2010 / 640 pages
ISBN: 9780073370675
ISBN: 9780070164987 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/santrocka13e
More students learn from John Santrock’s Adolescence than from any
other text in this field. The 13th edition combines proven pedagogy and
the most current research to provide a market leading presentation of
adolescence. This time tested text provides compelling contemporary
research, including updates from eleven leading experts in the field.
The text’s accessible presentation, plentiful applications and engaging
writing foster increased mastery of the content. The new edition
includes substantially expanded material on diversity and culture,
adolescents’ and emerging adults’ health and well-being, including
numerous recommendations for improving the lives of adolescents,
and expanded emphasis on the positive aspects of adolescent
development.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v Expanded and updated coverage of diversity and culture. The
13th edition contains the most contemporary research, with more than
1,000 new research citations from 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010 as well
as classic references from the twentieth century. To ensure currency
and accuracy throughout the text, a panel of eleven leading experts
in many different areas of adolescent development provided detailed
evaluations and recommendations in their areas of expertise.
CONTENTS
Chapter 2: Puberty, Health, and Biological Foundations
32
Chapter 3: The Brain and Cognitive Development
Chapter 4: The Self, Identity, Emotion, and Personality
Chapter 5: Gender
Chapter 6: Sexuality
Chapter 7: Moral Development, Values, and Religion
Chapter 8: Families
Chapter 9: Peers, Romantic Relationships, and Life Styles
Chapter 10: Schools
Chapter 11: Achievement, Work, and Careers
Chapter 13: Problems in Adolescence and Emerging Adulthood
ADOLESCENCE: CONTINUITY, CHANGE,
AND DIVERSITY
6th Edition
Nancy Cobb, California State University--Los Angeles
2007 / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780073194721 (Out of Print)
ISBN: 9780071106405 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cobb6
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Defining Adolescents: Who Are They?
Chapter 2 Theoretical Foundations of Adolescent Development
Chapter 3 The Biological and Physical Changes of Adolescence
Chapter 4 The Cognitive and Intellectual Changes of Adolescence
Chapter 5 Defining the Self: Identity and Intimacy
Chapter 6 The Sexual Self: Close Relationships in Adolescence
Chapter 7 Adolescents in the Family: Changing Roles and
Relationships
Chapter 8 Adolescents and Their Friends
Chapter 9 Adolescents in the Schools
Chapter 10 Work, Careers, and College: New Decisions, New Ways
of Thinking
Chapter 11 Facing the Future: Values in Transition
Chapter 12 The Problems of Youth
Chapter 13 Positive Development in Adolescence: Meeting the
Challenges and Making It Work
Chapter 14 Studying Adolescence: Research Methods and Issues
ADOLESCENCE
8th Edition
Laurence Steinberg, Temple University-Philadelphia
2008 / 640 pages
ISBN: 9780073405483
ISBN: 9780071101721 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/steinberg8
Adolescence, 8th edition by Laurence Steinberg has been thoroughly
updated to reflect current findings in the field of adolescent
development. In this edition, the author continues to utilize the effective
combination of a friendly writing style, thorough research and a
contextual approach that emphasizes adolescence in contemporary
society. The text’s careful organization ensures maximum teaching
flexibility that allows the chapters to work together or be covered
in sequence or stand alone. Ethnicity and minority issues are
thoroughly discussed in a way that enables students to see how the
adolescent experience is shaped by class and culture. The strong
pedagogical framework helps students organize and integrate
material. Adolescence, 8th edition, is based on solid research and
theory, yet it has a distinctively “real world” feel that emphasizes the
reality of being an adolescent in today’s society.
CONTENTS
Preface
Introduction: The Study of Adolescent Development
Part I: The Fundamental Changes of Adolescence
Chapter 1 Biological Transitions
Chapter 2 Cognitive Transitions
Chapter 3 Social Transitions
Part II: The Contexts of Adolescence
Chapter 4 Families
Chapter 5 Peer Groups
Chapter 6 Schools
Chapter 7 Work, Leisure, and Mass Media
Part III: Psychosocial Development During Adolescence
Chapter 8 Identity
Chapter 9 Autonomy
Chapter 10 Intimacy
Chapter 11 Sexuality
Chapter 12 Achievement
Chapter 13 Psychosocial Problems In Adolescence
Glossary
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
33
Adolescence –
Reader / Cases
Unit 4: The Contexts of Adolescents in Society: School, Work,
and Diversity
23. The Dropout Problem: Losing Ground, Paul E. Barton
24. My Year as a High School Student
25. School’s New Rule for Pupils in Trouble: No Fun
26. In an Era of School Shootings, Lockdowns Are the New Drill
27. Effects of After-School Employment on Academic Performance
28. Immigrant Youth in U.S. Schools: Opportunities for Prevention
29. Reducing School Violence: School-Based Curricular Programs
and School Climate
30. The Cultural Plunge
31. Character and Academics: What Good Schools Do
32. High School with a College Twis
Unit 5: Problem Behaviors and Challenges of Adolescents
33. Video Game Violence
34. The Overdominance of Computers
35. Bullying at School among Older Adolescents
36. Underage Drinking Debate: Zero Tolerance Vs. Teaching
Responsibility
37. Problem Gambling in Youth--A Hidden Addiction
38. Understanding Cutting in Adolescents; Prevalence, Prevention,
and Intervention
39. Violence in Adolescent Dating Relationships
40. Prevention of Domestic Violence during Adolescence
41. Prescription for Disaste
42. Youth’s Reactions to Disasters and the Factors That Influence
Their Response
Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078127755*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: ADOLESCENCE
PSYCHOLOGY
7th Edition
Fred E Stickle, Western Kentucky University
2010 / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780078127755
CONTENTS
Unit 1: Perspective on Adolescent Development
1. Trashing Teens
2. Profile in Caring
3. A Peaceful Adolescence
4. Something to Talk About
5. Youth Participation
Unit 2: Developmental Changes of Adolescents: Physical,
cognitive, and social
6. Healthier Students, Better Learners
7. Mental Assessment Test
8. Body Dissatisfaction in Adolescent Female and Males: Risk and
Resilience
10. Influence of Music on Youth Behaviors
11. Researchers Examine the Impact of Early Experiences on
Development
12. Adolescent Stress
13. Coping with Stress
14. ADHD and the SUD in Adolescents
Unit 3: Relationships of Adolescents: Family, Peers, Intimacy,
and Sexuality
15. Supporting Youth during Parental Development: Strategies for
Professionals and Families
16. When Play Turns to Trouble
17. Aggression in Adolescent Dating Relationships: Predictors and
Prevention
18. A Host of Trouble
19. Great Expectations
20. Reclaiming ‘Abstinence’ in Comprehensive Sex Education
21. Give Students the Knowledge to Make Wise Choices About
Sex
22. The Perils of Playing House
34
Adulthood and Aging
ADOLESCENCE
2nd Edition
BJ Rue and Maureen Drysdale of St. Jerome’s University/University of
Waterloo
ISBN: 9780073515366
ADULT DEVELOPMENT AND AGING
6th Edition
William J. Hoyer, Syracuse University and Paul A. Roodin, State
University of NY-Oswego
ISBN: 9780073128542
ISBN: 9780071270281 [IE]
This Second Edition of TAKING SIDES: ADOLESCENCE presents
current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to
stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each
issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue
introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing
material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN
THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with
practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in
the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated
listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book
website. Visit www.mhcls.com.
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hoyer6
Adult Development and Aging offers professors and students a
clear, comprehensive and current account of the salient issues and
concerns that dominate the field of adult development. Hoyer and
Roodin employ an interdisciplinary, process oriented perspective to
show students the past, present, and future of our understanding
and research in adult development. In this thoroughly-revised new
edition, Hoyer and Roodin continue to provide cutting edge material
in an accessible manner for undergraduates. With a new theme of
developmental bioculturalism running throughout, the authors also
present the most balanced and comprehensive coverage of biological,
health, cognitive, and social areas.
CONTENTS
Part 1 Adolescent Health
Issue 1. Should Adolescents Be Taking Selective Serotonin Reuptake
Inhibitors (SSRIs) for Depression?
Issue 2. Should Adolescents Be Allowed to Drink Alcohol?
Issue 3. Should Parental Consent Be Required for Adolescents
Seeking Abortions?
Issue 4. Do Boys Worry About an Ideal Body Image as Much as
Girls Do?
Issue 5. Should the Human Papillomavirus (HPV) Vaccine be
Mandatory for Early Adolescent Girls?
Issue 6.Is the Use of Nicotine Replacement Therapy (NRT)
an Appropriate Cessation Aid for Adolescents Wishing to Quit
Smoking?
Part 2 Sex and Sexuality
Issue 7. Does Engaging in Early Sexual Activity Cause Depressive
Symptoms in Adolescents?
Issue 8. Is There Cause for Concern About an “Oral Sex Crisis” for
Teens?
Issue 9. Is Comprehensive Sex Education for Adolescents Too
Liberal?
Issue 10. Does a Traditional or “Strong” Double Standard with Respect
to Sexual Behavior Exist Among Adolescents?
Issue 11. Is Female Sexual Orientation More Fluid than Male Sexual
Orientation During Adolescence?
Part 3 Relationships
Issue 12. Does Divorce or Disruption in Family Structure During
Adolescence Have a Detrimental Effect on Development?
Issue 13. Does Dating Impede Developmental Adjustment for
Adolescents?
Issue 14. Do Online Friendships Hinder Adolescent Well-Being?
Part 4 Problem Behaviors
Issue 15. Should Adolescents Who Commit Serious Offenses Be
Tried and Convicted as Adults?
Issue 16. Are Girls Bigger Bullies Than Boys?
Part 5 Media
Issue 17. Does Sex on TV Negatively Impact Adolescent Sexuality?
Issue 18. Do Video Games Impede Adolescent Cognitive
Development?
Issue 19. Are Social Networking Sites (SNSs), such as Facebook, a
Cause for Concern Among Adolescents?
CONTENTS
1 Adult Development And Aging: An Introduction
2 Cultural And Ethnic Diversity
3 Physiological And Sensory Processes
4 Coping And Adaptation
5 Mental Health Interventions
6 Physical Health And Aging
7 Memory, Attention, And Learning
8 Intelligence And Creativity
9 Cognition, Wisdom, And Expertise
10 Personality
11 Relationships
12 Work, Leisure, And Retirement
13 Approaching Death
Appendix Developmental Research Methods
35
Adulthood and Aging –
Readers
ADULT DEVELOPMENT AND AGING
3rd Edition
Diane Papalia and Harvey Sterns of University of Akron and Ruth
Feldman and Cameron Camp of Myers Research Institute
ISBN: 9780072937886
ISBN: 9780071112871 [IE]
NEW
*9780078050596*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING 10/11
23rd Edition
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/papaliaad3
CONTENTS
Harold Cox
2011 / 224 pages
ISBN: 9780078050596
Part I: Exploring the World of Adulthood
1 Adult Development and Aging in a Changing World
2 Metatheoretical Perspectives and Research Methods
Part II: The Worlds of Body and Mind
3 Longevity and Physiological Aging
4 Health and Body Systems
5 Memory
6 Intelligence and Creativity
7 Mature Thought, Wisdom and Moral Intelligence
Part III: The Social World
8 Education, Work, Leisure, And Retirement
9 Intimate Relationships and Lifestyles
10 Mature Kinship Ties and Living Arrangements
Part IV: The World Within
11 Personality Development
12 Mental Health, Coping and Adjustment to Aging
13 Dealing with Death and Bereavement
for more details.
36
Unit 5: Retirement: American Dream or Dilemma?
19. Retire Righ
20. Money for Life
21. Old. Smart. Productive.
22. Low-Cost Retirement
23. Work/Retirement Choices and Lifestyle Patterns of Older
Americans
Unit 6: The Experience of Dying
24. Development of Hospice and Palliative Care in the United
States
25. The Grieving Process
26. Moving toward Peace: An Analysis of the Concept of a Good
Death
27. Mind Frames towards Dying and Factors Motivating Their Adoption
by Terminally Ill Elder
Unit 7: Living Environment in Later Life
28. Making Your House Work
29. The Nursing Home Culture-Change Movement: Recent Past,
Present, and Future Directions for Research
30. The Place of Assisted Living in Long-Term Care and Related
Service Systems
31. Declaration of Independents: Home Is Where You Want to Live
Forever. Here’s How
Unit 8: Social Policies, Programs, and Services for Older
Americans
32. The Economic Conundrum of an Aging Population
33. Social Security’s 70th Anniversary: Surviving 20 Years of
Reform
34. Age Wave
35. Coverage for All
36. Riding into the Sunset: The Geezer Threat
37. Paying for It
38. As Good as It Gets
39. Population Aging
Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078127731*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
AGING 09/10
22nd Edition
Harold Cox, Indiana State University
-Terre Haute
ISBN: 9780078127731
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v
Correlation Guide:
v
www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Aging_0910.pdf
Aging 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-selling
McGraw-Hill Aging textbooks by Hoyer/Roodin.
CONTENTS
Unit 1: The Phenomenon of Aging
1. Elderly Americans
2. New Age Thinking
3. Living Longer: Diet and Exercise
4. Living Healthy to 100
5. Will You Live to Be 100?
6. Faulty Fountains of Youth
Unit 2: The Quality of Later Life
7. Stop Smoking and Benefits Come Quickly
8. Life after Death
9. Lifetime Achievements
10. We Can Control How We Age
Unit 3: Societal Attitudes toward Old Age
11. Society Fears the Aging Process
12. A Healthy Mind, a Longer Life
13. The Secret Lives of Single Women
14. The Under-Reported Impact of Age Discrimination and Its Threat
to Business Vitality
Unit 4: Problems and Potentials of Aging
15. Alzheimer’s—The Case for Prevention
16. Trust and Betrayal in the Golden Years
17. Elderly Americans at Highest Risk for Suicide: Few Prevention
Programs Target Their Needs, Sarah Skidmore
18. The Extent and Frequency of Abuse in the Lives of Older Women
and Their Relationship with Health Outcomes
37
17. Aging Prisoners’ Concerns toward Dying in Prison
Unit 4: Ethical Issues of Dying, Death, and Suicide
18. Death and the Law
19. What Living Wills Won’t Do: The Limits of Autonomy
20. Ethics and Life’s Ending: An Exchange
21. Suicidal Thoughts among College Students More Common than
Expected
22. When Students Kill Themselves, Colleges May Get the Blame
Unit 5: Funerals
23. The Tuneful Funeral
24. How Different Religions Pay Their Final Respects
25. The Arlington Ladies
26. Green Graveyards—A Natural Way to Go
27. Social Workers’ Final Act of Service: Respectful Burial
Arrangements for Indigent, Unclaimed, and Unidentified People
Unit 6: Bereavement
29. Disenfranchised Grief
30. Enhancing the Concept of Disenfranchised Grief
31. The Increasing Prevalence of Complicated Mourning: The
Onslaught Is Just Beginning
32. Life Is Like the Seasons
33. Counseling with Children in Contemporary Society
Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078127670*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
DYING, DEALTH, AND
BEREAVEMENT 09/10
11th Edition
George E Dickinson, College of Charleston
Michael R Leming, Saint Olaf College
ISBN: 9780078127670
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007812767x.mhtml
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Dying_Death_and
Bereavement_0910.pdf
Dying, Death, and Bereavement 09/10 with the corresponding
chapters in one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Psychology textbooks
by DeSpelder/Strickland.
CONTENTS
Unit 1: Issues in Dying and Death
1. Death, Dying, and the Dead in Popular Culture
2. Dealing with the Dead Patient at the Intensive Care Unit
3. How Much Is More Life Worth?,
4. Confronting Death: Perceptions of a Good Death in Adults with
Lung Cancer
5. Estimating Excess Mortality in Post-Invasion Iraq
6. The Sociology of Death
Unit 2: Dying and Death across the Life Cycle
7. Rituals of Unburdening
8. To Live with No Regrets
9. ‘’Cast Me Not Off in Old Age’’
10. Caregiving Systems at the End of Life: How Informal Caregivers
and Formal Providers Collaborate
11. Needs of Elderly Patients in Palliative Care
12. Altered States: What I’ve Learned about Death & Disability
Unit 3: The Dying Process
14. The Comfort Connection
15. Are They Hallucinations or Are They Real? The Spirituality of
Deathbed and Near-Death Visions
16. Dying on the Streets: Homeless Persons’ Concerns and Desires
about End-of-Life Care
38
Developmental
Psychopathology
DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOPATHOLOGY
5th Edition
Charles Wenar, Ohio State University and Patricia Kerig, James Madison
University
ISBN: 9780072820195
ISBN: 9780071215206 [IE]
CHILD PSYCHOPATHOLOGY
Jeffrey Haugaard, Cornell University—Ithaca
2008 / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780073405506
ISBN: 9780071263542 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/wenar5
CONTENTS
1: The Developmental Psychopathology Approach
2: Normal Development
3: The Bridge to the Psychopathologies
4: Infancy: The Developmental Consequences of Mental Retardation
5: Infancy: Disorders in the Autistic Spectrum
6: Infancy through Preschool Attachment Disorders, Oppositional
Defiant Disorder, and Enuresis
7: The Preschool Period: Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder and
Learning Disabilities
8: Middle Childhood: The Anxiety Disorders
9: Middle Childhood to Adolescence: Mood Disorders and Suicide
10: Middle Childhood to Adolescence: Conduct Disorder and the
Development of Antisocial Behavior
11: Severe Deviation in Late Childhood and Adolescence:
Schizophrenia
12: Psychopathologies of the Adolescent Transmission: Eating
Disorders and Substance Abuse
13: The Developmental Consequences of Brain Injury and Chronic
Illness
14: Risks in the Family Context: Child Maltreatment and Domestic
Violence
15: Late Adolescence to Early Adulthood: Emergent Personality
Disorders
16: Psychological Assessment
17: Intervention and Prevention
www.mhhe.com/haugaard1
All students who will one day work with children or their families can
gain a basic foundation for understanding child psychopathology
from this text. Students who seek careers in the mental health,
physical health, or social work fields will find extensive information
on childhood disorders, their prevention, and their treatment. All will
gain an appreciation for the many facets of this growing field, and of
the need to base interventions on research and on a humane attitude
toward each child and family.
CONTENTS
Chapter 2 Research Methods and Ethical Issues
Chapter 3 Basic Psychological Theories
Chapter 4 Quantitative Behavioral Genetics
Chapter 5 Classification, Diagnosis, and Assessment Disorders
Chapter 6 Conduct Disorder and Oppositional Defiant Disorder
Chapter 7 Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder
Chapter 8 Bipolar Disorder
Chapter 9 Depressive Disorders
Chapter 10 Anxiety Disorders
Chapter 11 Mental Retardation
Chapter 12 Autism and Other Pervasive Developmental Disorders
Chapter 13 Childhood-onset Schizophrenia
Chapter 14 Disorders Related to Child Maltreatment and Other
Trauma
39
Gender Role
Development
Masculine Subjectivity
UNIT 2: Gender and Development
8. Gender and Group Process: A Developmental Perspective
9. Gender Bender
11. Goodbye to Girlhood,
12. Teenage Fatherhood and Involvement in Delinquent Behavior
13. How Many Fathers Are Best for a Child?
14. What Autistic Girls Are Made of
UNIT 3: Gender and Education
15. Learning and Gender
16. Educating Girls, Unlocking Development
17. Boys and Girls Together: A Case for Creating Gender-Friendly
Middle School Classrooms
18. Female Faculty in Male-Dominated Fields: Law, Medicine, and
Engineering
19. Scaling the Ivory Towers
UNIT 4: Gender, Work, and Health
Part A. Gender and Work
20. The Emperor’s New Woes
21. The Media Depiction of Women Who Opt Out
23. Labor Markets, Breadwinning, and Beliefs: How Economic Context
Shapes Men’s Gender Ideology
Part B. Gender and Health
24. A Woman’s Curse?
25. Body Dissatisfaction in Adolescent Females and Males: Risk
and Resilience
26. When Sex Hurts
27. Health Behaviors, Prostate Cancer, and Masculinities: A Life
Course Perspective
UNIT 5: Genders and Sexualities
28. (Rethinking) Gender
29. Progress and Politics in the Intersex Rights Movement: Feminist
Theory in Action
30. What Do Women Want?
31. Women’s Sexuality as They Age: The More Things Change, the
More They Stay the Same
32. Peer Marriage
33. State of Our Unions: Marriage Promotion and the Contested
Power of Heterosexuality
34. Five Years on, Gay Marriage Debate Fades in Massachusetts
35. Everyone’s Queer
36. The Berdache Tradition
UNIT 6: Gender and Social Issues
38. Flower Grandma’s Secret
39. Sexual Assault on Campus: What Colleges and Universities Are
Doing about It
40. Male Rape Myths: The Role of Gender, Violence, and Sexism
41. Effects of Sexual Assaults on Men: Physical, Mental, and Sexual
Consequences
42. Human Rights, Sex Trafficking, and Prostitution
43. Fall Girls
44. Women, Citizens, Muslims
45. Beyond Hillary: Strength in Numbers Ann Friedman
Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078049941*
GENDER
5th Edition
Jacquelyn W White, University of NC-Greensboro
2011 / 416 pages
ISBN: 9780078049941
NEW
*9780078050527*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
GENDER 10/11
Bobby Hutchison
2010 / 272 pages
ISBN: 9780078050527
CONTENTS
UNIT 1: Theoretical and Research Perspectives
1. The Social Construction of Gender
2. Framed before We Know It: How Gender Shapes Social Relations
3. Gender Is Powerful: The Long Reach of Feminism
4. The World, the Flesh and the Devil
5. A Case for Angry Men and Happy Women
6. Beauty, Gender and Stereotypes: Evidence from Laboratory
Experiments
7. I’m Not a Very Manly Man: Qualitative Insights into Young Men’s
40
GENDER
4th Edition
ISBN: 9780073515298
This debate-style reader is designed to introduce students to
controversies in gender studies. The readings, which represent the
arguments of leading psychologists and other social commentators,
reflect a variety of viewpoints and have been selected for their liveliness
and substance and because of their value in a debate framework.
Students will be exposed to a rich, exciting, and emotionally and
politically charged body of theory, research, and practice. TAKING
SIDES: GENDER, containing 20 issues organized into six parts,
presents hotly debated issues in contemporary scholarly and public
discourse. Students will actively develop critical thinking skills by
analyzing opposing viewpoints and reach considered judgments.
The issues will challenge students to consider what is sex, what is
gender, and when is either relevant, and why. They will discover that
what might appear to be binary, biologically based distinction is so
much more. An Instructor’s Resource Guide (available online only)
accompanies the book. For each issue, the following have been
provided: a synopsis of each author’s position on the issue, teaching
suggestions, and multiple-choice and essay questions. The teaching
hints consist of suggestions for generating class discussion around
the themes raised by the clashing essays.
CONTENTS
Unit 1 Definitions and Cultural Boundaries: A Moving Target
Issue 1. Is Anatomy Destiny?
Issue 2. Is Gender Identity Innate?
Issue 3. Do Sex Differences in Careers in Mathematics and Sciences
Have a Biological Basis?
Unit 2 Different Strokes: The Question of Difference
Issue 4. Are Women and Men More Similar Than Different?
Issue 5. Are Different Patterns of Communication in Women and Men
Innately Determined?
Issue 6. Are the Fight-or-Flight and Tend-and-Befriend Responses
to Stress Gender-Based?
Unit 3 Violence in the Daily Lives of Women and Men
Issue 7. Are Expressions of Aggression Related to Gender?
Issue 8. Gender Symmetry: Do Women and Men Commit Equal Levels
of Violence Against Intimate Partners?
Issue 9. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape?
Unit 4 From Ozzie and Harriet to My Two Dads: Gender in Childhood
Issue 10. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Able to Marry?
for Children?
Issue 12. Are Fathers Essential for Children’s Well-Being?
Issue 13. Is Fetal Sex Selection Harmful to Society?
Unit 5 From 9 To 5: Gender in the World of Work
Issue 14. Does the “Mommy Track” (Part-Time Work) Improve
Women’s Lives?
Issue 15. Can Social Policies Improve Gender Inequalities in the Workplace?
Issue 16. Is the Gender Wage Gap Justified?
Issue 17. Are Barriers to Women’s Success as Leaders Due to
Societal Obstacles?
Unit 6 Gender And Sexuality: Double Standards?
Issue 18. Is Female Circumcision Universally Wrong?
Issue 19. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Message
to Teens?
Issue 20. Can Women’s Sexuality Be Free from Traditional Gender
Constraints?
41
42
43
DEVELOPMENT
EDUCATIONAL
ENGLISHPSYCHOLOGY
Death and Dying .................................................................................................51
Child, Family & Society – Readers .....................................................................50
Educational Psychology .....................................................................................45
Educational Psychology – Readers ....................................................................48
Infants & Toddlers ...............................................................................................50
NEW TITLES
EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
2011
Author
Annual Editions: Educational Psychology 10/11, 25e
Cauley
9780078050602
48
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Educational Psychologywith Free Annual Editions, 6e
Abbeduto
9780077386108
48
Cauley
9780073516400
48
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Childhood and Society, 8e
Del Campo
9780078127571
50
Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 09/10, 11e
Dickinson
9780078127670
51
ISBN
Page
2010
44
Educational Psychology
4th Edition
EdPSYCH: MODULES
ISBN: 9780073378589
ISBN: 9780071280822 [IE]
Lisa Bohlin, Purdue University-West Lafayette
Cheryl Cisero Durwin, Southern Conn State University
Marla Reese-Weber, Illinois State University
ISBN: 9780073378503
http://www.mhhe.com/santedu4e
http://www.mhhe.com/bohlin1e
John Santrock’s Educational Psychology is a well-crafted text that
emphasizes the application of theory to classroom practice. With richly
evocative classroom vignettes provided by practicing teachers, as
well as the most case studies - three per chapter - of any Introductory
text, Santrock’s Educational Psychology helps students think critically
about the research basis for best practices. Additionally, Santrock’s
hallmark Learning System organizes the content into manageable
chunks to support retention and mastery, and makes it much more
likely that students will have an engaging and successful course
experience.
Ed Psych Modules… For ALL your students. Ed Psych Modules
speaks to all students regardless of their intended age stage
specialization. With four case studies – early childhood, elementary,
middle school, and secondary -- for each cluster of modules, your
students effectively connect theory and practice using these realistic
cases. Written to be used in any order, these modules and clusters
give you maximum flexibility in organizing your course. The authors
have also limited the use of boxes and other sidebars in order
to ensure students identify and understand the core concepts of
educational psychology.
CONTENTS
Preface
Chapter 1 Educational Psychology: A Tool for Effective Teaching
Chapter 2 Cognitive and Language Development
Chapter 3 Social Contexts and Socioemotional Development
Chapter 4 Individual Varations
Chapter 5 Sociocultural Diversity
Chapter 6 Learners Who Are Exceptional
Chapter 7 Behavioral and Social Cognitive Approaches
Chapter 8 The Information-Processing Approach
Chapter 9 Complex Cognitive Processes
Chapter 10 Social Constructivist Approaches
Chapter 11 Learning and Cognition in the Content Areas
Chapter 12 Planning, Instruction, and Technology
Chapter 13 Motivation, Teaching, and Learning
Chapter 14 Managing the Classroom
Chapter 15 Standardized Tests and Teaching
Chapter 16 Classroom Assessment and Grading
CONTENTS
Module 1: Today’s Diverse Classrooms
Cluster 1: Personal Development
Module 2: Contexts of Development
Module 3: Social Development
Module 4: Emotional Development
Cluster 2: The Developing Learner
Module 6: The Brain and Development
Module 7: Cognitive Development
Module 8: Language Development
Cluster 3: Learning Theories
Module 9: Traditional Behavioral Theories
Module 10: Social Cognitive Theory
Module 11: Information Processing
Cluster 4: Cognitive Processes
Module 12: Metacognition
Module 13: Transfer of Skills and Knowledge
Module 14: Critical Thinking and Problem Solving
Cluster 5: Motivation
Module 15: Behavioral Theory
Module 16: Cognitive Theories
Module 17: Self Theories
Cluster 6: Classroom Management And Instruction
Module 18: Creating a Productive Learning Environment
Module 19: Understanding and Managing Student Behavior
Module 20: Planning for Instruction
Module 21: Grouping Practices
Cluster 7: Learner Differences
Module 22: Intelligence
Module 23: Giftedness and Creativity
Module 24: Cognitive Disabilities
Module 25: Emotional, Social and Behavioral Disabilities
Cluster 8: Classroom Assessment
Module 26: Assessing Student Learning
Module 27: Test Construction and Use
Module 28: Performance Assessment
Cluster 9: Standardized Testing
Module 29: Standardized Tests and Scores
Module 30: Issues in Standardized Testing
45
ENHANCING COGNITIVE FUNTIONS
APPLICATIONS ACROSS CONTEXTS
TO EMPOWER, BE EMPOWERED
Yeap Lay Leng, Myint Swe Khine, Lim Lee Hean and
Low Guat Tin
2005 (May 2005) / 264 pages
ISBN: 9780071246491
Oon-Seng Tan and Alice Seok-Hoon Seng
2005 (May 2005) / 320 pages
ISBN: 9780071247658 (Hardcover)
ISBN: 9780071274777 (Softcover)
“To empower, be empowered” are processes that enable individuals
to take on greater responsibility and authority in decision making.
The individuals’ potential to make decisions can be maximized within
an environment that nurtures them through education, training,
professional development, commitment, facilitation, resources,
mutual trust and emotional support. In the educational context, “To
empower, be empowered” is to provide a “self-surpassing classroom”,
that is, a classroom environment with “self-surpassing teachers” who
engage their students in purposeful activities and direct them to be
responsible for their own learning. To Empower, Be Empowered is
suitable and applicable for all those who are in people management.
The 14 chapters in the book are interrelated topics, written from the
different perspectives of empowerment.
Cognitive functioning is a new and important advancement in cognitive
psychology and cognitive science. Cognitive functions are a central
focus in the dynamic and mediational approach to assessment and
intervention. An understanding of cognitive functions is the key to the
design of effective cognitive intervention and enrichment programs.
This book focuses on the mind of the learner, particularly on the nature
and characteristics of cognitive functioning. It covers innovative and
effective approaches to the enhancement of learning potential and
cognitive functioning of children and adolescents. The approaches
are grounded in theories pertaining to cognitive functions, cognitive
modifi ability, and dynamic assessment. Written in clear language, the
book illustrates the nature of cognitive functioning and the application
of certain cognitive programs and interventions across contexts.
The nature of cognitive functioning today is of interest not only to
cognitive psychologists but also to those working in the multiple
disciplines of neuroscience, cognitive systems, and human factors
design. Cognitive enrichment programs and assessment scales such
as LPAD-B, FIE-B, ACFS, MindLadder, Building Blocks of Learning,
and MIDAS and their applications in different environments are
highlighted in the book and examples of good practice and a variety
of mediational and dynamic assessment tools discussed. Educational
practitioners working closely with children, counselors, parents, and
caregivers will find the book a valuable reference.
CONTENTS
About the Authors
Introduction: Stepping Up Empowerment
Chapter 1: Empowering the Learner
Chapter 2: Understanding Learning Styles to Empower Learning
Chapter 3: Learning Styles and Educational Issues
Chapter 4: Empowerment through Cognitive Profi ling
Chapter 5: Cognitive Matching to Empower Learning
Chapter 6: Implications of Learning Styles in Empowering Learning
Chapter 7: Empowering Learning with Cognitive Organizers
Chapter 8: Empowering through Motivation: The Theory
Chapter 9: Empowering through Motivation: The Practice
Chapter 10: Empowering through Mentoring
Chapter 11: Empowering through Coaching
Chapter 12: Reframe to Empower Learning
Chapter 13: Empowering the Teacher: First, Learn More Thyself
Chapter 14: Initiatives to Empowerment in a ‘Learning Nation’
References
Index
CONTENTS
1. Toward a Theory of Enhancing Cognitive Functions
2. An Integrative Approach to Knowledge Construction Functions
(KCF)
3. Improving Cognitive Functions for Secondary School Students
4. The Application of Cognitive Functions Scale: A Dynamic
Assessment Procedure for Young Children
5. The Feuerstein Programs for Early Assessment and Intervention:
The LPAD-B and the FIE-B
6. Early Detection: Blessing or Curse
7. Mediation and Assessment of a Young and Low-functioning Child:
An Initial Session
8. Building Blocks of Learning: Dynamic Assessment and Cognitive
Mediation with Children
9. Cognitive Interventions for Memory Deficits
10. Enhancing Cognitive Functions via a Multiple Intelligences
Assessment
11. Sensory and Cognitive Development in Adulthood
46
THINKING ABOUT THINKING WHAT
EDUCATORS NEED TO KNOW
COUNSELLING IN SCHOOLS
THEORIES, PROCESSES AND TECHNIQUES
Jessie Ee, Agnes Chang and Oon-Seng Tan
2004 / 352 pages
ISBN: 9780071235075
Esther Tan
2004 (December 2004) / 280 pages
ISBN: 9780071233668
The new millennium calls for a breakthrough in the way we learn and
think. How can we enhance the flexibility of the mind so that the spirit of
innovation and enterprise can flourish and flow in those we nurture and
teach? What do we know about the important roles played by attitudes,
dispositions, intellectual habits, and motivation in the development
of thinking? This book captures the latest research and applications
in these fields with contributions by some of the most renowned
researchers and practitioners intimately involved in research and
pedagogy in self-regulated learning and metacognition.
This book is intended to be a comprehensive guide and useful
resource for teachers, counsellors, parents and educators who
believe in a holistic education for the young. The nurturing of the
emotional, psychological, moral, physical, artistic and spiritual wellbeing of the young is just as important as challenging their minds
and maximizing their intellectual potentials. The scope of the book is
comprehensive and encompassing, covering a wide range of topics,
including developmental group guidance, career guidance and
career counselling, group dynamics and group counselling, individual
counselling, and intervention strategies in working with children,
youth and parents. There are also opportunities to learn about the
development and management of guidance and counselling services
in schools and how to conduct school-based research in guidance
and counselling to enhance practice.
CONTENTS
Part 1: Theory and Research, and their Implications
Chapter 1: Pursuing Academic Self regulation: A 20-year Methodological
Quest
Chapter 2: Teaching to Facilitate Self regulated Learning
Chapter 3: Principles of Self-regulated Learning for Teachers
Chapter 4: Thinking for Yourself and Thinking Together: The
Community of Inquiry as a Pedagogy for Self regulated Learning
Chapter 5: Metacognitive Theory and Classroom Practices
Chapter 6: Teachers’ Understanding and Practice of Strategy-based
Instruction and Classroom Goal Orientations for Students’ Selfregulation: Findings across Cultures
Chapter 7: Motivation, Strategies, and Achievement: A Comparison
of Teachers and Students in High, Average, and Low Achieving
Classes
Part 2: Practice and Applications
Chapter 8: Reflective Practice and Self regulation: Walking the Talk
through Problem-based Learning in Teacher Education
Chapter 9: Choosing the Right Teacher: When Self-regulation Can
Hinder Learning
Chapter 10: Talk Your Walk: Issues in Instruction of Self-regulatory
Second Language Reading
Chapter 11: Self-regulated Learning in Science
Chapter 12: Fostering Students’ Self regulation Skills in Mathematical
Problem-solving
Chapter 13: Helping Students to Become Strategic Learners: The
Roles of Assessment, Teachers, Instruction, and Students
Chapter 14: Self-regulation for Adolescents with Attention Deficit
Hyperactivity Disorder
CONTENTS
Foreword
Preface
Chapter 1: Developmental Group Guidance in the Classroom
Chapter 2: Working with Children
Chapter 3: Working with Youth
Chapter 4: Working with Parents
Chapter 5: Career Guidance and Career Counselling in Schools
Chapter 6: Group Counselling
Chapter 7: Multidimensional Metatheoretical Counselling Model
Chapter 8: An Ecological Multimodal Approach to Counselling
Chapter 9: Managing Guidance and Counselling in Schools
Chapter 10: Research in Guidance and Counselling
About the Contributors
Index
47
Educational Psychology –
Readers
NEW
*9780073516400*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
EDUCATIONAL
PSYCHOLOGY 09/10
24th Edition
NEW
*9780078050602*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: EDUCATIONAL
PSYCHOLOGY 10/11
25th Edition
Kathleen M Cauley and Gina Pannozzo of
Virginia Commonwealth University
ISBN: 9780073516400
Kathleen M Cauley and Gina Pannozzo of Virginia Commonwealth
University
2011 / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780078050602
for more details.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Educational_
Psychology_0910.pdf
Educational Psychology 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in
one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Educational Psychology textbooks
by Santrock.
NEW
*9780077386108*
CONTENTS
With Free Annual Editions, 6th Edition
Unit 1: Perspectives on Teaching
1. Character and Academics: What Good Schools Do
2. Memories from the ‘Other’: Lessons in Connecting with Students
3. A National Tragedy: Helping Children Cope
UNIT 2: Development
Part A. Childhood
4. Play: Ten Power Boosts for Children’s Early Learning
6. The Curriculum Superhighway
Part B. Adolescence
7. The Under-Appreciated Role of Humiliation in the Middle School
8. Risk Taking in Adolescence: New Perspectives from Brain and
Behavioral Science
Unit 3: Individual Differences among Learners
Part A. Exceptional Learning Needs
9. Thinking Positively: How Some Characteristics of ADHD Can Be
Adaptive and Accepted in the Classroom
10. Universal Design in Elementary and Middle School
Part B. Gifted and Talented
11. Recognizing Gifted Students: A Practical Guide for Teachers
Part C. Cultural Diversity
12. Mélange Cities
13. Nine Powerful Practices: Nine Strategies Help Raise the
Achievement of Students Living in Poverty
Leonard Abbeduto, University of Wisc Madison
Frank Symons, University of Minnesota
2010 / 448 pages
ISBN: 9780077386108
debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and
develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed
with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript or
challenge questions. Taking Sides readers feature an annotated listing
of selected World Wide Web sites. An online Instructor’s Resource
Guide with testing material is available for each volume. Using Taking
Sides in the Classroom is also an excellent instructor resource. Visit
www.mhhe.com/takingsides for more details. Taking Sides: Clashing
Views in Educational Psychology, 6/e (print text) is packaged with
a FREE access code card for Annual Editions: Assessment and
Evaluation 10/11 CourseSmart eBook by Sandra Williamson.
CourseSmart is an online eTextbook. Visit www.coursesmart.com
for further information.
48
THE PRAXIS SERIES OF OFFICIAL GUIDE
WITH CD-ROM
2nd Edition
14. Becoming Adept at Code-Switching
Unit 4: Learning and Instruction
Part A. Learning and Cognition
16. Differentiating for Tweens
17. Critical Thinking: Why Is It So Hard to Teach?
18. Constructing Learning: Using Technology to Support Teaching
for Understanding
19. Successful Teachers Develop Academic Momentum with
Reluctant Students
Part B. Instructional Strategies
20. Teaching for Deep Learning
21. Improve Your Verbal Questioning
22. Designing Learning through Learning to Design
23. Using Engagement Strategies to Facilitate Children’s Learning
and Success
24. Meeting the Needs of All Students through Differentiated
Instruction: Helping Every Child Reach and Exceed Standards
25. What’s Right about Looking at What’s Wrong?
Unit 5: Motivation and Classroom Management
Part A. Motivation
26. Convincing Students They Can Learn to Read: Crafting SelfEfficacy Prompts
27. Why We Can’t Always Get What We Want
28. How to Produce a High-Achieving Child
29. How Can Students Be Motivated: A Misplaced Question?
30. The Perils and Promises of Praise
31. Should Learning Be Its Own Reward?
Part B. Classroom Management
32. Strategies for Effective Classroom Management in the Secondary
Setting
33. “No! I Won’t! “
34. Bullying: Effective Strategies for Its Prevention
35. Cyberbullying: What School Adminstrators (and Parents) Can
Do
36. IOSIE: A Method for Analyzing Student Behavioral Problems
37. Middle School Students Talk about Social Forces in the
Classroom
38. An Early Warning System
Unit 6: Assessment
39. Mismatch: When State Standards and Tests Don’t Mesh, Schools
Are Left Grinding Their Gears
40. Assessment through the Students’ Eyes
41. Testing the Joy out of Learning
42. Feedback That Fits
43. The Proficiency Illusion
Article Rating Form
Educational Testing Service
2010 / 496 pages
ISBN: 9780071626606
[A Professional Reference Title]
The Praxis Series: The Official Guide comes straight from Educational
Testing Service (ETS)--the people who make the test. If you need to
take these state-mandated teacher licensing exams, this book gives
you complete information about the entire Praxis series. This book
includes a complete Praxis I: PPST exam review. Six full-length,
authentic PPST tests are provided in the book and also in interactive
format on CD-ROM. You will also find authoritative information about
the Praxis II Subject Assessments, the Principles of Learning and
Teaching (PLT) exam, and much more.
CONTENTS
How to Use This Book
PART I. GETTING STARTED
Chapter 1. Introducing the Praxis
Chapter 2. Praxis Practical Matters
Chapter 3. General Strategies for Test-Takers
PART II. PREPARING FOR THE PPST
Chapter 4. All About the PPST
Chapter 5. PPST Reading
Chapter 6. PPST Mathematics
Chapter 7. PPST Writing: The Multiple-Choice Section
Chapter 8. PPST Writing: The Essay
PART III. SIX REAL PPSTs FOR PRACTICE
Chapter 9. PPST: Reading Test 1
Chapter 10. PPST: Reading Test 2
Chapter 11. PPST: Mathematics Test 1
Chapter 12. PPST: Mathematics Test 2
Chapter 13. PPST: Writing Test 1
Chapter 14. PPST: Writing Test 2
PART IV. PRINCIPLES OF LEARNING AND TEACHING (PLT)
Chapter 15. All About the PLT Tests
Chapter 16. Real PLT Questions for Practice
PART V. PRAXIS II: ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
Chapter 17. Elementary Education: Curriculum, Instruction, and
Assessment
Chapter 18. Elementary Education: Content Knowledge
Chapter 19. Elementary Education: Content Area Exercises
PART VI. PRAXIS II: SUBJECT ASSESSMENTS
Chapter 20. All About the Subject Assessments
Chapter 21. Reading, English, Language Arts
Chapter 22. Social Studies, Math, Science
Chapter 23. Other Subjects
Appendix A: State-by-State Certification Testing Requirements
Appendix B: For More Information
49
Infants & Toddlers
Child, Family & Society –
Readers
INFANTS, TODDLERS, AND CAREGIVERS
A Curriculum of Respectful, Responsive
Care and Education
8th Edition
NEW
*9780078127571*
Janet Gonzalez-Mena, Napa Valley College
Dianne Widmeyer Eyer, Canada College
2009 / 400 pages
ISBN: 9780073378541
ISBN: 9780071285452 [IE]
8th Edition
2010 / 448 pages
ISBN: 9780078127571
http://www.mhhe.com/gonzalezitc8e
Combining a child-centered philosophy with problem-solving
strategies, and a thorough discussion of diversity, Infants, Toddlers,
and Caregivers serves as an ideal introduction to curriculum and care
for infants and toddlers. The approach to caregiving that underlies the
text is based on Magda Gerber’s philosophy combined with a bold
new approach to the extensive 62 years of research done by her late
colleague, Emmi Pikler. Focusing on the concept of respect in child
care, both pioneers based their curriculum around responding to each
individual child’s needs in a warm and sensitive manner. Stressing the
need for physical and social growth through planned and unplanned
learning exercises, Gerber and Pikler’s approach to childcare aims to
develop the mental, physical, and emotional progress of each child.
In addition to the new approach to Pikler’s research, the new edition
features expanded discussions on race, natural environments and
exercise for children. Infants, Toddlers, and Caregivers applies this
approach in a practical and engaging way for students and faculty in
introductory early childhood courses.
CONTENTS
Preface
Resources for Caregivers
PART I. FOCUS ON THE CAREGIVER
1. Principles, Practice, and Curriculum
2. Infant-Toddler Education
3. Caregiving as Curriculum
4. Play as Curriculum
PART II. FOCUS ON THE CHILD
5. Attachment
6. Perception
7. Motor Skills
8. Cognition
9. Language
10. Emotions
11. Social Skills
PART III.: FOCUS ON THE PROGRAM
12. The Physical Environment
13. The Social Environment
14. Adult Relations in Infant-Toddler Care and Education Programs
Appendix A: Quality in Infant-Toddler Programs: A Checklist
Appendix B: Environmental Chart
Appendix C: Guiding Principles of the Parent Services Projects
Notes
References
Glossary
Credits
Index
50
Death and Dying
NEW
*9780078127670*
THE LAST DANCE: ENCOUNTERING DEATH
AND DYING
8th Edition
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
DYING, DEATH, AND
BEREAVEMENT 09/10
11th Edition
Lynne Ann DeSpelder, Cabrillo College and Albert Lee Strickland
ISBN: 9780073405469
www.mhhe.com/despelder8e
ISBN: 9780078127670
The best-selling textbook in the field, The Last Dance offers an
interdisciplinary approach to the study of death and dying. Integrating
the experiential, scholarly, social, individual, emotional, and intellectual
dimensions of death and dying, the eighth edition of this acclaimed text
has been thoroughly revised to offer cutting-edge and comprehensive
coverage of death studies. Together with its companion volumes, this
new edition of The Last Dance provides solid grounding in theory and
research, as well as practical application to students’ lives.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 – Attitudes Toward Death: A Climate of Change
Chapter 2 – Learning About Death: The Influence of Sociocultural
Forces
Chapter 3 – Perspectives on Death: Cross-Cultural and Historical
Chapter 4 – Health Care Systems: Patients, Staff, and Institutions
Chapter 5 – Death Systems: Matters of Public Policy
Chapter 6 – Facing Death: Living with Life-Threatening Illness
Chapter 7 – End-of-Life Issues and Decisions
Chapter 8 – Survivors: Understanding the Experience of Loss
Chapter 9 – Last Rites: Funerals and Body Disposition
Chapter 10 – Death in the Lives of Children and Adolescents
Chapter 11 – Death in the Lives of Adults
Chapter 12 – Suicide
Chapter 13 – Risks of Death in the Modern World
Chapter 14 – Beyond Death / After Life
Chapter 15 – The Path Ahead: Personal and Social Choices
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Dying_Death_and
Bereavement_0910.pdf
CONTENTS
Lung Cancer
51
Expected
Unit 5: Funerals
Unit 6: Bereavement
Article Rating Form
52
53
DEVELOPMENT
AND PERSONALITY PSYCHOLOGY
SOCIAL
ENGLISH
Advanced Social Psychology .............................................................................58
Attitudes and Behavior .......................................................................................57
Health Psychology ..............................................................................................62
Interpersonal Relations.......................................................................................62
Intimacy ..............................................................................................................59
Motivation and Emotion ......................................................................................63
Personality ..........................................................................................................57
Psychology of Prejudice .....................................................................................62
Psychology of Women and Gender ....................................................................60
Psychology of Women and Gender – Reader ....................................................60
Social Psychology – Texts ..................................................................................55
Social Psychology – Readers .............................................................................56
NEW TITLES
SOCIAL AND PERSONALITY PSYCHOLOGY
2011
Author
ISBN
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Personality Psychology
Newman
9780078050008
58
White
9780078049941
60
Interpersonal Conflict, 8e
Wilmot
9780073385136
62
Hutchison
9780078050527
60
Personality Psychology: Domains of Knowledge about Human Nature, 4e
Larsen
9780073370682
57
Social Psychology, 10e
Myers
9780073370668
55
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Social Psychology, 3e
Nier
9780078139413
56
Psychology of Success, 5e
Waitley
9780073375175
63
Page
2010
54
Social and Personality Psychology
Social Psychology –
Texts
Part Two: Social Influence
Chapter 5: Genes, Culture, and Gender
Chapter 6: Conformity and Obedience
Chapter 7: Persuasion
Chapter 8: Group Influence
Part Three: Social Relations
Chapter 9: Prejudice: Disliking others
Chapter 10: Aggression: Hurting Others
Chapter 11: Attraction and Intimacy: Liking and Loving Others
Chapter 12: Helping
Chapter 13: Conflict and Peacemaking
Part Four: Applying Social Psychology
Chapter 14: Social Psychology in the Clinic
Chapter 15: Social Psychology in Court
Chapter 16: Social Psychology and the Sustainable Future
Epilogue
NEW
*9780073370668*
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
10th Edition
David Myers, Hope College
2010 / 752 pages
ISBN: 9780073370668
ISBN: 9780071220002 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/myers10e
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
5th Edition
Reflecting your students and their world. How many of the students
in your Social Psychology course are Psychology majors? Business?
Sociology? Education? In the 10th edition of Social Psychology,
David Myers once again weaves an inviting and compelling narrative
that speaks to ALL of your students regardless of background or
intended major. Through examples and applications as well as
marginal quotations from across the breadth of the liberal arts and
sciences, Myers draws students into the field of social psychology.
At the same time, Myers is also in tune with the ever-changing state
of social psychology research. Boasting over 650 new citations in
the 10th edition, Social Psychology is as current as it is captivating.
Research Close-Up and Inside Story features throughout the book
provide deeper exposure to key research and researchers. Marginal
quotations, examples and applications throughout each chapter, and
the concluding “Applying Social Psychology” chapters all ensure
that regardless of your students’ interests and future plans, Social
Psychology will engage them. This 10th edition also features the
contributions of Jean Twenge, author of Generation Me and The
Narcissism Epidemic, further bolstering the direct connection to
today’s students.
Stephen L Franzoi, Marquette University
ISBN: 9780073370590
ISBN: 9780071285438 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/franzoi5
Readable research. This distinctive, theory-driven text uses “The Self”
as a theme to give students a meaningful context for exploring the
key concepts of social psychology. “Applications” sections have been
incorporated into most chapters, and “Featured Study” sections at the
end of every chapter summarize the purpose, method, and results
of recently published scientific articles. Retaining the emphasis on
methodology, the text also continues the tradition of strong gender
coverage, while expanding the coverage of social cognition and
social neuroscience.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
CONTENTS
v Research that reflects what we currently know about the world
of social psychology. With over 650 new citations, Social Psychology
presents the state of the field as it stands today. As always, Myers
presents this research in meaningful and digestible ways that promise
to engage all students.
Chapter 1 Introducing Social Psychology
Chapter 2 Conducting Research in Social Psychology
Chapter 3 The Self
Chapter 4 Social Cognition and Person Perception
Chapter 5 Attitudes and Persuasion
Chapter 6 Stereotyping, Prejudice, and Discrimination
Chapter 7 Social Influence
Chapter 8--Group Behavior
Chapter 9 Interpersonal Attraction
Chapter 10 Intimate Relationships
Chapter 11 Aggression
Chapter 12 Prosocial Behavior: Helping Others
v Guest contributions reflect topics of particular interest to today’s
students. New to the 10th edition, Jean Twenge has contributed to
Chapter 2, “The Self in a Social World.” Drawing on her extensive
knowledge and research on the self and cultural changes, the author
of Generation Me and The Narcissism Epidemic collaborated on the
revision of this chapter.
v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Social_
Psychology_3e.pdf
v This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides:
Clashing Views in Social Psychology, 3/e with the corresponding
chapters in three of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Social Psychology
textbooks by Franzoi and Myers et al.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introducing Social Psychology
Part One: Social Thinking
Chapter 2: The Self in a Social World
Chapter 3: Social Beliefs and Judgments
Chapter 4: Behavior and Attitudes
55
Readers
EXPLORING SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
5th Edition
ISBN: 9780073370644
ISBN: 9780071280426 [IE]
NEW
*9780078139413*
http://www.mhhe.com/myersesp5
This brief, modular introduction to social psychology offers streamlined
focus on issues such as belief and illusion, prejudice and diversity,
and love and hate. The brevity of each of the book’s 31 stand-alone
modules makes this the perfect text for covering the core concepts
in the field. By introducing social psychology in an essay format and
by writing in a voice that is both solidly scientific and warmly human,
Exploring Social Psychology is able to reveal social psychology as
an investigative reporter might, by providing a current summary of
important social phenomena, by showing how social psychologists
uncover and explain such phenomena, and by reflecting on their
human significance. The new edition includes discussion of the
Hurricane Katrina aftermath as an illustration of hindsight bias and
availability heuristic, the Iraq War and belief perseverance, and
terrorism and group polarization.
TAKING SIDES:
CLASHING VIEWS IN
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
3rd Edition
Jason A Nier, Connecticut College
2010 / 432 Pages
ISBN: 9780078139413
CONTENTS
Part One Introducing Social Psychology
Module 1 Doing Social Psychology
Module 2 Did You Know It All Along?
Part Two Social Thinking
Module 3 Self-Concept: Who Am I?
Module 4 Self-Serving Bias
Module 5 The Power of Positive Thinking
Module 6 The Fundamental Attribution Error
Module 7 The Powers and Perils of Intuition
Module 8 Reasons for Unreason
Module 9 Behavior and Belief
Module 10 Clinical Intuition
Module 11 Clinical Therapy: The Powers of Social Cognition
Part Three Social Influence
Module 12 Human Nature and Cultural Diversity
Module 13 Gender, Genes, and Culture
Module 14 How Nice People Get Corrupted
Module 15 Two Routes to Persuasion
Module 16 Indoctrination and Inoculation
Module 17 The Mere Presence of Others
Module 18 Many Hands Make Diminished Responsibility
Module 19 Doing Together What We Would Never Do Alone
Module 20 How Groups Intensify Decisions
Module 21 Power to the Person
Part Four Social Relations
Module 22 The Challenge of Diversity
Module 23 The Roots of Prejudice
Module 24 The Nature and Nurture of Aggression
Module 25 Does the Media Influence Social Behavior?
Module 26 Who Likes Whom?
Module 27 The Ups and Downs of Love
Module 28 Causes of Conflict
Module 29 Blessed Are the Peacemakers
Module 30 When Do People Help?
Module 31 Social Psychology and the Sustainable Future
References
Art Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Social_
Psychology_3e.pdf
CONTENTS
Unit 1 Ethical Issues in Social Psychology
Issue 1. Is Deception of Human Participants Ethical?
Issue 2. Should Social Psychologists Try to Solve Social
Problems?
Issue 3. Can Experimental Social Psychology and Social
Constructionism co-exist?
Unit 2 Social Cognition
Issue 4. Are Our Social Perceptions Often Inaccurate?
Issue 5. Does Cognitive Dissonance Explain Why Behavior Can
Change Attitudes?
Issue 6. Are Self-Esteem Programs Misguided?
Issue 7. Can People Accurately Detect Lies?
Issue 8. Are Repressed Memories Real?
Issue 9. Do Positive Illusions Lead to Healthy Behavior?
Unit 3 Social Influence
Issue 10. Do Milgram’s Obedience Experiments Help Explain the
Nature of the Holocaust?
Issue 11. Does the Stanford Prison Experiment Help Explain the
Effects of Imprisonment?
Issue 12. Is Subliminal Persuasion a Myth?
Issue 13. Can People Really Be Brainwashed?
Unit 4 Social Relations
Issue 14. Is Stereotyping Inevitable?
56
Personality
Issue 15. Does the Implicit Association Test (IAT) Measure Racial
Prejudice?
Issue 16. Should Social Psychologists Study the Accuracy of
Stereotypes?
Issue 17. Does True Altruism Exist?
Issue 18. Does Media Violence Cause Aggression?
*9780073370682*
NEW
Attitudes and Behavior
PERSONALITY PSYCHOLOGY
Domains of Knowledge about Human
Nature
4th Edition
MULTICULTURAL PSYCHOLOGY
2nd Edition
Jeffrey Scott Mio, Lori Barker Hackett and Jaydee Tumambing
ISBN: 9780073382715
Randy J Larsen, Washington University-St Louis
David M Buss, University of Texas at Austin
2010 / 768 pages
ISBN: 9780073370682
ISBN: 9780070164994 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/mio2e
www.mhhe.com/larsen4e
In this thoroughly updated revision of Multicultural Psychology, the
authors once again use their own personal stories and experiences
along with those of students as a means of entry to scientific and
professional writing on multicultural psychology. In doing so, they
engage students in the presentation of quantitative and qualitative
research on multicultural issues while capturing the richness of diverse
cultures. The text focuses on compelling topics such as differences in
worldviews and communication; racial/cultural identity development;
issues of racism; immigration; and nonracial populations of diversity,
such as gender, sexuality, age, and ability. The authors integrate
issues specific to populations of diversity throughout the chapters,
as opposed to covering such issues in distinct chapters.
Using a novel organizational framework, one that emphasizes
domains of knowledge about human nature, this trusted text presents
the field of contemporary personality psychology as a collection of
interrelated topics and themes. The emphasis, as always, is on the
scientific basis of understanding human nature. The fourth edition
continues to answer the needs of instructors by covering topics that
do not fit into the framework of theory-based texts. It features updates
on cutting edge trends in personality psychology in relation to culture,
gender, evolution, genetics, emotion, self, health psychology, and
personality disorders, while providing a solid foundation in the more
traditional areas of trait psychology, psychoanalysis, and cognitive
and social approaches to personality. Presented in a colorful and
accessible format, the provides exercises, personality questionnaires,
“Closer Look” boxes, current news boxes, and many charts, graphs,
and photos to engage students in the material.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1—Introduction
Chapter 2—Research and Testing
Chapter 3—Cultural Equivalence
Chapter 4—Communication
Chapter 5—Acculturation
Chapter 6—Racism
Chapter 7—Racial Identity Development
Chapter 8—Health
Chapter 9—Mental Health
Chapter 10—Wrapping it All Up
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v Reflects the latest and most up-to-date research on topics
such as genetics, theories of personality, contemporary views of
the unconscious, cognitive social learning, self-esteem, culture, and
gender.
v Provides major updates on correlates of personality dimensions
includes new material on neuroticism, extraversion, agreeableness,
and conscientiousness.
v Includes new information about research on the effects of
personality on religiosity and spirituality later in life, the heritability
of self-esteem, a meta-analysis of D4 receptor (DRD4) genes linked
with sensation seeking, evolution of group living and social motivation,
and self-recognition in animals.
CONTENTS
Introduction
1. Introduction to Personality Psychology
2. Personality Assessment, Measurement, and Research Design
Part I: The Dispositional Domain
3. Traits and Trait Taxonomies
4. Theoretical and Measurement Issues in Trait Psychology
5. Personality Dispositions over Time: Stability, Change, and
Coherence
Part II: The Biological Domain
6. Genetics and Personality
7. Physiological Approaches to Personality
8. Evolutionary Perspectives on Personality
Part III: The Intrapsychic Domain
9. Psychoanalytic Approaches to Personality
10. Psychoanalytic Approaches: Contemporary Issues
57
11. Motives and Personality
Part IV: The Cognitive/Experiential Domain
12. Cognitive Topics in Personality
13. Emotion and Personality
14. Approaches to the Self
Part V: The Social and Cultural Domain
15. Personality and Social Interaction
16. Sex, Gender, and Personality
17. Culture and Personality
Part VI: The Adjustment Domain
18. Stress, Coping, Adjustment, and Health
19. Disorders of Personality
Conclusion
20. Summary and Future Directions
NEW
*9780078050008*
PERSONALITY PSYCHOLOGY
Laurel Conway Newman, Fontbonne University
Randy J Larsen, Washington University-St Louis
2011 / 448 pages
ISBN: 9780078050008
THEORIES OF PERSONALITY
7th Edition
Jess Feist, Mcneese State University
Geogory Feist, College of William Mary
2009 / 592 pages
ISBN: 9780073382708
ISBN: 9780071263450 [IE]
Advanced Social
Psychology
http://www.mhhe.com/feist7
The 7th edition of this trusted introduction to personality centers on the
premise that personality theories are a reflection of the unique cultural
background, family experiences, personalities, and professional
training of their originators. The book begins by acquainting students
with the meaning of personality and providing them with a solid
foundation for understanding the nature of theory, as well as its crucial
contributions to science. The chapters that follow present twentythree major theories: coverage of each theory also encompasses a
biographical sketch of each theorist, related research, and applications
to real life. The primary focus of this revision was updating the theory
chapters to reflect the most recent research.
SOCIAL COGNITION, FROM BRAINS TO
CULTURE
Susan T Fiske, University of Massachusetts, Amherst
Shelley E Taylor, University of California-Los Angeles
2008 / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780073405520
ISBN: 9780071284868 [IE]
CONTENTS
Part I: Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction to Personality Theory
Part II: Psychodynamic Theories
Chapter 2: Freud: Psychoanalysis
Chapter 3: Adler: Individual Psychology
Chapter 4: Jung: Analytical Psychology
Chapter 5: Klein: Object Relations Theory
Chapter 6: Horney: Psychoanalytic Social Theory
Chapter 7: Fromm: Humanistic Psychoanalysis
Chapter 8: Sullivan: Interpersonal Theory
Chapter 9: Erikson: Post-Freudian Theory
Part III: Humanistic/Existential Theories
Chapter 10: Maslow: Holistic-Dynamic Theory
Chapter 11: Rogers: Person-Centered Theory
Chapter 12: May: Existential Psychology
Part IV: Dispositional Theories
Chapter 13: Allport: Psychology of the Individual
Chapter 14: Eysenck, McCrae, and Costa’s Factor and Trait
Theories
Part V: Learning Theories
Chapter 15: Skinner: Behavioral Analysis
Chapter 16: Bandura: Social Cognitive Theory
Chapter 17: Rotter and Mischel: Cognitive Social Learning Theory
Chapter 18: Kelly: Psychology of Personal Constructs
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/fisketaylor
This exciting new version of the classic text, Social Cognition,
describes the increasingly complete link between neuropsychology
and culture. Highlighting the cutting-edge research in social
neuropsychology, mainstream experimental social-cognitive
psychology, and cultural psychology, it retains the authors’ unique
ability to be both scholarly and entertaining. Reader-friendly style and
concise summaries combine with the authors’ engaging perspectives
on this flourishing field. Comprehensive without being overwhelming,
this new standard for the field brings with it a new organization
reflecting current consensus open issues of the field, and its trajectory
into the future.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
a. Approaches to Studying the Social Thinker
b. Ebb & Flow of Cognition in Psychology & Neuroscience
c. What is Social Cognition?
d. People Are Not Things
e. Culture Matters
f. Brains Matter
g. Summary
Basic Concepts in Social Cognition
2. Dual-Modes
a. Automaticity
58
b. Control
c. Motivations that Moderate Modes
d. Models of Both Automatic and Controlled Processes
e. Single-Mode Alternatives
f. Summary
3. Attention and Encoding: What Gets into Our Heads
a. Salience: A Property of Stimuli in Context
b. Vividness: An Inherent Property of Stimuli
c. Accessibility: A Property of Categories in Our Heads
d. Direct Perception: Not Just in Our Heads
e. Faces: The focus of social attention
f. Summary
g. Unfinished business:
4. Representation in Memory
a. Models of Memory
b. Social Memory Structures: Why Social Memory Matters
c. Summary
d. Unfinished business:
e. How Social Memory Matters
Topics in Social Cognition: From Self to Society
5. Self
a. Mental representation of the Self
b. Culture and the Self
c. Self-Regulation
d. Motivation and Self-Regulation
e. Self as a Reference Point (ck Ochsner, Kelley, Heatherton)
6. Causal Attribution Processes
a. What is Attribution Theory?
b. Attribution Theory: The Empirical Legacy
c. Attributional Biases
d. Summary
7. Heuristics
a. Introduction to heuristics
b. When do heuristics lead to the wrong answers?
c. Judgments over time
d. Accuracy-efficiency trade-off in perspective
e. Summary
8. Cognitive Approaches to Attitudes & Evaluations (in progress)
a. Background
b. Cognitive features of two consistency theories
c. Types of attitude processing
d. Cognitive analyses of attitudes within social contexts
e. Attitude change and the self
f. Summary
9. Stereotyping: A Central Topic in Social Cognition
a. Introduction
b. Blatant stereotypes
c. Subtle stereotypes
d. Effects of bias
e. Summary
10. Prejudice: Interplay of Cogntive and Affective Biases (in
progress)
a. Introduction
b. Intergroup emotions
c. Special case of Race & Ethnicity
d. Prejudice: Special case of Gender
e. Special case of Age
f. Special case of heterosexism
g. Summary
11. Mood & Emotions (in progress)
a. Differentiating among affects, preferences, evaluations, moods
b. Early theories
c. Physiological theories of emotion
d. Social foundations of affect
e. Affective influences on cognition
f. Affect versus cognition
g. Summary
12. Behavior and cognition
a. Self regulation revisited
b. How is cognition related to behavior?
c. When are cognitions and behavior related?
d. Using behavior to test hypotheses about others
e. Summary
13. Conclusion
Intimacy
INTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS
5th Edition
Rowland Miller, Sam Houston State University
Daniel Perlman
Sharon Stephens Brehm
ISBN: 9780073370187
www.mhhe.com/millerint5e
Miller’s 5th edition of Intimate Relationships retains all of the qualities
that made the trusted text a best seller, with a new organization that
makes the material accessible to students. The text has engaging,
accessible prose, a comprehensive reach across disciplines, vigorous
standards of scholarship, and a personal appeal in its subject matter.
The new edition is more concise with two newreorganized chapters,
but still packed with new developments and current research woven
into every chapter. The authors illustrate the relevance of relationship
science to readers’ everyday lives, encouraging thought and analysis.
This lively, comprehensive, user-friendly text provides students with
the tools they need to succeed in this course.
CONTENTS
Part 1: Introduction to the Study of Intimate Relationships
Chapter 1: The Building Blocks of Relationships
Chapter 2: Research Methods
Part 2: Getting Together and Basic Processes in Intimate
Relationships
Chapter 3: Attraction
Chapter 4: Social Cognition
Chapter 5: Communication
Chapter 6: Interdependency
Part 3 Friendship and Intimacy
Chapter 7: Friendships
Chapter 8: Love
Part 4 Relationship Issues
Chapter 10: Stresses and Strains
Chapter 11: Conflict
Chapter 12: Power and Violence
Part 5 Losing and Enhancing Relationships
Chapter 13: The Dissolution and Loss of Relationships
Chapter 14: Maintaining and Repairing Relationships
59
Psychology of Women
and Gender
Psychology of Women
and Gender – Reader
NEW
*9780078049941*
WOMEN AND GENDER: A FEMINIST
PSYCHOLOGY
4th Edition
GENDER
5th Edition
Mary Crawford, University of Connecticut—Storrs and Rhoda Unger,
Brandeis University
ISBN: 9780072821079
ISBN: 9780071216616 [IE]
2011 / 416 pages
ISBN: 9780078049941
CONTENTS
Preface
1. Introduction to a Feminist Psychology of Women
2. Images of Women and Men
3. Doing Gender
4. The Meanings of Difference
5. Biology, Sex, and Gender
6. Becoming Gendered: Childhood Acquiring Gender: A Developmental
Perspective
7. Becoming a Woman: Puberty and Adolescence
8. Sex, Love, and Romance
9. Commitments: Women and Close Relationships
10. Mothering
11. Work and Achievement
12. Midlife and Beyond
13. Violence Against Women
14. Mental and Physical Health
15. Making a Difference: Toward a Better Future for Women
NEW
*9780078050527*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
GENDER 10/11
Bobby Hutchison
2010 / 272 pages
ISBN: 9780078050527
CONTENTS
2. Framed before We Know It: How Gender Shapes Social
Relations
60
GENDER
4th Edition
Experiments
9. Gender Bender
Engineering
and Resilience
26. When Sex Hurts
Course Perspective
Theory in Action
32. Peer Marriage
Doing about It
Consequences
43. Fall Girls
Article Rating Form
ISBN: 9780073515298
CONTENTS
Unit 4 From Ozzie and Harriet to My Two Dads: Gender in
Childhood
for Children?
Women’s Lives?
Issue 15. Can Social Policies Improve Gender Inequalities in the
Workplace?
Societal Obstacles?
Unit 6 Gender and Sexuality: Double Standards?
to Teens?
Constraints?
61
Health Psychology
Interpersonal Relations
NEW
*9780073385136*
HEALTH PSYCHOLOGY
7th Edition
INTERPERSONAL CONFLICT
8th Edition
Shelley Taylor, University of California-Los Angeles
2009 / 576 pages
ISBN: 9780073382722
ISBN: 9780071270311 [IE]
William W Wilmot, University of Montana
Joyce L Hocker
2011 / 384 pages
ISBN: 9780073385136
http://www.mhhe.com/taylorhealth7e
http://www.mhhe.com/wilmot8e
The seventh edition of Health Psychology highlights health issues that
face the college student and his or her family through both accessible
research examples and profiles of interventions. It also highlights
health issues relevant to the college student’s immediate and global
environment with both accessible research examples and profiles
of interventions. This edition contains clear descriptions on current
research into the prevention, treatment, and causes (social, genetic,
and biological) of health related disorders.
Psychology of Prejudice
CONTENTS
Part One--Introduction to Health Psychology
Chapter 1 -What Is Health Psychology?
Chapter 2--The Systems of the Body
Part Two--Health Behavior and Primary Prevention
Chapter 3--Health Behaviors
Chapter 4--Specific Health Related Behaviors
Chapter 5--Health-Compromising Behaviors: Alcoholism and
Smoking
Part Three--Stress and Coping
Chapter 6--Stress
Chapter 7--Moderators of the Stress Experience
Part Four--The Patient in the Treatment Setting
Chapter 8--Using Health Services
Chapter 9--Patient-Provider Relations
Chapter 10--The Management of Pain and Discomfort
Part Five--Management of Chronic and Terminal Illness
Chapter 11--Management of Chronic Illness
Chapter 12--Psychological Issues in Advancing and Terminal
Illness
Chapter 13--Heart Disease, Hypertension, Stroke, and Diabetes
Chapter 14--Psychoneuroimmunology, AIDS, Cancer, and Arthritis
Part Six--Toward the Future
Chapter 15--Health Psychology: Challenges for the Future
Glossary
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
MULTICULTURAL PSYCHOLOGY
2nd Edition
Jeffrey Scott Mio, Lori Barker Hackett and Jaydee Tumambing
ISBN: 9780073382715
http://www.mhhe.com/mio2e
In this thoroughly updated revision of Multicultural Psychology, the
authors once again use their own personal stories and experiences
along with those of students as a means of entry to scientific and
professional writing on multicultural psychology. In doing so, they
engage students in the presentation of quantitative and qualitative
research on multicultural issues while capturing the richness of diverse
cultures. The text focuses on compelling topics such as differences in
worldviews and communication; racial/cultural identity development;
issues of racism; immigration; and nonracial populations of diversity,
such as gender, sexuality, age, and ability. The authors integrate
issues specific to populations of diversity throughout the chapters,
as opposed to covering such issues in distinct chapters.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1—Introduction
Chapter 2—Research and Testing
Chapter 3—Cultural Equivalence
Chapter 4—Communication
Chapter 5—Acculturation
Chapter 6—Racism
Chapter 7—Racial Identity Development
Chapter 8—Health
Chapter 9—Mental Health
Chapter 10—Wrapping it All Up
62
Motivation and Emotion
NEW
*9780073375175*
PSYCHOLOGY OF
SUCCESS
5th Edition
Denis Waitley
ISBN: 9780073375175
http://www.mhhe.com/waitley5e
Psychology of Success defines the fundamental psychology principles
of success—principles applicable to everyone regardless of age,
major, background or specialty. Unlike many books, Psychology
of Success doesn’t take a one-size-fits-all approach; rather it asks
students to take an active role in defining what is right for them as
an individual. It calls on students to use self-awareness and critical
thinking to examine their dreams, values, interests, skills, needs,
identities, self-esteem, and relationships and to set and achieve
goals based on their personal vision of success. It introduces key
concepts of psychology and offers creative exercises designed to help
students understand these concepts and apply them to their lives. A
workbook as well as a textbook, Psychology of Success offers simple
yet effective strategies for self-improvement.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v New full-color design and larger, stream-lined layout accommodate
the useful features and application-oriented theme of this text.
v Internet Action boxes and end-of-chapter Internet Activities are
updated to include the latest topics and online materials, which are linked
at the book’s Online Learning Center site at www.mhhe.com/waitley5e.
v Discussions of gender and diversity have been updated to more
appropriately address today’s student.
v Applying Psychology boxes are updated where necessary to
reflect the latest research and thinking.
v Further Readings and references to other materials are updated
to include the latest books on personal psychology and self-help and
reflection.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Psychology and Success.
Chapter 2: Self-Awareness.
Chapter 3: Goals and Obstacles.
Chapter 4: Self-Esteem.
Chapter 5: Positive Thinking.
Chapter 6: Self-Discipline.
Chapter 7: Self-Motivation.
Chapter 8: Managing Your Resources.
Chapter 9: Communication and Relationships.
Further Reading
Glossary
Index
63
64
65
DEVELOPMENT
PSYCHOLOGY
CLINICAL
ENGLISH
Abnormal Psychology .........................................................................................67
Abnormal Psychology – Readers .......................................................................68
Counseling..........................................................................................................69
Developmental Psychopathology .......................................................................72
Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology ...........................................................................69
Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology – Readers ..........................................................70
NEW TITLES
CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY
2011
Author
Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 10/11, 25e
Wilson
9780078050664
70
Drugs in Perspective, 7e
Fields
9780073380759
69
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Drugs and Society, 9e
Goldberg
9780078127564
70
Abnormal Psychology: Clinical Perspectives on Psychological Disorders, 6e
Halgin
9780073370699
67
Wilson
9780078127632
71
ISBN
Page
2010
66
Clinical Psychology
Abnormal Psychology
Chapter 15--Ethical and Legal Issues
Glossary
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
*9780073370699*
NEW
ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY
Clinical Perspectives on
Psychological Disorders
6th Edition
ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY MEDIA AND
RESEARCH UPDATE WITH MINDMAP
4th Edition
Susan Nolen-Hoeksema, Yale University
2008 / Hardcover with CD-ROM
ISBN: 9780077236397
ISBN: 9780071284318 [IE]
Richard P Halgin and Susan Krauss
Whitbourne of University of Mass-Amherst
2010 / 576 pages
ISBN: 9780073370699
ISBN: 9780070165076 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/nolen4
Authored by award-winning teacher and noted researcher Susan
Nolen-Hoeksema, this text blends cutting-edge research in
psychopathology with compassion for people who suffer from
psychological disorders. Capturing the excitement of major advances
in biological and psychosocial research and treatment alternatives,
Abnormal Psychology Media and Research Update imparts a true
enthusiasm for and appreciation of scientific investigation. The
author’s scientific and caring approach, combined with strong study
tools, has won accolades from instructors and students alike. This
Media and Research Update includes Faces Interactive Case
Studies, which link information about disorders covered in the text
to Face Interactive Online, integrating the audio visual resources to
the written text. The text continues to place great emphasis on an
integrated approach to abnormal psychology, on making biological
information clear to students, and on providing a strong focus on
empirical research and diversity.
http://www.mhhe.com/halgin6e
Presenting the Human Experience of Psychological Disorders. In
Richard Halgin and Susan Krauss Whitbourne’s Abnormal Psychology:
Clinical Perspectives on Psychological Disorders, students are shown
the human side of Abnormal Psychology. Through the widespread use
of current and highly relevant clinical case studies, the biographies and
first-person quotations in the Real Stories feature, and the unique case
media program Faces Interactive Online, students are presented with
real-life portrayals of the disorders featured in the text. The new sixth
edition includes updated research coverage and increased pedagogy,
designed to maximize student comprehension. The text maintains the
integrative approach to treatment using the biopsychosocial model,
the lifespan approach, and the succinct coverage that have been the
foundations of the text’s success.
CONTENTS
NEW TO THIS EDITION
1. Looking at Abnormality
2. Contemporary Theories of Abnormality
3. The Research Endeavor
4. Assessing and Diagnosing Abnormality
5. Treatments for Abnormality
6. Stress Disorders and Health Psychology
7. Anxiety Disorders
8. Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders
9. Mood Disorders
10. Suicide
11. Schizophrenia
12. Personality Disorders
13. Childhood Disorders
14. Cognitive Disorders and Life-Span Issues
15. Eating Disorders
16. Sexual Disorders
17. Substance-Related Disorders
18. Mental Health and the Law
Glossary
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
v Increased Pedagogy Review questions covering major concepts
are integrated throughout the chapter. Questions focusing on relevant
diagnostic, treatment, and theoretical issues are incorporated within
each mini-case. Answers to all questions are included in the back of
the chapter, allowing students to test their mastery of the clinical and
scholarly information regarding each major disorder.
v Updated Research and Coverage Each chapter has been
thoroughly updated and revised to include the latest information in
the field.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1--Understanding Abnormality: A Look at History and
Research Methods
Chapter 2--Classification and Treatment Plans
Chapter 3--Assessment
Chapter 4--Theoretical Perspectives
Chapter 5--Anxiety Disorders
Chapter 6--Somatoform Disorders, Psychological Factors Affecting
Medical Conditions, and Dissociative Disorders
Chapter 7--Sexual Disorders
Chapter 8--Mood Disorders
Chapter 9--Schizophrenia and Related Disorders
Chapter 10--Personality Disorders
Chapter 11--Development-Related Disorders
Chapter 12--Aging-Related and Cognitive Disorders
Chapter 13--Substance-Related Disorders
Chapter 14--Eating Disorders and Impulse-Control Disorders
67
Clinical Psychology
Abnormal Psychology –
Readers
ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY WITH MINDMAP
PLUS CD-ROM AND POWERWEB
9th Edition
ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY
5th Edition
Lauren Alloy, Temple University-Philadelphia, John Riskind, George
Mason University and Margaret Manos
ISBN: 9780077265861
ISBN: 9780071270151 [IE]
Richard P Halgin, University of Mass-Amherst
2009 / 512 pages
ISBN: 9780073515267
Website: www.mhhe.com/alloy9
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Abnormal Behavior: Historical Perspectives
Chapter 2 Diagnosis and Assessment
Chapter 3 Research Methods in Abnormal Psychology
Chapter 4 The Behavioral, Cognitive, and Sociocultural
Perspectives
Chapter 5 The Psychodynamic, Humanistic, and Interpersonal
Perspectives
Chapter 6 The Neuroscience Perspective
Chapter 8 Dissociative and Somatoform Disorders
Chapter 9 Psychological Stress and Physical Disorders
Chapter 10 Mood Disorders
Chapter 11 Personality Disorders
Chapter 12 Substance-Use Disorders
Chapter 13 Sexual Dysfunctions, Paraphilias, and Gender Identity
Disorders
Chapter 14 Schizophrenia and Delusional Disorder
Chapter 15 Neuropsychological Disorders
Chapter 16 Disorders of Childhood and Adolescence
Chapter 17 Mental Retardation and Autism
Chapter 18 Legal Issues in Abnormal Psychology
This Fifth Edition of TAKING SIDES: ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY
presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format
designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking
skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an
issue introduction, and a postscript. An online instructor’s resource
guide with testing material is available. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE
CLASSROOM (ISBN 9780073343907) is also an excellent instructor
resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective
approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an
annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported
by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
Unit 1 Psychological Conditions and Treatments
Issue 1. Is Forced Treatment of Seriously Mentally Ill Individuals
Justifiable?
Issue 2. Should Individuals with Anorexia Nervosa Have the Right to
Refuse Life-Sustaining Treatment?
Issue 3. Is Psychological Debriefing a Harmful Intervention for
Survivors of Trauma?
Issue 4. Are Blocked and Recovered Memories Valid Phenomena?
Issue 5. Is Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) a Real
Disorder?
Issue 6. Should MDMA (Ecstasy) Be Prohibited, Even for Therapeutic
Use?
Issue 7. Should Abstinence Be the Goal for Treating People with
Alcohol Problems?
Unit 2 The Trend Toward Biological Interventions
Issue 8. Should Memory-Dampening Drugs Be Used to Alleviate the
Symptoms of Trauma?
Issue 9. Are Antipsychotic Medications the Treatment of Choice for
People with Psychosis?
Issue 10. Is Ritalin Overprescribed?
Issue 11. Should Psychologists Prescribe Medication?
Issue 12. Is Electroconvulsive Therapy Ethical?
Unit 3 Social Issues
Issue 13. Is It Ethical to Support the Wish for Healthy Limb Amputation
in People with Body Integrity Identity Disorder (BIID)?
Issue 14. Is Sexual Orientation Conversion Therapy Ethical?
Issue 15. Does Exposure to Media Violence Promote Aggressive
Behavior?
Issue 16. Would Legalization of Virtual Child Pornography Reduce
Sexual Exploitation of Children?
Issue 17. Does Evolution Explain Why Men Rape?
Issue 18. Should Mental Health Professionals Serve as Gatekeepers
for Physician-Assisted Suicide?
Issue 19. Must Mentally Ill Murderers Have a RationalUnderstanding
of Why They Are Being Sentenced to Death?
68
Clinical Psychology
Counseling
Drugs /
Psycho-pharmacology
*9780073380759*
COUNSELING AND PSYCHOTHERAPY
TODAY
NEW
Carol Shaw Austad, Central Conn State University
ISBN: 9780073112251
ISBN: 9780071101639 [IE]
DRUGS IN PERSPECTIVE
7th Edition
http://mhhe.com/austad1e
Today’s counseling and psychotherapy-related careers require
practitioners to grasp and respond to a continually changing context.
This comprehensive and contemporary introduction to the field
prepares students to engage productively with a variety of theoretical
models, practice settings, and patient problems. The author draws on
her experience as a practicing therapist and professor in presenting
theory, practice, and research in a clear and compelling style. Starting
with the big picture of psychotherapy within its sociocultural context
and fundamental issues, Austad then reviews the major theoretical
models. Students are encouraged to develop a mental model that
helps them to compare and contrast key features of each theory and
to understand the settings in which each best applies.
Richard Fields, Private Counseling Practice
Tuscon AZ and Redmond Washington
ISBN: 9780073380759
ISBN: 9780071267625 [IE]
www.mhhe.com.fields7e
CONTENTS
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Chapter 1: The State of Psychotherapy and Counseling
Chapter 2: Professionalism, Ethics, and Legal Issues in Chapter 3:
Freud’s Classical Psychoanalysis
Chapter 4: Psychodynamic Therapy After Freud
Chapter 5: Adler’s Individual Psychology
Chapter 6: Rogers’s Client-Centered Therapy
Chapter 7: Existential Therapy
Chapter 8: Gestalt Therapy
Chapter 9: Behavior Therapy
Chapter 10: Cognitive Therapy
Chapter 11: Reality Therapy
Chapter 12: Feminist Therapy
Chapter 13: Biopsychosocial Therapy and Health
Chapter 14: Psychopharmacology
Chapter 15: Eclectic and Other Psychotherapies
v Updated and Reorganized: Chapters 1 and 2 have been updated
and reorganized to reflect current information on etiology and trends
in substance abuse and dependence.
v Treatment and Relapse Prevention: Chapter 11 has been
reorganized and updated to help students to understand both recovery
and relapse prevention. This chapter lays a nice foundation for those
who will explore careers in the counseling fields.
v Updated Chapter Pedagogy: This new 6th edition has added
many teaching and learning aids to each chapter including a chapter
in review, chapter learning objectives and discussion questions.
v New Information on Recovery: Chapter 9 (Change & Intervention
for Substance Abuse Problems) has been revised and updated to
focus on the issues of change and motivation and the ways to help
substance abusers to focus on recovery. The chapter outlines ways to
overcome denial and defensive rationalizations, and to avoid enabling
behavior while maintaining healthy boundaries.
CONTENTS
Section I: Understanding Substance Abuse
1 Putting Drugs in Perspective
2 Why Do People Abuse Drugs?
3 Drug-Specific Information
4 Definitions of Substance Abuse, Dependence, and Addiction
Section II: Family
5 Substance Abuse and Family Systems
6 Parenting
7 Growing Up in an Alcoholic Family System
Section III: Prevention, Intervention, and Treatment
8 Prevention of Substance-Abuse Problems
9 Change, Motivation & Intervention for Substance-Abuse
Problems
10 Disorders Co-Occurring with Substance Abuse
11 Alcohol/Drug Treatment and Relapse Prevention
Appendix A: Trends in Annual Prevalence of Use of Various Drugs
for Eight, Tenth, and Twelfth Graders
Appendix B: Alcohol/Drug Screening Inventories
Appendix C: Medication Examples
Appendix D: At-Risk Factors For Substance Abuse
69
Clinical Psychology
Drugs / Psychopharmacology – Readers
DRUGS, SOCIETY, AND HUMAN BEHAVIOR
13th Edition
Carl L Hart, Columbia University
Charles J Ksir, University of Wyoming-Laramie
Oakley S Ray (deceased)
NEW
ISBN: 9780073380797
ISBN: 9780071285599 [IE]
*9780078050664*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS, SOCIETY, AND
BEHAVIOR 10/11
25th Edition
http://www.mhhe.com/hart13e
Designed for the introduction to drugs and substance abuse course
as taught in departments of health education, psychology, biology,
sociology, and criminal justice, this full-color market-leading text
provides the latest information on drugs and their effects on society
and human behavior. For over thirty years, instructors and students
have relied on it to examine drugs and behavior from the behavioral,
pharmacological, historical, social, legal, and clinical perspectives
Hugh T Wilson, California State University-Sacramento
2011 / 224 pages
ISBN: 9780078050664
CONTENTS
Section One: Drug Use in Modern Society
1: Drug Use: An Overview
2: Drug Use as a Social Problem
3: Drug Products and Their Regulation
Section Two: How Drugs Work
4: The Nervous System
5: The Actions of Drugs
Section Three: Uppers and Downers
6: Stimulants
7: Depressants and Inhalants
8: Medication for Mental Disorders
Section Four: Alcohol
9: Alcohol
Section Five: Familiar Drugs
10: Tobacco
11: Caffeine
12: Dietary Supplements and Over-the-Counter Drugs
Section Six: Restricted Drugs
13: Opioids
14: Hallucinogens
15: Marijuana
16: Performance-Enhancing Drugs
Section Seven: Prevention and Treatment
17: Preventing Substance Abuse
18: Treating Substance Abuse and Dependence
Appendix A Drug Names
Appendix B Resources for Information and Assistance
Glossary
NEW
*9780078127564*
DRUGS AND SOCIETY
9th Edition
Raymond Goldberg, State University of NY-Cortland
2010 / 512 pages
ISBN: 9780078127564
70
Clinical Psychology
Unit 4: Other Trends in Drug Use
17. Salvia Divinorum, an Old Psychedelic Drug with New Appeal
18. FATAL Breaths
19. Studies Identify Factors Surrounding Rise in Abuse of Prescription
Drugs by College Students
20. A Nation without Drunk Driving
21. Euro Now Currency Favored by Traffickers
22. Hard Data on Hard Drugs, Grabbed from the Environment
23. A Dose of Reality: States Find Battle against Counterfeit Drug
Market Difficult
24. Teens and Prescription Drugs: An Analysis of Recent Trends on
the Emerging Drug Threat
Unit 5: Measuring the Social Costs of Drugs
25. Crystal’s Sexual Persuasion
26. The Role of Substance Abuse in U.S. Juvenile Justice Systems
and Populations
27. How Do Club Drugs Impact HIV Prevention?
28. The Problem with Drinking
Unit 6: Creating and Sustaining Effective Drug Control Policy
29. Reorienting U.S. Drug Policy
30. America on Drugs
31. The Golden Age
32. Methamphetamine Precursor Regulation: Are We Controlling or
Diverting the Drug Problem?
33. Medical Marijuana, Compassionate Use, and Public Policy: Expert
Opinion or Vox Populi?
34. Durbin, Grassley Introduce Bipartisan Bill to Combat Meth
35. Small Town Drug Enforcement
Unit 7: Prevention, Treatment, and Education
36. Parent Power
37. Exercise and Drug Detoxification
38. Mental Illness among Juvenile Offenders—Identification and
Treatment
39. What Parents Need to Know about Pot
41. No Longer Theory: Correctional Practices That Work
Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078127632*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
DRUGS, SOCIETY, AND
BEHAVIOR 09/10
24th Edition
Hugh T Wilson, CA State University
Sacramento
ISBN: 9780078127632
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Drugs_Society_
and_Behavior_0910.pdf
Drugs, Society, and Behavior 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in
one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Health textbooks by Hart et al.
CONTENTS
Unit 1: Living with Drugs
1. History of Alcohol and Drinking around the World
2. Under the Weather at J&J
3. The Myth of ADHD and the Scandal of Ritalin: Helping John
Dewey Students Succeed in Medicine-Free College Preparatory and
Therapeutic High School
4. Smoking, Drugs, Obesity Top Health Concerns for Kids
5. Did Prohibition Really Work?
6. Pass the Weed
7. Crystal Meth Boom Adds to South Africa’s Health Challenges
8. Living the High Life: The Role of Drug Taking in Young People’s
Lives
Unit 2: Understanding How Drugs Work–Use, Dependency, and
Addiction
9. Reducing the Risk of Addiction to Prescribed Medications
10. Alcohol and Frontal Lobe Impairment: Fascinating Findings
11. Neuropeptide Promotes Drug-Seeking and Craving in Rats
12. Stress and Drug Abuse
Unit 3: The Major Drugs of Use and Abuse
13. Helping Students Stay Clean and Sober
14. An Update on the Effects of Marijuana and Its Potential Medical
Use: Forensic Focus
15. Prescription for Danger
16. A Pipeline for Cocaine
71
Clinical Psychology
Developmental
Psychopathology
CHILD PSYCHOPATHOLOGY
Jeffrey Haugaard, Cornell University--Ithaca
2008 / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780073405506
ISBN: 9780071263542 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/haugaard1
All students who will one day work with children or their families can
gain a basic foundation for understanding child psychopathology
from this text. Students who seek careers in the mental health,
physical health, or social work fields will find extensive information
on childhood disorders, their prevention, and their treatment. All will
gain an appreciation for the many facets of this growing field, and of
the need to base interventions on research and on a humane attitude
toward each child and family.
CONTENTS
Chapter 2 Research Methods and Ethical Issues
Chapter 3 Basic Psychological Theories
Chapter 4 Quantitative Behavioral Genetics
Chapter 5 Classification, Diagnosis, and Assessment Disorders
Chapter 6 Conduct Disorder and Oppositional Defiant Disorder
Chapter 7 Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder
Chapter 8 Bipolar Disorder
Chapter 9 Depressive Disorders
Chapter 11 Mental Retardation
Chapter 12 Autism and Other Pervasive Developmental Disorders
Chapter 13 Childhood-onset Schizophrenia
Chapter 14 Disorders Related to Child Maltreatment and Other
Trauma (Posttraumatic Stress Disorder, Dissociative Disorders,
Reactive Attachment Disorder)
Chapter 15 Disorders Related to Physical Health and Functioning
(Somatoform Disorders, Childhood Obesity, Elimination Disorders)
72
73
DEVELOPMENT
EXPERIMENTAL
ENGLISH PSYCHOLOGY
Cognitive Psychology .........................................................................................79
Perception ..........................................................................................................79
Physiological Psychology / Psychobiology .........................................................80
Research Methods .............................................................................................75
SPSS/SAS ..........................................................................................................77
Tests and Measurements ...................................................................................78
NEW TITLES
EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY
2011
Author
Research Design and Methods: A Process Approach, 8e
Bordens
9780073532028
75
Cohen
9780073129099
78
ISBN
Page
2010
Pscyhological Testing and Assessment, 7e
74
Experimental Psychology
Research Methods
RESEARCH METHODS IN PSYCHOLOGY
8th Edition
NEW
John Shaughnessy, Hope College
Eugene B Zechmeister and Jeanne S Zechmeister of Loyola UniversityChicago
2009 / Hardcover / 576 Pages
ISBN: 9780073382692
ISBN: 9780071310970 [IE]
*9780073532028*
RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS
A Process Approach, 8th Edition
Kenneth S Bordens and Bruce Barrington Abbott of Indiana University
2011 / 608 pages
ISBN: 9780073532028
http://www.mhhe.com/shaughnessy8e
Research Methods in Psychology provides a comprehensive and
readable introduction to methods for undergraduates. Employing
a multi-method approach and exposing students to real examples
of published research throughout the text, the authors provide
students with the tools necessary to do good and ethical research
in psychology and to understand the research they learn about in
psychology courses and in the media. A wealth of pedagogical aids
serve to break down the aversion and phobia that many students
bring to a methods course. The 8th edition boasts a wealth of new
examples with nearly 50 of the research examples from 2004-2007
and more than half of those from 2006 and 2007. So, as students
read this methods text, they will also be learning about “cutting-edge”
research in psychology.
METHODS IN BEHAVIORAL RESEARCH
10th Edition
CONTENTS
Paul C Cozby, California State University-Fullerton
ISBN: 9780073370224
ISBN: 9780071281027 [IE]
Part I General Issues
1 Introduction
2 The Scientific Method
3 Ethical Issues in the Conduct of Psychological Research
Part II Descriptive Methods
4 Observation
5 Survey Research
6 Unobtrusive Measures of Behavior
Part III Experimental Methods
7 Independent Groups Designs
8 Repeated Measures Designs
9 Complex Designs
Part IV Applied Research
10 Single-Case Designs, and Small-n Research
11 Quasi-Experimental Designs and Program Evaluation
Part V Analyzing and Reporting Research
12 Data Analysis and Interpretation: Part I. Describing Data, Confidence Intervals, Correlation
13 Data Analysis and Interpretation: Part II. Tests of Statistical
Significance and the Analysis Story
14 Communication in Psychology
Appendix: Statistical Tables
http://www.mhhe.com/cozby10e
Methods in Behavioral Research has achieved its market-leading
position with its concise and strategic approach to methodological
decision making. Combining helpful pedagogy and rich examples,
Cozby’s tenth edition again incorporates learning objectives,
illustrative graphics, and activities to increase student involvement.
Highlights of the new edition include a broader introduction of different
research techniques in Chapter 4, extensive revision of the “validity of
measurements” section, and updated structural equations models.
CONTENTS
1. Scientific Understanding of Behavior
2. Where to Start
3. Ethical Research
4. Studying Behavior
5. Measurement Concepts
6. Observational Methods
7. Asking People About Themselves: Survey Research
8. Experimental Design
9. Conducting Experiments
10. Complex Experimental Designs
11. Quasi-Experimental and Single-Participant Designs
12. Understanding Research Results: Description and Correlation
13. Understanding Research Results: Statistical Inference
14. Generalizing Results
Appendix A: Writing Research Reports
Appendix B: Statistical Tests
Appendix C: Statistical Tables
Appendix D: Constructing a Latin Square
Glossary
References
Index
75
RESEARCH METHODS IN PSYCHOLOGY:
IDEAS, TECHNIQUES AND REPORTS
RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS: A
PROCESS APPROACH
7th Edition
Chris Spatz, Hendrix College
Edward P Kardas, Southern Arkansas University
2008 / 512 pages
ISBN: 9780072530742
ISBN: 9780071116640 [IE]
Kenneth Bordens and Bruce Barrington Abbott of Indiana University
2008 / 608 pages
ISBN: 9780073129068
ISBN: 9780071266369 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/spatz
www.mhhe.com/bordens7
Emphasizing critical thinking and ethics, Spatz & Kardas’ Research
Methods in Psychology presents a practical approach to investigating
behavioral and mental processes. By understanding context, students
are led to apply appropriate methods, collect data, and arrive at valid
conclusions about subjects that relate to the world around them.
Intended for a first undergraduate course, Research Methods in
Psychology incorporates student-friendly features such as Chapter
Reviews and Critical Thinking exercises, while providing all the
background and tools necessary for students to conduct and report
on their own research.
RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS: A PROCESS APPROACH,
Seventh Edition, offers students an in-depth introduction to the
process of research design and methods. It is distinguished by its
application of the process approach, a proven strategy for guiding
students at each step in designing, conducting, and evaluating
psychological research.
CONTENTS
Preface
Part I
1: Explaining Behavior
2: Developing and Evaluating Theories of Behavior
3: Getting and Developing Research Ideas
4: Choosing a Research Design
5: Making Systematic Observations
6: Choosing and Using Participants and Subjects
7: Understanding Ethical Issues in the Research Process
Part II
8: Using Nonexperimental Research
9: Using Survey Research
10: Using Between-Subjects and Within-Subjects Experimental
Designs
11: Using Specialized Research Designs
12: Using Single-Subject Designs
13: Describing Data
14: Using Inferential Statistics
15: Using Multivariate Design and Analysis
16: Reporting Your Research Results
Appendix: Statistical Tables
Glossary
References
Text Credits
Index
CONTENTS
Preface
Chapter 1 Science
Chapter 2 Research in Psychology
Chapter 3 Ethics
Chapter 4 Measurement
Chapter 5 Data Exploration and Description
Chapter 6 Statistical Tests
Chapter 7 Design I: Between-Subjects Designs
Chapter 8 Design II: Within-Subjects Designs and Pretests
Chapter 9 Complex Designs
Chapter 10 Observational, Qualitative, and Small-N Research
Chapter 11 Planning Research
Chapter 12 Conducting and Reporting Research
APPENDIXES
Appendix A Annotated APA manuscript
Appendix B Ethical Standards of the APA
Appendix C Statistical tables
Appendix D Glossary of Terms
References
Index
76
SPSS/SAS
PRINCIPLES OF RESEARCH IN
BEHAVIORAL SCIENCE
2nd Edition
Bernard E. Whitley, Jr., Ball State University
2002 / Hardcover / 544pages
ISBN: 9780072932331 (with Internet Guide) - Out of Print
ISBN: 9780071131353 [IE]
READY, SET, GO! A STUDENT GUIDE TO
SPSS® 13.0 AND 14.0 FOR WINDOWS®
2nd Edition
Website: www.mhhe.com/whitley2
Thomas Pavkov and Kent Pierce of Purdue Univ-calumet-hammond
ISBN: 9780073126654
ISBN: 9780071252973 [IE without CD]
CONTENTS
1. The Science of Psychology: Theory, Research, and Application
2. Research Strategies: An Overview
3. The Ethical Treatment of Research Participants
4. Formulating a Research Question
5. Developing a Measurement Strategy
6. The Internal Validity of Research
7. The Experimental Research Strategy
8. The Correlational (Passive) Research Strategy
9. The Single-Case Research Strategy
10. Research in Natural Settings
11. Survey Research
12. Data Collection
13. Interpreting Research Results
14. The External Validity of Research
15. Evaluation Research
16. Integrative Literature Reviewing
17. Writing Research Reports
18. The Professional and Social Responsibilities of Scientists
CONTENTS
Preface
Assignment 1 Learning the Basics of SPSS
Assignment 2 Looking at Frequency Distributions and Descriptive
Statistics
Assignment 3 Presenting Data in Graphic Form
Assignment 4 Testing Research Hypotheses for Two Independent
Samples
Assignment 5 Testing Research Hypotheses About Two Related
Sampled
Assignment 6 Comparing Independent Samples with One-Way
ANOVA
Assignment 7 Comparing Related Samples with One-Way ANOVA
Assignment 8 Measuring the Simple Relationship Between Two
Variables
Assignment 9 Describing the Linear Relationship Between Two
Variables
Assignment 10 Assessing the Association Between Two Categorical
Variables Appendix
Entering Data Using Programs Other Than SPSS
77
Tests and Measurements
Test Construction
Test Tryout
Item Analysis
Test Revision
Part III The Assessment Of Intelligence
Chapter 9 Intelligence And Its Measurement
What Is Intelligence?
Measuring Intelligence
Intelligence: Some Issues
Chapter 10 Tests Of Intelligence
The Stanford-Binet Intelligence Scales
The Wechsler Tests
Other Measures Of Intelligence
Chapter 11 Preschool And Educational Assessment
Preschool Assessment
Achievement Tests
Aptitude Tests
Diagnostic Tests
Psychoeducational Test Batteries
Other Tools Of Assessment In Educational Settings
Part IV: The Assessment Of Personality
Chapter 12 Personality Assessment: An Overview
Personality And Personality Assessment Defined
Personality Assessment: Some Basic Questions
Developing Instruments To Assess Personality
Personality Assessment And Culture
Chapter 13 Personality Assessment Methods
Objective Methods
Projective Methods
A Perspective
Part V Testing And Assessment In Action
Chapter 14 Clinical And Counseling Assessment
An Overview
Culturally Informed Psychological Assessment
Special Applications Of Clinical Measures
The Psychological Report
Chapter 15 NeuropsychoLogical Assessment
The Nervous System And Behavior
The Neuropsychological Examination
Neuropsychological Test Batteries
Other Tools Of Neuropsychological Assessment
Chapter 16 Assessment, Careers, And Business
Career Choice And Career Transition
Screening, Selection, Classification, And Placement
Productivity, Motivation, Attitude, And Organizational Culture
Other Applications Of Tools Of Assessment
Self-Assessment
References R-1
Credits C-1
Name Index N-1
Glossary/Index I-1
*9780073129099*
NEW
PSCYHOLOGICAL TESTING
AND ASSESSMENT
7th Edition
Ronald Jay Cohen, RJ Cohen Research
Mark Swerdlik, Illinois State University
2010 / 720 pages
ISBN: 9780073129099
ISBN: 9780071272230 [IE]
Psychological Testing and Assessment: An Introduction to Tests
and Measurement is the standard-setting text that through seven
editions has overviewed measurement in psychology with unrivaled
depth, breadth, and clarity. Logically organized and lucidly written,
this book acquaints readers with important historical, legal, ethical,
and cultural issues, and then proceeds to provide readers with the
information necessary to understand psychometric concepts such as
reliability, validity, and utility. Through writing that effectively anchors
abstract concepts to real-life applications--and through the use of
innovative teaching tools such as “Just Think” questions and the
“Everyday Psychometrics” features in the text--readers will come
away with a well-rounded, working knowledge of psychometrics and
the assessment enterprise in a contemporary, real world context.
CONTENTS
Part I : An Overview
Chapter 1: Psychological Testing And Assessment
Chapter 2 Historical, Cultural, And Legal/Ethical Considerations
Part II The Science Of Psychological Measurement
Chapter 3 A Statistics Refresher
Scales Of Measurement
Describing Data
The Normal Curve
Standard Scores
Chapter 4 Of Tests And Testing
Some Assumptions About Psychological Testing And Assessment
What’s A “Good Test”?
Norms
Correlation And Inference
Inference From Measurement
Chapter 5 Reliability
The Concept Of RelIability
Reliability Estimates
Using And Interpreting A Coefficient Of Reliability
Reliability And Individual Scores
Chapter 6 Validity
The Concept Of Validity
Criterion-Related Validity
Construct Validity
Validity, Bias, And Fairness
Chapter 7 Utility
What Is Utility?
Utility Analysis
Methods For Settings Cut Scores
Chapter 8 Test Development
Test Conceptualization
78
Cognitive Psychology
Perception
FUNDAMENTALS OF COGNITIVE
PSYCHOLOGY
7th Edition
PERCEPTION
5th Edition
Randolph Blake, Vanderbilt University — Nashville and Robert Sekuler,
Brandeis University
ISBN: 9780072887600
ISBN: 9780071112727 [IE]
R. Reed Hunt, University of North Carolina - Greensboro and Henry C.
Ellis, University of New Mexico-Albuquerque
ISBN: 9780072858952
ISBN: 9780071219167 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/blake5
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Chapter 2: Perceptual Processes
Chapter 3: Attention
Chapter 4: Short-term Working Memory
Chapter 5: Long-term Memory
Chapter 6: Implicit Memory
Chapter 7: Forgetting and Distorted Memory
Chapter 8: Metacognition
Chapter 9: Concepts and Classification
Chapter 10: Comprehension and Knowledge
Chapter 11: Language
Chapter 12: Problem-solving and Decision Making
Chapter 13: Cognition and Emotion
1: Introduction to Perception
2: The Human Eye
3: The Eye and Seeing
4: Central Visual Pathways
5: Spatial Vision and Pattern Perception
6: Object Perception: Recognizing the Things We See
7: Color Perception
8: Seeing a Three-Dimensional World
9: Action and the Perception of Events
10: The Ear and Auditory System
11: Hearing and Listening
12: Speech and Music Perception
13: Touch
14: Chemical Senses I: Smell
15: Chemical Senses II: Taste
79
Physiological Psychology
/ Psychobiology
New! 26. Jet Lag
Unit 9. Emotions
New! 27. Beyond a Joke
New! 28. Relation Between Cardiac Vagal Tone and Performance in
Male Military Personnel Exposed to High Stress
New! 29. A Dynamic Model of Guilt
New! 30. Is Automatic Emotion Regulation Associated with
Agreeableness?
New! 31. Buzzwords
Unit 10. Learning and Memory
New! 32. Neuronal Competition and Selection During Memory
Formation
New! 33. The Memory Code
New! 34. Genetics, Dementia, and the Elderly
New! 35. The Secret to Not Losing Your Marbles
Unit 11. Disorders of Behavior and the Nervous System
New! 36. Autistic Brains Out of Synch?
New! 37. Changes in Anterior Cingulate and Amygdala After Cognitive
Behavior Therapy of Posttraumatic Stress Disorder
New! 38. Eyes Open, Brain Shut
New! 39. Dissecting Dyslexia
Unit 12. Evolutionary Perspective
New! 40. Brain Evolution Studies Go Micro
New! 41. Planet of the ... Dogs?
New! 42. Ten Politically Incorrect Truths About Human Nature
New! 43. A Case for Angry Men and Happy Women
Unit 13. Ethical Issues
New! 44. Brain Scans Raise Privacy Concerns
New! 45. The Promise and Predicament of Cosmetic Neurology
New! 46. Wanting Babies Like Themselves
ANNUAL EDITIONS: BIOLOGICAL
PSYCHOLOGY 08/09
6th Edition
Boyce M Jubilan, Desales University
Dawn Albertson, Minnesota State University-Mankato
ISBN: 9780073397788
This Sixth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: BIOPSYCHOLOGY 08/09
provides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selected
from the best of the public press. Organizational features include: an
annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated table
of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews for
each section; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide with
testing materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM
is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles
are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
Unit 1. Methods in Biological Psychology
New! 1. Thinking It Over
New! 2. Really New Advances
New! 3. Neuron Control
New! 4. A Great Attraction
Unit 2. The Cells and Regions of the Brain
New! 5. The Dark Side of Glia
New! 6. Mirror Neurons: How We Reflect on Behavior
New! 7. Neural Correlates of a Mystical Experience in Carmelite
Nuns
New! 8. Damage to Specific Part of the Brain May Make Smokers
‘Forget’ to Smoke
Unit 3. Neural Development and Plasticity
New! 9. New Neurons Strive to Fit In
10. A Learning Machine
New! 11. Uneven Regional Brain Development Contributes to
Adolescent Risk-Taking
Unit 4. Genetic Influences on Behavior
New! 12. Nature, Nurture, Nuance
New! 13. Gene Variant Increases Risk for Alcoholism Following
Childhood Abuse
Unit 5. Sensation and Perception
New! 14. Psychophysics of Sweet and Fat Perception in Obesity
New! 15. Cortical Activation to Indoor Versus Outdoor Scenes
New! 16. Olfactory Neurons Expressing Transient Receptor Potential
Channel M5 (TRPM5) Are Involved in Sensing Semiochemicals
New! 17. Culture and the Physical Environment
Unit 6. Motivation: Eating and Aggression
New! 18. Metabolic and Hormonal Control of the Desire for Food
and Sex
New! 19. Modulation of Appetite by Gonadal Steroid Hormones
New! 20. Influence of Aggressive Computer Games on the Brain
Cortex Activity Level in Adolescents
Unit 7. Reproductive or Sexual Behavior
New! 21. Mammalian Animal Models of Psychosexual
Differentiation
New! 22. Ovulatory Shifts in Human Female Ornamentation
New! 23. Interaction of Fraternal Birth Order and
Handedness in the Development of Male Homosexuality
Unit 8. Sleep and Biological Rhythms
New! 24. Promoting Adjustment of the Sleep—Wake Cycle by
Chronobiotics
New! 25. Sleep and Immunity
80
81
DEVELOPMENT
PSYCHOLOGY
APPLIED
ENGLISH
Industrial Psychology – Organizational Behavior ...............................................83
Sports Psychology ..............................................................................................83
NEW TITLES
APPLIED PSYCHOLOGY
2010
Author
Applied Sport Psychology: Personal Growth to Peak Performance, 6e
Williams
82
ISBN
9780073376530
Page
83
Applied Psychology
Industrial Psychology –
Organizational Behavior
Sports Psychology
*9780073376530*
NEW
HUMAN FACTORS IN ENGINEERING AND
DESIGN
7th Edition
Mark S. Sanders, California State University - Northridge and Ernest J.
McCormick
ISBN: 9780070549012
ISBN: 9780071128261 [IE]
APPLIED SPORT
PSYCHOLOGY:
PERSONAL GROWTH TO
PEAK PERFORMANCE
6th Edition
CONTENTS
Jean M Williams, University of Arizona
ISBN: 9780073376530
ISBN: 9780071267984 [IE]
1 Human Factors and Systems / 2 Human Factors Research
Methodologies /
Part II: Information Input
3 Information Input and Processing / 4 Text, Graphics, Symbols, and
Codes / 5 Visual Displays of Dynamic Information / 6 Auditory, Tactual,
and Olfactory Displays / 7 Speech Communications /
Part III: Human Output and Control
8 Physical Work and Manual Materials Handling / 9 Motor Skills / 10
Human Control of Systems / 11 Controls and Data Entry Devices /
12 Hand Tools and Devices /
Part IV: Workplace Design
13 Applied Anthropometry, Work Space Design, and Seating /
14 Arrangement of Components within a Physical Space / 15
Interpersonal Aspects of Work Place Design /
Part V: Environmental Conditions
16 Illumination / 17 Climate / 18 Noise / 19 Motion /
Part VI: Human Factors Applications
20 Human Error, Accidents, and Safety / 21 Human Factors and the
Automobile / 22 Human Factors in Systems Design /
Appendixes / A: List of Abbreviations / B: Control Devices / C: NIOSH
Recommended Action Limit Formula for Lifting Tasks
http://www.mhhe.com/williams6e
Drawing upon the expertise of more than twenty leaders of their fields,
this is a comprehensive and practical guide to psychological concepts
and theories as well as to strategies and techniques designed to help
future coaches and sport psychologists cultivate peak performance
and personal growth through recent advances in sport psychology.
The text’s four-part organization focuses on motivation and leadership,
social interactions, mental training, program implementation, and
issues that go beyond performance enhancement. Contributing
authors are experts in their topic, and each chapter has been written
specifically for this collection.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v Updated content throughout reflects the latest research,
examples, and cutting-edge practice in applied sport psychology.
v New exercises and case studies help students to think critically
and to apply the content to diverse real-world situations.
v New chapter on gender and cultural diversity reflects the growing
importance of cultural competence to sport psychology researchers
and practitioners.
v Selected revisions improve clarity and succinctness, including
the combination of the two leadership and the two concentration
chapters.
CONTENTS
1. Sport Psychology: Past, Present, Future
Part 1: Learning, Motivation, and Social Interaction
2. Motor Skill Learning for Effective Coaching and Performance
3. A Positive Approach to Coaching Effectiveness and Performance
Enhancement
4. Motivational Processes and the Facilitation of Quality Engagement
in Sport
5. The Self-Fulfilling Prophecy Theory: When Coaches’ Expectations
Become Reality
6. Leadership Effectiveness and Decision Making in Coaches
7. The Sport Team as an Effective Group
8. Communicating Effectively
Part 2: Mental Training for Performance Enhancement
9. Psychological Characteristics of Peak Performance
10. Increasing Awareness for Sport Performance
11. Goal Setting for Peak Performance
12. Arousal-Performance Relationships
83
Applied Psychology
13. Relaxation and Energizing Techniques for Regulation of
Arousal
14. Seeing Is Believing: Understanding and Using Imagery in Sport
15. Cognitive Techniques for Building Confidence and Enhancing
Performance
16. Concentration and Strategies for Controlling It
Part 3: Implementing Training Programs
17. Integrating and Implementing a Psychological Skills Training
Program
18. Conducting Psychologically Oriented Coach-Training Programs:
A Social-Cognitive Approach
19. Gender and Cultural Considerations
Part 4: Enhancing Health and Well-Being
20. When to Refer Athletes for Counseling or Psychotherapy
21. Drug Abuse in Sport: Causes and Cures
22. Burnout in Sport: Understanding the Process—From Early
Warning Signs to Individualized Intervention
23. Injury Risk and Rehabilitation: Psychological Considerations
24. Career Transition among Athletes: Is There Life after Sports?
25. Exercise Psychology
SPORT PSYCHOLOGY
6th Edition
Richard H. Cox, University of Missouri-Columbia
ISBN: 9780072972955
ISBN: 9780071106429 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cox6e
CONTENTS
Part 1: Introduction
1 Introduction to Sport Psychology
Part 2: Motivation of the Athlete
2 Motivation and Self-confidence in Sport
3 Goal Perpective in Sport
4 Attribution in Sport
5 Developing Intrinsic Motivation
6 Goal Setting in Sport
7 Youth Sports
Part 3: Arousal, Attention and Personality of the Athlete
8 Neurophysiology of Arousal
9 Attention and Concentration in Sport
10 Personality of the Athlete
Part 4: Situational Factors Related to Anxiety and Mood
11 Mood State and Athletic Performance
12 Anxiety, Arousal and Stress Relationships
13 Alternatives to Inverted-U Theory
Part 5: Cognitive and Behavioral Interventions
14 Coping Strategies in Sport
15 Relaxation Strategies in Sport
16 Arousal Energizing Strategies in Sport
17 Imagery and Sport Performance
18 Role of Hypnosis in Sport
19 Psychological Skills Training
Part 6: Social Psychology of Sport and Exercise
20 Agression and Violence in Sport
21 Audience and Crowd Effects in Sport
22 Team Cohesion in Sport
23 Leadership in Sport
Part 7: Psychobiology of Sport and Exercise
24 Exercise Psychology
25 Overtraining and Burnout
26 Psychology of Athletic Injuries
27 Drug Abuse in Sport and Exercise
84
85
DEVELOPMENT
PSYCHOLOGY
ENGLISHHISTORY & SYSTEMS
History and Systems...........................................................................................86
Psychology History & Systems
History and Systems
HISTORY OF PSYCHOLOGY
4th Edition
David Hothersall, Ohio State University
ISBN: 9780072849653
ISBN: 9780071214742 [IE]
A CONCEPTUAL HISTORY OF PSYCHOLOGY
Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/00728496 57/
John D Greenwood
ISBN: 9780072858624
ISBN: 9780071263535 [IE]
CONTENTS
Introduction
Chapter 1 Psychology and the Ancients
Chapter 2 Philosophical and Scientific Antecedents of Psychology
Chapter 3 Early Studies of the Central Nervous System
Chapter 4 Wilhelm Wundt and the Founding of Psychology
Chapter 5 Edward Titchener and Hugo Munsterberg
Chapter 6 German Psychologists of the Nineteenth and Early
Twentieth Centuries
Chapter 7 Gestalt Psychology in Germany and the United States
Chapter 8 The History of Clinical Psychology and the Development
of Psychoanalysis
Chapter 9 Darwin, Galton, Cattell, James, and Hall
Chapter 10 Functionalism at the University of Chicago and Columbia
University
Chapter 11 Historical Uses and Abuses of Intelligence Testing
Chapter 12 The Research of Ivan Pavlov and the Behaviorism of
John B. Watson
Epilogue
http://www.mhhe.com/greenwood1e
A Conceptual History of Psychology is a broad historical survey
that traces conceptual continuities and discontinuities in the history
of psychological thought. The author connects the history of
psychological theory with the development of the history of science,
from the proto-scientific psychology of the 17th and 18th centuries to
the institutionalized scientific psychology of the late 19th century to
the present day. The lucid writing style and clear organization reflect
the author’s fifteen years’ experience teaching the course.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: History, Science and Psychology
Chapter 2: Ancient Greek Science and Psychology
Chapter 3: Rome and the Medieval Period
The Roman Age
Chapter 4: The Scientific Revolution
Chapter 5: The Newtonian Psychologists
Chapter 6: Physiology and Psychology
Positivism
Chapter 7: Theories of Evolution
Chapter 8: Psychology in Germany
Chapter 9: Psychology in America: The Early Years
Chapter 10: Functionalism, Behaviorism and Mental Testing
Chapter 11: Neobehaviorism, Radical Behaviorism, and the Problems
of Behaviorism
Chapter 12: The Cognitive Revolution
Chapter 13: Abnormal and Clinical Psychology
Neuroses, Alienists and Psychiatry
Chapter 14: Social and Developmental Psychology
86
87
DEVELOPMENT
SEXUALITY
HUMAN
ENGLISH
Human Sexuality ................................................................................................89
Human Sexuality – Readers ...............................................................................90
NEW TITLES
HUMAN SEXUALITY
2010
Author
ISBN
Hutchison
9780078050527
90
Annual Editions: Human Sexuality, 31e
Hutchison
9780073516349
91
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Human Sexuality, 11e
Taverner
9780073545639
92
88
Page
Human Sexuality
Human Sexuality
DIMENSIONS OF HUMAN SEXUALITY
6th Edition
INTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS
5th Edition
Curtis O. Byer, Mt. San Antonio College, Louis W. Shainberg, Mt. San Antonio
College, Grace Galliano, Kennesaw State University and Sharon P. Shriver,
Pennsylvania State University
ISBN: 9780072412789 (Out of Print)
ISBN: 9780071212762 [IE]
Rowland Miller, Sam Houston State University
Daniel Perlman
Sharon Stephens Brehm
ISBN: 9780073370187
Website: www.mhhe.com/byer6
www.mhhe.com/millerint5e
CONTENTS
Miller’s 5th edition of Intimate Relationships retains all of the qualities
that made the trusted text a best seller, with a new organization that
makes the material accessible to students. The text has engaging,
accessible prose, a comprehensive reach across disciplines, vigorous
standards of scholarship, and a personal appeal in its subject matter.
The new edition is more concise with two newreorganized chapters,
but still packed with new developments and current research woven
into every chapter. The authors illustrate the relevance of relationship
science to readers’ everyday lives, encouraging thought and analysis.
This lively, comprehensive, user-friendly text provides students with
the tools they need to succeed in this course.
Part 1: Sexual Dimensions
1: Thinking About Human Sexuality
2: Communication and Sexuality
3: Attraction, Love, Partnerships
Part 2: Physical Sexuality
4: Female Anatomy, Physiology and Sexual Health
5: Male Anatomy, Physiology and Sexual Health
6: Sexually Transmitted Infections
7: HIV and AIDS
Part 3: Sexual Response And Pleasuring
8: Sexual Response, Dyfunction and Therapy
9: Sexual Pleasuring
10: Sexuality in Disability and Illness
Part 4: Developmental Sexuality
11: Biological Sexual Development
12: Gender Identity and Gender Roles
13: Childhood and Adolescent Sexuality
14: Adult Sexuality
Part 5: Reproductive Sexuality
15: Fertility Management
16: Conception, Pregnancy, and Children
Part 6: Social Issues In Sexuality
17: 7 Variations in Sexual Behavior
18: Commercial and Coercive Sex
CONTENTS
Part 1: Introduction to the Study of Intimate Relationships
Chapter 1: The Building Blocks of Relationships
Chapter 2: Research Methods
Part 2: Getting Together and Basic Processes in Intimate
Relationships
Chapter 3: Attraction
Chapter 4: Social Cognition
Chapter 5: Communication
Chapter 6: Interdependency
Part 3 Friendship and Intimacy
Chapter 7: Friendships
Chapter 8: Love
Part 4 Relationship Issues
Chapter 10: Stresses and Strains
Chapter 11: Conflict
Chapter 12: Power and Violence
Part 5 Losing and Enhancing Relationships
Chapter 13: The Dissolution and Loss of Relationships
Chapter 14: Maintaining and Repairing Relationships
89
Human Sexuality
Human Sexuality –
Readers
and Resilience
26. When Sex Hurts
Course Perspective
Theory in Action
32. Peer Marriage
Doing about It
Consequences
43. Fall Girls
Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078050527*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
GENDER 10/11
Bobby Hutchison
2010 / 272 pages
ISBN: 9780078050527
CONTENTS
Relations
Experiments
9. Gender Bender
Engineering
90
Human Sexuality
18. Torn between Two Mothers
19. Staying up Late with Sue
UNIT 4: Intimacies and Relationships
21. Free as a Bird and Loving It
22. Happily Never Married
24. Pillow Talk
25. Behind the Cloak of Polygamy
26. Love at the Margins: Extreme Relationships Demand Extreme
Commitment
UNIT 5: Gender and Sexual Diversity
Part A. Perspectives on Gender
Part B. Perspectives on Sexual Orientation
32. Finding the Switch
34. Broadcast News: The Insider Is Out
UNIT 6: Sexual Health and Well-Being
Part A. Problems and Interventions
35. Sex, Health & Happiness
36. Fighting the Cancer a Mammo Can’t Catch
37. When Sex Hurts
Part B. Sexually Transmitted Infections and HIV
38. Popping the Other Question
39. Sex, Drugs, Prisons, and HIV
40. HIV Plan B
41. HIV Apathy
UNIT 7: Sexualities and Social Issues
42. Flower Grandma’s Secret,
43. You Can’t Do That on Television
44. Sex, Politics, and Morality at the FDA: Reflections on the Plan B
Decision, Frank Davidoff
45. Guess Who’s Watching Porn
46. Breeder Reaction
47. The Sex Offender Next Door
Doing about It
Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780073516349*
SEXUALITY
31st Edition
Bobby Hutchison, Modesto Jr College
ISBN: 9780073516349
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Human_
Sexualities_31e.pdf
Human Sexualities, 31/e with the corresponding chapters in two of
our best-selling McGraw-Hill Human Sexuality textbooks by Hyde/
DeLamater and Kelly.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1: Social and Cultural Foundations
Unit Overview
1. Vox Populi: Sex, Lies, and Blood Sport
2. The Baby Deficit
3. Three `Rules’ That Don’t Apply
5. A Mind Dismembered: In Search of the Magical Penis Thieves
6. Afterbirths in the Afterlife: Cultural Meaning of Placental Disposal
in a Hmong American Community
8. How AIDS Changed America
UNIT 2: Biological Foundations
Part A. Reproductive Capacities
10. Success at Last
11. A Man’s Shelf Life
Part B. Pleasure and Desire
12. The Orgasmic Mind
13. Women’s Sexual Desire: A Feminist Critique
UNIT 3: Sexualities and Development
14. How to Talk about Sex
15. The Birds and the Bees and Curious Kids
16. What to Tell the Kids about Sex
91
Human Sexuality
Unit 5 Gender and Sexual Orientation
Issue 18. Is Gender Identity Disorder an Appropriate Psychiatric
Diagnosis?
Issue 19. Should Corporations Ensure Equal Rights for Their Lesbian,
Gay, Bisexual, and Transgender Employees?
Issue 20. Should Same Sex-Marriage Be Legal?
NEW
*9780073545639*
TAKING SIDES:
CLASHING VIEWS IN
HUMAN SEXUALITY
11th Edition
GENDER
4th Edition
William J Taverner, Fairleigh
Dickinson University
ISBN: 9780073545639
Jacquelyn W White
2009 / 416 pages
ISBN: 9780073515298
TAKING SIDES: HUMAN SEXUALITY, 11/e presents current
controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate
student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is
thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and
a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is available
for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is
also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions on
incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING
SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide
Web sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls.
com.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Human_
Sexuality_11e.pdf
Human Sexuality, 11/e with the corresponding chapters in one of
our best-selling McGraw-Hill Human Sexuality textbooks by Yarber
et al.
CONTENTS
Unit 1 Definitions And Cultural Boundaries: A Moving Target
Unit 2 Different Strokes: The Question Of Difference
Unit 3 Violence In The Daily Lives Of Women And Men
Unit 4 From Ozzie And Harriet To My Two Dads: Gender In
Childhood
for Children?
Unit 5 From 9 To 5: Gender In The World Of Work
Women’s Lives?
Workplace?
CONTENTS
Unit 1 The Nature of Sex
Issue 1. Has sex become too casual?
Issue 3. Does Sexual Medicine Benefit Society?
Issue 4. Is Oral Sex Really Sex?
Issue 5. Is BDSM a healthy form of sexual expression?
Unit 2 Sex Education
Issue 6. Is there something wrong with the content of comprehensive
sex education curricula?
Issue 7. Should Sex Ed Teach about Abstinence?
Issue 8. Does the Availability of “Sexual Health Services” Make Some
College Campuses Healthier than Others?
Unit 3 Sex and Society
Issue 9. Should Children Have an HPV Vaccination before They
Enroll in School?
Issue 10. Should libraries and other places that provide public wifi
restrict sexual content?
Issue 11. Should the FCC Restrict Broadcast “Indecency”?
Issue 12. Should Prostitution Be Legal?
Issue 13. Should Society Support Cohabitation before Marriage?
Unit 4 Reproductive Choices
Issue 14. Should Pharmacists have the Right to Refuse Contraceptive
Prescriptions?
Issue 15. Is Abortion Immoral?
Issue 16. Should There be Restrictions on the Number of Embryos
Implanted during In-Vitro Fertilization?
Issue 17. Should Parents Be Allowed to Select the Sex of Their
Baby?
92
Human Sexuality
Societal Obstacles?
Unit 6 Gender And Sexuality: Double Standards?
to Teens?
Constraints?
93
Psychology & Sociology
94
95
DEVELOPMENT
SOCIOLOGY
ENGLISH
Comparative Societies......................................................................................156
Criminology.......................................................................................................145
Criminology – Readers .....................................................................................146
Drugs & Society ................................................................................................143
Drugs & Society – Readers ..............................................................................144
Gerontology / Sociology of Aging – Readers ....................................................123
Introductory Sociology ........................................................................................99
Introductory Sociology – Readers ....................................................................104
Marriage & the Family ...................................................................................... 111
Marriage & the Family – Readers .....................................................................113
Medical Sociology – Readers ...........................................................................122
Political Sociology.............................................................................................129
Race and Ethnicity............................................................................................126
Race and Ethnicity – Readers ..........................................................................128
Race, Class, Gender, and Sexuality .................................................................118
Research Methods ...........................................................................................141
Sex Roles .........................................................................................................154
Social Inequality / Social Stratification ..............................................................131
Social Problems................................................................................................108
Social Problems – Readers ..............................................................................108
Social Psychology ............................................................................................139
Social Psychology – Readers ...........................................................................141
Sociological Theory ..........................................................................................133
Sociological Theory – Readers.........................................................................135
Sociology of Death ...........................................................................................124
Sociology of Death – Readers ..........................................................................124
Sociology of Education – Readers ...................................................................147
Sociology of Family ..........................................................................................114
Sociology of Family – Readers .........................................................................116
Sociology of Gender .........................................................................................137
Sociology of Health – Readers .........................................................................149
Sociology of Law – Readers .............................................................................146
Sociology of Sexuality – Readers .....................................................................151
Sociology of Sport ............................................................................................147
Sociology of Women.........................................................................................136
Special Topics...................................................................................................157
Special Topics – Readers .................................................................................158
SPSS / SAS ......................................................................................................142
SOCIOLOGY
Statistics ...........................................................................................................142
Technology & Society .......................................................................................155
Urban Sociology ...............................................................................................125
96
NEW TITLES
SOCIOLOGY
2011
Author
ISBN
Page
Cox
9780078050596
123
Annual Editions: Computers in Society 10/11, 16e
De Palma
9780073528588
155
Readings in Social Theory, 6e
Farganis
9780078111556
135
Annual Editions: Social Problems 10/11, 37e
Finsterbusch
9780078050565
108
Social Problems and the Quality of Life, 12e
Lauer
9780073528281
108
Practical Skeptic: Core Concepts In Sociology, The, 5e
McIntyre
9780073404400
99
Practical Skeptic: Readings in Sociology, The, 5e
McIntyre
9780073404431
99
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Educational Issues, 16e
Noll
9780078049972
147
Classical Sociological Theory, 6e
Ritzer
9780078026652
133
Sociological Theory, 8e
Ritzer
9780078111679
133
White
9780078049941
154
Wilson
9780078050664
144
White
9780078049941
138, 151,
154
2010
Criminology, 7e
Adler
9780073401584
145
Annual Editions: Violence And Terrorism 10/11, 12e
Badey
9780078127618
109
Public and Private Families: A Reader, 6e
Cherlin
9780073404363
111, 115
Public and Private Families: An Introduction, 6e
Cherlin
9780073404356
114
Discovery of Society, 8e, The
Collins
9780073404196
99, 104,
135
Cox
9780078127731
123
Annual Editions: Health 10/11 with Free Taking Sides: Clashing Views in
Daniel
9780077386115
149
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Health And Society, 9e
Daniel
9780078139444
150
Annual Editions: Computers In Society 09/10, 15e
De Palma
9780073528540
155
Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 09/10, 11e
Dickinson
9780078127670
124
Who Rules America? Power, Politics, and Social Change, 6e
Domhoff
9780078111563
129
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Science, Technology And Society, 9e
Easton
9780078139406
156
Annual Editions: Education 10/11, 37e
Evers
9780078135859
147
Mapping the Social Landscape: Readings in Sociology, 6e
Ferguson
9780073528212
100
Fields
9780073380759
143
Health and Society, 9/E, 31e
97
NEW TITLES
SOCIOLOGY (continued)
2010
Author
Annual Editions: Sociology 09/10, 38e
ISBN
Page
Finsterbusch
9780078127724
105
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Social Issues, Expanded, 15e
Finsterbusch
9780078127502
106, 109
Gilbert
9780078135880
113, 116
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Drugs And Society, 9e
Goldberg
9780078127564
144
Annual Editions: Developing World 10/11, 20e
Griffiths
9780078127816
130
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Crime And Criminology, 9e
Hickey
9780078139437
146
Hutchison
9780078050527
121, 138,
151
Hutchison
9780073516349
152
TakIng Sides: Clashing Views On Legal Issues, 14e
Katsh
9780078127595
146
Annual Editions: Race and Ethnic Relations, 17e
Kromkowski
9780078127625
128
Annual Editions: Urban Society, 14e
Levine
9780078127717
125
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Bioethical Issues, 13e
Levine
9780073545660
122
Myers
9780073370668
139
Nier
9780078139413
141
Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Educational Issues, Expanded, 15e
Noll
9780073545653
148
Sociology, 12e
Schaefer
9780073404332
101
Global Sociology: Introducing Five Contemporary Societies, 5e
Schneider
9780073404189
102, 105,
156
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Family and Personal Relationships, 8e
Schroeder
9780073515403
114, 117
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Human Sexuality, 11e
Taverner
9780073545639
153
Wilson
9780078127632
144
Chan
9780071270267
157
2009
Ethics and Social Responsibility: Asian and Western Perspectives (Asian Pub)
98
Sociology
Introductory Sociology
NEW
*9780073404196*
NEW
*9780073404400*
THE DISCOVERY OF
SOCIETY
8th Edition
THE PRACTICAL SKEPTIC: CORE
CONCEPTS IN SOCIOLOGY
5th Edition
Randall Collins, University of Pennsylvania
Michael Makowsky, Musart Company
Lisa J McIntyre, Washington State University-Pullman
2011 / 320 pages
ISBN: 9780073404400
2010 / 288 pages
ISBN: 9780073404196
This classic text explores the lives and ideas of the social thinkers who
have shaped and continue to forge traditions in sociology. Focusing
on the great names in the field, it weaves biographical and conceptual
details into a tapestry of the history of social thought of the 19th and
20th centuries. Written in a narrative style that is accessible and
exciting, this text serves as an excellent supplement for courses in
social and sociological theory, the history of social thought, the history
of sociology, and introduction to sociology.
NEW
*9780073404431*
NEW TO THIS EDITION
THE PRACTICAL SKEPTIC: READINGS IN
SOCIOLOGY
5th Edition
v Added section on Globalism, the Information Revolution, and
Postmodernism examines various sociological perspectives on
contemporary life.
Lisa J McIntyre, Washington State University-Pullman
2011 / 416 pages
ISBN: 9780073404431
CONTENTS
Introduction: Society and Illusion
Chapter 1. The Prophets of Paris: Saint-Simon and Comte
Chapter 2. Sociology in the Underground: Karl Marx
Chapter 3. The Last Gentleman: Alexis de Tocqueville
Chapter 4. Nietzsche’s Madness
Chapter 5. Do-Gooders, Evolutionists and Racists
Chapter 6: Dreyfus’ Empire: Emile Durkheim
Chapter 7: Max Weber: The Disenchantment of the World
Chapter 8: Sigmund Freud: Conquistador of the Irrational
Chapter 9: The Discovery of the Invisible World: Simmel, Cooley
and Mead
Chapter 10. The Discovery of the Ordinary World: Thomas, Park,
and the Chicago School
Chapter 11. The Emergence of African-American Sociology: DuBois,
Frazier, Drake and Cayton
Chapter 12. The Construction of the Social System: Pareto and
Parsons
Chapter 13. Hitler’s Shadow: Mannheim and Mills
Chapter 14. Erving Goffman and the Theatre of Social Encounters
Chapter 15. Cultural Capital, Revolution, the World-system, and
Globalization: the Theories of Pierre Bourdieu, Theda Skocpol, and
Immanuel Wallerstein
Bibliographical Suggestions
Index
99
Sociology
NEW
*9780073528212*
MAPPING THE SOCIAL LANDSCAPE
Readings in Sociology, 6th Edition
Susan J Ferguson, Grinnell College
2010 / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780073528212
www.mhhe.com/ferguson6e
Drawing from a wide selection of classic and contemporary works, the
58 selections in this best-selling reader represent a plurality of voices
and views within sociology. In addition to classic works by authors such
as Karl Marx, Max Weber, C. Wright Mills, David Rosenhan, Kingsley
Davis and Wilbert Moore, this anthology presents a wide range of
contemporary scholarship, some of which provides new treatments
of traditional concepts. By integrating issues of diversity throughout
the book, Ferguson helps students see the inter-relationships of race,
social class, and gender, and the ways in which they have shaped
the experiences of all people in society.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v A dozen new selections of cutting-edge contemporary
sociological research illustrate analyses of timely social issues and
the intersections between race, social class, and gender.
v New selections examine teen suicide, dating culture on college
campuses, drug networks in small towns, masculinity and homophobia
in high schools, drinking and gender identity among college women,
and the U.S. media’s treatment of Muslim Americans.
v Up-to-date and accessible treatment of culture, gender, and social
change demonstrates the diversity within the discipline of sociology.
CONTENTS
* = New to this edition
Preface
I. The Sociological Perspective
1. C. Wright Mills, The Promise--classic piece on the sociological
imagination
*2. Donna Gaines, Teenage Wasteland: Suburbia’s Dead-End Kids-applying the sociological imagination to teen suicide
3. Mary Romero, An Intersection of Biography and History: My Intellectual
Journey--applying the sociological imagination to domestic service
Social Research
4. Michael Schwalbe, Finding Out How the Social World Works--a
summary of what it means to be sociologically mindful
5. Craig Haney, W. Curtis Banks, and Philip G. Zimbardo, Interpersonal
Dynamics in a Simulated Prison--classic piece on the research design
of Zimbardo’s famous experiment
6. Mitchell Duneier, Sidewalk--an ethnographic study of street vendors
in New York City
II. Culture
7. Barry Glassner, The Culture of Fear: Why Americans Fear the
Wrong Things--one perspective of American culture
*8. Paula England and Ruben J. Thomas, The Decline of the Date
and the Rise of the College Hook Up--an investigation into the dating
culture on one college campus
*9. Sabeen Sandhu, Instant Karma: The Commercialization of Asian
Indian Culture--how culture and identity are transformed when
commercialized
10. Haunani-Kay Trask, Lovely Hula Hands: Corporate Tourism
and the Prostitution of Hawaiian Culture--an examination of cultural
commodification and exploitation
III. Socialization
11. Judith Lorber, “Night to His Day”: The Social Construction of
Gender--the socialization of gender identity
*12. Betsy Lucal, What It Means to Be Gendered Me: Life on the
Boundaries of a Dichotomous Gender System--one woman’s narrative
of gender identity and performance
13. Robert Granfield, Making It By Faking It: Working-Class Students
in an Elite Academic Environment--working class identity and law
school socialization
14. Gwynne Dyer, Anybody’s Son Will Do--resocialization into the
total institution of the military
IV. Groups and Social Structure
15. Patricia A. Adler and Peter Adler, Peer Power: Clique Dynamics
among School Children--a study of the structure and interactional
dynamics among groups of school children
16. Martin Sanchez Jankowski, Gang Business--a functional analysis
of a primary group
17. Christine L. Williams, Shopping as Symbolic Interaction: Race,
Class, and Gender in the Toy Store--a study of secondary group
relationships and social interaction
18. Mark Colvin, Descent Into Madness: The New Mexico State Prison
Riot--an example of social structure breaking down
V. Deviance, Crime, and Social Control
19. David L. Rosenhan, On Being Sane in Insane Places--classic
piece on labeling and social deviance
20. Penelope E. McLorg and Diane E. Taub, Anorexia Nervosa
and Bulimia: The Development of Deviant Identities--the social
construction of deviant identities
*21. Paul Draus and Robert G. Carlson, Down on Main Street: Drugs
and the Small-Town Vortex--an ethnographic study of the social
networks of illicit drug use in rural small towns
22. A. Ayres Boswell and Joan Z. Spade, Fraternities and Collegiate
Rape Culture: Why Are Some Fraternities More Dangerous Places
for Women?--the social organization of crime
VI. Social Inequality
Social Class
23. Kingsley Davis, Wilbert E. Moore, and Melvin Tumin, Some
Principles of Stratification--classic piece on the functions of social
stratification
24. G. William Domhoff, Who Rules America?: The Corporate
Community and the Upper Class--the lifestyles and social institutions
of the upper class
25. Thomas M. Shapiro, The Hidden Cost of Being African American:
How Wealth Perpetuates Inequality--an examination of social class
and racial differences in wealth
26. Barbara Ehrenreich, Nickel-and-Dimed on (Not) Getting by in
America--an exploration of the lives of the working poor
Gender
27. Barbara Risman, Gender as Structure--a review of four theories
that explain sex and gender
*28. C.J. Pascoe, ‘Dude, You’re a Fag’: Adolescent Masculinity and
the Fag Discourse--an examination of masculinity and homophobia
in high schools
*29. Amy Young et al., Drinking Like a Guy: Frequent Binge Drinking
Among Undergraduate Women--research on drinking and gender
identity among college women
30. Meika Loe, Working at Bazooms: The Intersection of Power,
Gender, and Sexuality--an investigation of gender and sexuality in
the workplace
Race and Ethnicity
31. Eduardo Bonilla-Silva, “New Racism,” Color-Blind Racism, and
the Future of Whiteness in America--the persistence of whiteness
and racial inequality in America
32. Charlie LeDuff, At a Slaughterhouse, Some Things Never Die--an
examination of the racial dynamics at one workplace site
33. Katherin M. Flower Kim, Out of Sorts: Adoption and (Un)Desirable
Children--how race and racism influence adoption decisions
*34. Elijah Anderson, The Cosmopolitan Canopy--an enthnographic
account of how urban spaces can transform race relations
VII. Social Institutions
Power and Politics
35. C. Wright Mills, The Power Elite--classic piece on the power elite
100
Sociology
36. Dan Clawson, Alan Neustadtl,and Mark Weller, Dollars and Votes:
How Business Campaign Contributions Subvert Democracy--an
application of Mills’ power elite
37. Charles Derber, One World Under Business--the financial
dynamics and politics of globalization
Mass Media
38. Gregory Mantsios, Media Magic: Making Class Invisible--how the
mass media distorts social class
*39. Brigitte L. Nacos and Oscar Torres-Reyna, Muslim Americans
in the News before and after 9/11--the U.S. media’s treatment of
Muslim Americans
40. Karen Sternheimer, It’s Not the Media: The Truth About Pop
Culture’s Influence On Children--an examination of media violence
and its effects on children
The Economy and Work
41. Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels, The Manifesto of the Communist
Party--classic piece on the relationship between the capitalists and
the workers
42. Robin Leidner, Over the Counter: McDonald’s--an ethnographic
study of the routinization of work
43. Arlie Russell Hochschild, The Time Bind: When Work Becomes
Home and Home Becomes Work--how individuals combine their
work and home lives
Religion
44. Max Weber, The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism-classic piece on the influence of religion on the economy
*45. Steven P. Dandaneau, Religion and Society: Of Gods and
Demons--a sociological overview of the institution of religion
46. Russell Shorto, Faith at Work--how some Christians are bringing
faith into the workplace
Health and Medicine
*47. Lillian B. Rubin, Sand Castles and Snake Pits--an examination
of how deinstitutionalization increased the numbers of mentally ill
among the homeless
48. Eric Klinenberg, Dying Alone: The Social Production of Urban
Isolation--the health consequences of the 1995 Chicago heat wave
49. David A. Karp, Illness and Identity--an interview study of people
with depression
Education
50. Mary Crow Dog and Richard Erdoes, Civilize Them With A Stick-education as an institution of social control
51. Jonathan Kozol, Still Separate, Still Unequal: America’s
Educational Apartheid--racial segregation in American schools
52. Ann Arnett Ferguson, Bad Boys: Public Schools in the Making
of Black Masculinity--racial and gender stereotyping in American
schools
The Family
53. Andrew J. Cherlin, The Deinstitutionalization of American
Marriage--an examination of the weakening of social norms in the
institution of marriage
54. Ann Crittendon, The Mommy Tax--the income discrimination faced
by working mothers
55. Annette Lareau, Unequal Childhoods: Class, Race, and Family
Life--a study of social class differences in parenting and child rearing
in African American and white families
VIII. Social Change
*56. Charles L. Harper and Kevin T. Leicht, American Social Trends-an overview of social change in America
57. D. Stanley Eitzen, The Atrophy of Social Life--how social isolation
is affecting society
58. Allan G. Johnson, What Can We Do? Becoming a Part of
the Solution--social change strategies to deal with privilege and
oppression
NEW
*9780073404332*
SOCIOLOGY
12th Edition
Richard T Schaefer, DePaul University
2010 / 640 pages
ISBN: 9780073404332
ISBN: 9780070172371 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/schaefer12e
Sociology provides an up-to-date and comprehensive introduction
to sociology for today’s student. Known for its balanced coverage of
the 3 perspectives, this text continues to encourage students to think
about their world with a sociological imagination. Through its strong
coverage of globalization, race and ethnicity, careers in sociology,
and current topics like mass media and social policy, Sociology
provides students with knowledge they can use on campus, at work,
in their neighborhoods, and in the global community. The new 12th
edition features updated sections in various chapters reflecting recent
sociological changes like the impact of the current economic downturn
on social class and the global culture war. New Research Today boxes
provide students with relevant examples of sociological research.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v Significantly revised chapters on culture (3); stratification (9),
racial and ethnic inequality (11) and health and the environment (19)
including coverage of topics such as the global culture war; college
students’ environmental values; the impact of the current economic
downturn on social class; the growing gap between rich and poor;
and much more
v New “Research Today” boxes focus on sociologically relevant,
student-centered examples of sociological research such as online
socializing as a new agent of socialization; precarious work; cell phone
users; and jury decision making about the drinking rape victim.
v Seven new chapter-opening excerpts convey the relevance of
sociological inquiry through lively passages on sociological topics,
including material from Patricia and Peter Adler; Sudhir Venkatesh;
Paul Collier and Kelsey Timmerman.
v New “Thinking About Movies” feature in each chapter discusses
two movies that are related to the themes of the chapter - Each feature
includes a brief description of each movie followed by application
questions.
CONTENTS
Part 1: The Sociological Perspective
1: Understanding Sociology
2: Sociological Research
Part 2: Organizing Social Life
3: Culture
4: Socialization and the Life Course
5: Social Interaction and Social Structure
6: Groups and Organizations
7: The Mass Media
8: Deviance and Social Control
Part 3: Social Inequality
9: Stratification and Social Mobility in the United States
10: Global Inequality
11: Racial and Ethnic Inequality
12: Stratification by Gender
13: Stratification by Age
Part 4: Social Institutions
14: The Family and Intimate Relationships
15: Religion
16: Education
101
Sociology
17: Government and Politics
18: The Economy and Work
19: Health, Medicine, and the Environment
Part 5: Changing Society
20. Population, Communities, and Urbanization
21. Collective Behavior and Social Movements
22. Social Change in the Global Community
SOCIOLOGY: THE CORE
9th Edition
Michael Hughes, VA Poly Institute & State University
Carolyn J Kroehler
ISBN: 9780073404257
ISBN: 9780071285520 [IE]
NEW
http://www.mhhe.com/hughes9
*9780073404189*
GLOBAL SOCIOLOGY:
INTRODUCING FIVE
CONTEMPORARY
SOCIETIES
5th Edition
Highly respected for its scholarship and straightforward approach,
Sociology: The Core covers core sociological concepts with a brief
and accessible presentation at an affordable price. In the ninth edition,
Sociology once again comes alive as a vital and exciting field to relate
sociological principles to real-world circumstances. New “What Can
Sociology Do For You?” sections introduce the careers and provide
educational recommendations for students that decide to pursue a
degree in Sociology.
CONTENTS
Linda Schneider and Arnold Silverman of
Nassau Community College
2010 / 352 pages
ISBN: 9780073404189
An effective supplement to any standard sociology text, this broad and
comprehensive sociological description of five diverse contemporary
societies with wide geographic distribution - Japan, Mexico, Egypt,
Germany, and the Bushmen of Namibia - is organized around basic
sociological topics: culture, social structure, group life, socialization,
deviance, social institutions, social stratification, and social change.
Fictional vignettes of individuals in each country help students
experience first-person viewpoints on life in five very different
societies. By comparing other societies with their own, students read
about the range of social variation, learn what makes their own society
distinctive, and gain a unique and fascinating vantage point on what
sociology offers in a world of rapid social change. The fifth edition has
been fully updated to reflect recent economic and political changes.
New and updated data is included in each chapter. Current concerns
such as crime, drug trafficking, ethnic diversity, gender, income
inequality, political Islam and social change in traditional societies are
addressed throughout the book. The impact of and response to global
economic changes is a continuing theme in every chapter.
Chapter 1: Developing a Sociological Consciousness
Chapter 2: Culture and Social Structure
Chapter 3: Socialization
Chapter 4: Social Groups and Formal Organizations
Chapter 5: Deviance and Crime
Chapter 6: Social Stratification
Chapter 7: Inequalities of Race and Ethnicity
Chapter 8: Gender Inequality
Chapter 9: Political and Economic Power
Chapter 10: The Family
Chapter 11: Religion, Education, and Medicine
Chapter 12: Population and Environment
Chapter 13: Social Change
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v New fictional vignettes expand the scope of this successful
feature, giving students a personal glimpse into the daily lives of
people in other cultures.
v More generous use of subheads allows for easier navigation
of chapters.
v Updated treatment of the response to global economic change
allows students to compare varied approaches to the challenges of
globalization.
v Increased emphasis on German immigration policy and ethnic
diversity tolerance provides a fascinating counterpoint to domestic
protocol.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1. Japan: The Importance of Belonging
Chapter 2. Mexico: Conflict and Cooperation
Chapter 3. The San of Namibia: Ancient Culture in a New Nation
Part I: San Culture: A Design for Living
Part II: Social Change and the Future: The Postcolonial Era
Chapter 4. Egypt: Faith, Gender, and Class
Chapter 5. Germany: Diversity in a Modern Nation-State
102
Sociology
SOCIOLOGY MATTERS
4th Edition
Richard T Schaefer, Depaul University
ISBN: 9780073404318
SOCIOLOGY: A BRIEF INTRODUCTION
8th Edition
Richard T Schaefer, Depaul University
ISBN: 9780073404264
ISBN: 9780071271738 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/schaefersm4e
http://www.mhhe.com/schaefer8e
This revised edition of Richard T. Schaefer’s Sociology: A Brief
Introduction provides students with a comprehensive, up-to-date
presentation of sociology. Students learn to think critically about
society and their own lives from a wide range of classical and
contemporary perspectives. Combining balanced coverage of
theory with current research findings, examples that students can
relate to, and abundant learning aids and exercises, the new edition
continues to encourage the development of sociological imagination.
Greater coverage of globalization through a new chapter and boxes
focusing on “Social Change in the Global Community” help remove
ethnocentric blinders and teaches students to think globally about
issues and policies.
CONTENTS
Chapter-Opening Excerpts
Social Policy Sections
Maps, Summing Up Tables, and Photo Essays
Preface
1 Understanding Sociology
2 Sociological Research
3 Culture
4 Socialization and the Life Course
5 Social Interaction, Groups, and Social Structure
6 The Mass Media
7 Deviance and Social Control
8 Stratification and Social Mobility in the United States
9 Global Inequality
10 Racial and Ethnic Inequality
11 Stratification by Gender
12 The Family and Intimate Relationships
13 Education and Religion
14 Government and the Economy
15 Health, Medicine, and the Environment
16 Social Change in the Global Community
Glossary
References
Acknowledgments
Photo Credits
Name Index
Index
Richard T. Schaefer’s Sociology Matters is a concise introduction
to the discipline of sociology. Its straightforward style, streamlined
design, and highly focused coverage make it the perfect affordable,
ultra brief, introductory text for instructors who use a variety of
materials in their course. The new fourth edition includes new chapter
opening vignettes and up to date coverage of current topics such as
the Virginia Tech shooting and the use of virtual networks such as
Facebook.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: The Sociological View
Chapter 2: Culture and Socialization
Chapter 3: Social Interaction, Groups, and Social Structure
Chapter 4: Deviance and Social Control
Chapter 5: Stratification in the United States and Global Inequality
Chapter 6: Inequality by Race and Ethnicity
Chapter 7: Inequality by Gender
Chapter 8: Social Institutions: Family and Religion
Chapter 9: Social Institutions: Education, Government, and the
Economy
Chapter 10: Population, Community, Health, and the Environment
Chapter 11: Social Movements, Social Change, and Technology
REVISITING SOCIOLOGY
(In Chinese)
By Keung-Sing Ho
2005 / 200 pages
ISBN: 9780071249966
䗭ᰃ⚎໻ᅌᴀ⾥៪ࡃᅌ຿ᅌ⫳᪄ᆿⱘᬭ⾥᳌ˈ䘽ড়ׂ䅔⼒᳗ᅌܹ䭔ǌ
ⱘᅌ⫳䮅䅔ˈгৃկᴀ⾥催ᑈ㋮ᅌ⫳԰⚎গ㗗᳌ǄѺ᳝ࡽᮐᇡ⼒᳗ᅌ
ᛳ㟜䍷៪ᛇњ㾷⧒ҷ⼒᳗ⱘ᳝ᖗҎ຿Ǆ
FEATURES
v ᴀ᳌ড়ϗԡᅌ㗙П࡯ˈҹ݊ᬭᅌ៪ⷨおᇜ䭋᪄ᆿ᳝䮰㆛ゴ㗠
៤Ǆ
v ᴀ᳌ܻᆍ⏅ܹ⏎ߎˈ↣ゴࣙ৿ǋὖᗉ㟛⧚䂪ǌঞǋᴀೳⷨおǌܽ
໻‫ܗ‬㋴Ǆǋὖᗉ㟛⧚䂪ǌࣙᣀ⬠ᅮ෎ᴀὖᗉঞҟ㌍ǃ䀩䂪৘。⧚䂪Ǆ
ǋᴀೳⷨおǌࠛࣙᣀ佭␃ᴀഄⱘ⧚䂪䖃䂪ˈҹঞ‫݋‬储ⱘⷨおⱐ⧒Ǆ
v ᴀ᳌ࣙ৿‫ڇ‬㍅⼒᳗ᅌܹ䭔ⱘ䂆丠ˈ՟བԩ䃖⼒᳗ᅌǃ⼒᳗ᅌⷨ
おㄝ˗ԚѺ᳝䓗ᮄ〢ⱘ䂆丠՟བᮙ䘞ǃ䭦ᱛˈᦤկ䅔㗙㘇Ⳃϔᮄⱘ
ᛳ㾎Ǆ
v ᴀ᳌ߛড়ᰖҷⱐሩˈ↣㆛ゴഛ᥼ҟ㟛䁆䂆丠Ⳍ䮰ⱘ㎆ഔˈ䅧䅔㗙
᳝䘆ϔℹ᥶㋶ⱘ″᳗ˈϺ๲ᔋ݊䮅䅔㟜䍷Ǆ
103
Sociology
Introductory Sociology –
Readers
SOCIOLOGY: DIVERSITY, CONFLICT, AND
CHANGE
Kenneth J. Neubeck, Emeritus, University of Connecticut-Storrs Davita
Silfen Glasberg, University of Connecticut-Storrs
2005 / 576 pages / Softcover
ISBN: 9780072504767
ISBN: 9780071114608 [IE]
NEW
*9780073404196*
www.mhhe.com/neubeck
CONTENTS
1. The Sociological Imagination
Part One: Core Sociological Concepts
2. Social Structure: Macro-Level
3. Social Structure: Mid-and Micro-Levels
4. Culture
5. Socialization
6. Systems of Inequality
7. Intersection of Race, Class, and Gender
8. Deviance, Crime, Resistance, and Social Control
9. Social Change and Social Movements
Part Two: Institutional Spheres
10. The State and Capital
11. Work and Production
12. Education
13. Health
14. Families
15. Religion
Part Three: Thinking About The Future
16. Emerging Issues
THE DISCOVERY OF
SOCIETY
8th Edition
Randall Collins, University of Pennsylvania
2010 / 288 pages
ISBN: 9780073404196
NEW TO THIS EDITION
contemporary life.
CONTENTS
and Mead
Parsons
Index
104
Sociology
NEW
NEW
*9780073404189*
*9780078127724*
GLOBAL SOCIOLOGY:
INTRODUCING FIVE
CONTEMPORARY
SOCIETIES
5th Edition
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
SOCIOLOGY 09/10
38th Edition
Kurt Finsterbusch, University of MarylandCollege Park
Linda Schneider and Arnold Silverman of
Nassau Community College
2010 / 352 pages
ISBN: 9780073404189
ISBN: 9780078127724
NEW TO THIS EDITION
NEW TO THIS EDITION
CourseSmart.com (ISBN 0077309073).
of chapters.
globalization.
protocol.
CONTENTS
v Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/
AE_Sociology_0910.pdf
Sociology 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in three of our
best-selling McGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by Schaefer, Witt, and
Hughes/Kroehler.
CONTENTS
Unit 1: Culture
Part A. American Culture and Cultural Change
1. Understanding American Worldview
2. The Denial of Virtue
3. The Atrophy of Social Life
4. The Myth of the “Culture of Poverty”
Part B. Value Issues
5. Diversity within Unity: A New Approach to Immigrants and Minorities
6. The Dubious Value of Value-Neutrality
Unit 2: Socialization and Social Control
Part A. Influences on Personality and Behavior
8. Worth Every Penny: Can Cash Incentives Create Model Citizens?
9. The New Sex Scorecard
Part B. Crime, Law Enforcement, and Social Control
10. Fighting Crime: An Economist’s View
11. The Prison Boom and the Decline of American Citizenship
12. The Aggregate Burden of Crime
Unit 3: Groups and Roles in Transition
Part A. Marriage and the Family
13. Can Marriage Be Saved?
14. The Opt-Out Myth
105
Sociology
15. Peer Marriage, Pepper Schwartz, The Communitarian Reader:
Beyond the Essential
Part B. Gender and Gender Roles
16. Feminists and Fundamentalists
17. All Happy Families: The Looming Battle over Gay Parenting
Part C. City and Community
18. An Age of Transformation
19. Why Aren’t U.S. Cities Burning?
Unit 4: Stratification and Social Inequalities
Part A. Income Inequalities
20. Goodbye, Horatio Alger: Moving Up Economically Is Now
Impossible for Many, If Not Most, Americans
21. Connecting the Dots
Part B. Welfare and Welfare Reform
22. A Work in Progress
Part C. Racial and Ethnic Issues and Inequalities
23. Nearer to Overcoming
24. Whites Swim in Racial Preference
25. Why We Hate
Part D. Sex Inequalities and Issues
27. Scaling the Ivory Tower
Unit 5: Social Institutions: Issues, Crises, and Changes
Part A. The Political Sphere: Power, Politics, and Administration
29. Who Rules America?: Power, Politics, and Social Change, 5th ed.
30. Inside the Hidden World of Earmarks
31. Foresight for Government
Part B. The Economic Sphere: Changing Consumption,
Workplaces, Workforce
32. Reversal of Fortune
33. The Future of Outsourcing: How It’s Transforming Whole Industries
and Changing the Way We Work
Part C. The Social Sphere: Education, Health, and Religion
34. Can the Center Find a Solution That Will Hold?: The High
School Experience: Proposals for Improvement
35. Medical Guesswork
36. Pandemic Pandemonium
37. In Search of the Spiritual
Unit 6: Social Change and the Future
Part A. Population Issues
38. Enough Already
39. Putting a Stop to Slave Labor: A Moral Solution to Illegal
Immigration
Part B. Environment and Safety
40. Plan B 3.0: Mobilizing to Save Civilization
41. Climate Change, Coming Home: Global Warming’s Effects on
Populations
42. Draining Our Future: The Growing Shortage of Freshwater
Part C. Technology for Better or for Worse
43. Who’s Afraid of Human Enhancement?: A Reason Debate on the
Promise, Perils, and Ethics of Human Biotechnology
44. Biotech on the Farm: Realizing the Promise
Part D. Terrorism and War
45. Defeating Terrorism: Is It Possible? Is it Probable?
46. Nightmare in Manhattan
47. Winter Soldiers Sound Off
Part E. Macro Changes for the World and the United States
48. Update on the State of the Future
49. A User’s Guide to the Century
50. Understanding Our Moment in History: Living Between Two Ages
Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078127502*
VIEWS ON SOCIAL ISSUES,
EXPANDED
15th Edition
Kurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland—
College Park
ISBN: 9780078127502
TAKING SIDES: SOCIAL ISSUES, 15/e EXPANDED presents current
com.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
TS_Social_Issues_15eX.pdf
Social Issues, 15/e Expanded with the corresponding chapters in
three of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by Witt,
Hughes/Kroehler, and Schaefer.
CONTENTS
Unit 1 Culture and Values
Issue 1. Is America in Moral Decline?
Issue 2. Does the News Media Have a Liberal Bias?
Issue 3. Is Third World Immigration a Threat to America’s Way of
Life?
Unit 2 Sex Roles, Gender, and the Family
Issue 4. Does Divorce Have Long-Term Damaging Effects on
Children?
Issue 5. Should Mothers Stay Home with Their Children?
Issue 6. Should Same-Sex Marriages Be Legally Recognized?
Unit 3 Stratification and Inequality
Issue 7. Is Increasing Economic Inequality a Serious Problem?
Issue 8. Has Feminism Benefited American Society?
Issue 9. Has Affirmative Action Outlived Its Usefulness?
Issue 10. Are Boys and Men Disadvantaged Relative to Girls and
Women?
Unit 4 Political Economy and Institutions
Issue 11. Should Government Intervene in a Capitalist Economy?
Issue 12. Has Welfare Reform Benefited the Poor?
Issue 13. Is Competition the Reform That Will Fix Education?
Issue 14. Should Biotechnology Be Used to Alter and Enhance
Humans?
Unit 5 Crime and Social Control
Issue 15. Is Street Crime More Harmful Than White-Collar Crime?
Issue 16. Should Marijuana Be Legalized?
Issue 17. Does the Threat of Terrorism Warrant the Curtailment of
Civil Liberties?
Unit 6 The Future: Population/Environment/Society
Issue 18. Is Humankind Dangerously Harming the Environment?
106
Sociology
Issue 19. Is Globalization Good for Humankind?
Issue 20. Is America Dominated by Big Business?
Societal Obstacles?
Issue 22. Is the World a Victim of American Cultural Imperialism?
CLASSIC EDITION SOURCES: SOCIOLOGY
4th Edition
Kurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland-College Park
ISBN: 9780073379807
This reader provides over 40 selections of enduring intellectual value-classic articles, book excerpts, and research studies--that have
shaped the study of sociology and our contemporary understanding
of it.
CONTENTS
The Sociological Perspective
Selection 1: C. WRIGHT MILLS, from The Sociological Imagination
(OxfordUniversity Press, 1959) 1
Selection 2: HERBERT BLUMER, from “Society as Symbolic
Interaction,” in Human Behavior and Social Processes, Arnold Ross,
ed. (Houghton Mifflin, 1962) 4
Culture
Selection 3: J. LAVELLE INGRAM, from “Understanding American
Worldview,” in Life in the USA (2007) 9
Selection 4: HORACE MINER, from “Body Ritual Among the
Nacirema,” American Anthropologist (June 1956) 12
Selection 5: ELIJAH ANDERSON, from “The Code of the Streets,”
The Atlantic Monthly (1994) 15
Selection 6: DEBORAH TANNEN, from You Just Don’t Understand
(William Morrow, 1990) 20
Socialization, Socializing, Human Biotech Potential, and the
Social Construction of Society
Selection 7: MARGARET L. ANDERSEN and DANA HYSOCK, from
Thinking about Women, 8/e (Allyn & Bacon, 2009) 25
Selection 8: PHYLLIS MOEN and PATRICIA ROEHLING, from The
Career Mystique: Cracks in the American Dream (Rowman &Littlefield,
2005) 30
Selection 9: D. STANLEY EITZEN, from “The Atrophy of Social
Life,”Society (September/October 2004) 35
Selection 10: ALYSSA FORD, from “Humanity: The Remix,” Utne
Reader (May/June 2005) 40
Selection 11: PETER L. BERGER, from Invitation to Sociology: A
Humanistic Perspective (Doubleday, 1963) 45
Selection 12: ERVING GOFFMAN, from The Presentation of Self in
Everyday Life (Doubleday, 1959) 49
Deviance, Crime, and Social Control
Selection 13: JOHN J. DONOHUE, from “Fighting Crime,” Milkin
Institute Review (First Quarter 2005) 55
Selection 14: DAVID A. ANDERSON, from “The Aggregate Burden of
Crime,” Journal of Law and Economics (October 1999) 61
Social Organization: Groups, Associations, Social Movements,
Communities, and Rational Organizations
Selection 15: ROBERT WUTHNOW, from “How Small Groups Are
Transforming Our Lives,” Christianity Today (February 1994) 67
Selection 16: FRANCIS FUKUYAMA, from “Social Capital and Civil
Society” (International Monetary Fund, 2000) 71
Selection 17: AMITAI ETZIONI, ET AL., from “Diversity within Unity:
NewApproach to Immigrants and Minorities,” The Communitarian
Reader: Beyond the Essentials (Rowan & Littlefield, 2004)76
Selection 18: CHARLES TILLY, from “Social Movements,” in Regimes
and Repertoires (University of Chicago Press, 2006) 81
Selection 19: FRED SIEGEL, from “The Death and Life of America’s
Cities,” The Public Interest (Summer 2002) 86
Selection 20: CHARLES PERROW, from Organizing America: Wealth,
Power, and the Origins of Corporate Capitalism (Princeton University
Press, 2002) 91
Social Inequality
Selection 21: DOUGLAS S. MASSEY, from “How Stratification Works,”
from Categorically Unequal: The American Stratification System
(Russell Sage Foundation, 2007) 97
Selection 22: KARL MARX and FRIEDRICH ENGELS, from The
Communist Manifesto (1848) 103
Selection 23: JEFF MADRICK, from “Goodbye, HoratioAlger,” The
Nation (February 5, 2007) 108
Selection 24: DAVID K. SHIPLER, from “Connecting the Dots,” in
John Edwards, et al., Ending Poverty in America (The New Press,
2007) 112
Views of the Top and the Bottom
Selection 25: ROBERT PERRUCCI and EARL WYSONG, from
“Care and Feeding of the Privileged Class,” The New Class Society
(Rowman & Littlefield, 2008) 118
Selection 26: JONATHAN KOZOL, from “Poverty’s Children: Growing
Up in the South Bronx,” The Progressive (October 1995) 123
Racial and Sexual Inequality
Selection 27: NORMAN KELLEY, from “Virtual Equality, Virtual
Segregation,” Society (July/August 2006) 130
Selection 28: SILVIA ANN HEWLETT and CAROLYN BUCK LUCE,
from “Off-Ramps and On-Ramps: Keeping Talented Women on the
Road to Success,” Harvard Business Review (March 2005) 137
Selection 29: ALICE LEUCHTAG, from “Human Rights, Sex Trafficking,
and Prostitution,” The Humanist (January/February 2003) 144
The Political System
Selection 30: G. WILLIAM DOMHOFF, from Who Rules America?
(McGraw-Hill, 2006) 150
Selection 31: LILLIAN B. RUBIN, from “Sand Castles and Snake
Pits: Homelessness, Public Policy, and the Law of Unintended
Consequences,” Dissent Magazine (Fall 2007) 155
Selection 32: DAVID OSBORNE and TED GAEBLER, from
“Reinventing Government,” in The New Democrat (March 1992)
160
The Economy
Selection 33: BETSY MORRIS and PATRICIA NEERING, from “The
New Rules,” Fortune (July 24, 2006) 167
Selection 34: THOMAS L. FRIEDMAN, from “It’s a Flat World, After
all,” New York Times Magazine (April 3, 2005) 172
The Family
Selection 35: FRANK FURSTENBERG, from “Can Marriage Be
Saved?,” Dissent Magazine (Summer 2005) 179
Selection 36: PEPPER SCHWARTZ, “Peer Marriage,” The
Communitarian Reader (Rowman & Littlefield, 2004) 183
Selection 37: HUMAN RIGHTS CAMPAIGN, from “Answers to
Questions About Marriage Equality” (Family Net Project, 2004) 189
Other Institutions: Education, Health Care, and Religion
Selection 38: CHESTER E. FINN, JR., from “Can the Center Find a
Solution That Will Hold?,” Education Next (Winter 2006) 195
Selection 39: ROBERT LANGRETH, from “Fixing Hospitals,” Forbes
Magazine (June 20, 2005) 200
Selection 40: JERRY ADLER, from “In Search of the Spiritual”,
Newsweek (August 29–September 5, 2005) 205
Population, Environment, and Society
Selection 41: LESTER R. BROWN, from Plan B 3.0 (Earth Policy
Institute, 2008) 212
Selection 42: SARAH DEWEERDT, from “Climate Change, Coming
Home: Global Warming’s Effects on Populations,” World Watch
Magazine (May/June 2007) 217
Global Social Change
Selection 43: SAMUEL P. HUNTINGTON, from “The Clash
ofCivilizations?” Foreign Affairs (Summer 1993) 223
Selection 44: MARVIN J. CETRON, from “DefeatingTerrorism: Is
ItPossible? Is It Probable?” The Futurist (May/June 2007) 230
Selection 45: STEVEN WEBER, ET AL., from “Globalization Went
Bad,” Foreign Policy (January/February 2008) 236
107
Sociology
Social Problems
Unit II Countering the Terrorist Threat
Chapter 6 Terrorism and the Media
Chapter 7 The Challenges of Terrorism to a Free Society
Chapter 8 Strategies and Approaches for Combating Terrorism
Chapter 9 Leveraging the Role of the Private Sector
Chapter 10 Winning the War on Terrorism
NEW
*9780073528281*
Social Problems –
Readers
SOCIAL PROBLEMS AND THE QUALITY OF
LIFE
12th Edition
Robert H Lauer and Jeanette C Lauer of Alliant International University
2011 / 576 pages
ISBN: 9780073528281
NEW
*9780078050565*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL PROBLEMS
10/11
37th Edition
TERRORISM AND COUNTERTERRORISM
UNDERSTANDING THE NEW SECURITY
ENVIRONMENT, READINGS AND
INTERPRETATIONS
3rd Edition
Kurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland-College Park
2011 / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780078050565
Russell D Howard and Reid L Sawyer of US Military Academy
Natasha E Bajema
2009 / 696 pages
ISBN: 9780073379791
Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073379 794.mhtml
In this new edition of TERRORISM AND COUNTERTERRORISM:
UNDERSTANDING THE NEW SECURITY ENVIRONMENT,
READINGS AND INTERPRETATIONS, Brigadier General (Retired)
Russell Howard, Major Reid Sawyer and Natasha Bajema have
collected original and previously published seminal articles and
essays by political scientists, government officials, and members of
the nation’s armed forces. The editors and several of the authors write
from practical field experience in the nation’s war on terrorism. Others
have had significant responsibility for planning government policy
and responses. The contributors include a majority of the significant
names in the field including John Arquilla, Richard Betts, Martha
Crenshaw, Rohan Gunaratna, Bruce Hoffman and Paul Pillar. Part
One of the book analyzes the philosophical, political, and religious
roots of terrorist activities around the world and discusses the national,
regional, and global effects of historical and recent acts of terrorism.
In addition to material on the threats from suicide bombers, as well
as chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear weapons, there
are also important contributions analyzing new and growing threats
such as genomic terrorism. Part Two deals with past, present, and
future national and international responses to--and defenses against-terrorism. Essays and articles in this section analyze and debate
the practical, political, ethical, and moral questions raised by military
and non-military responses (and pre-emptive actions) outside of the
context of declared war. This section has expanded on the previous
edition to include three timely chapters on terrorism and the media,
the role of the private sector, and winning the war on terrorism.
for more details.
CONTENTS
Unit I Defining the Threat
Chapter 1 Defining Terrorism: Means, Ends, and Motives
Chapter 2 Understanding the Facilitators of Modern Terrorism
Chapter 3 The New Terrorism
Chapter 4 Religion and the Intersection with Terrorism
Chapter 5 Modern Methods and Modes of Attack
108
Sociology
NEW
*9780078127618*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
VIOLENCE AND
TERRORISM 10/11
12th Edition
Thomas J Badey, Randolph-Macon College
2010 / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780078127618
28. The Madrassa Scapegoat
Unit 8: Women and Terrorism
29. Female Suicide Bombers: A Global Trend
30. The Bomb Under the Abaya
31. Picked Last: Women and Terrorism
Unit 9: Government Response
32. Knowing the Enemy
33. Deterring Terrorists: What Israel Has Learned
34. Intelligence and the War on Terror: How Dirty Are We Willing to
Get Our Hands?
35. Air Security: Why You’re Not as Safe as You Think
Unit 10: Future Threats
36. The Shifting Face of Violence
37. The Next Generation of Terror
38. Al Qaeda at 20: Dead or Alive?
Article Rating Form
CONTENTS
Unit 1: The Concept of Terrorism
1. How to Define Terrorism
2. What Makes a Terrorist?
3. The Myth of the Invincible Terrorist
Unit 2: Tactics of Terrorism
4. From the H-Bomb to the Human Bom
5. The Al Qaeda Weapons Race Continues
6. Terrorism and Extortion
7. Toy Soldiers
Unit 3: State-Sponsored Terrorism
8. Rogue Operators
9. Iran’s Suicide Brigades
10. The Growing Syrian Missile Threat: Syria after Lebanon
11. Chavez Bides His Time
Unit 4: International Terrorism
12. Trail of Terror
13. Peace at Last?
14. Tamil Tiger Trap
15. In Europe, Where’s the Hate?
Unit 5: Terrorism in America
16. Incidents of Terrorism in the United States, 1997–2005
17. The Year in Hate
18. Green Rage
19. When Activists Attack
20. White-Pride Mom
Unit 6: Terrorism and the Media
21. The Al-Qaeda Media Machine
22. Nets of Terror: Terrorist Activity on the Internet
23. Jihad with a Hip-Hop Pose Is an Easier Sell with Youth
24. The Globe of Villages
25. Congress and the “YouTube War”
Unit 7: Terrorism and Religion
26. Qutbism: An Ideology of Islamic-Fascism
27. In Search of Moderate Muslims
NEW
*9780078127502*
VIEWS ON SOCIAL ISSUES,
EXPANDED
15th Edition
Kurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland—
College Park
ISBN: 9780078127502
TAKING SIDES: SOCIAL ISSUES, 15/e EXPANDED presents current
com.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
TS_Social_Issues_15eX.pdf
Social Issues, 15/e Expanded with the corresponding chapters in
three of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by Witt,
Hughes/Kroehler, and Schaefer.
CONTENTS
Unit 1 Culture and Values
Issue 1. Is America in Moral Decline?
Issue 2. Does the News Media Have a Liberal Bias?
Issue 3. Is Third World Immigration a Threat to America’s Way of
Life?
Unit 2 Sex Roles, Gender, and the Family
Issue 4. Does Divorce Have Long-Term Damaging Effects on Children?
Issue 5. Should Mothers Stay Home with Their Children?
Issue 6. Should Same-Sex Marriages Be Legally Recognized?
109
Sociology
Unit 3 Stratification and Inequality
Issue 7. Is Increasing Economic Inequality a Serious Problem?
Issue 8. Has Feminism Benefited American Society?
Issue 9. Has Affirmative Action Outlived Its Usefulness?
Issue 10. Are Boys and Men Disadvantaged Relative to Girls and
Women?
Unit 4 Political Economy and Institutions
Issue 11. Should Government Intervene in a Capitalist Economy?
Issue 12. Has Welfare Reform Benefited the Poor?
Issue 13. Is Competition the Reform That Will Fix Education?
Issue 14. Should Biotechnology Be Used to Alter and Enhance
Humans?
Unit 5 Crime and Social Control
Issue 15. Is Street Crime More Harmful Than White-Collar Crime?
Issue 16. Should Marijuana Be Legalized?
Issue 17. Does the Threat of Terrorism Warrant the Curtailment of
Civil Liberties?
Unit 6 The Future: Population/Environment/Society
Issue 18. Is Humankind Dangerously Harming the Environment?
Issue 19. Is Globalization Good for Humankind?
Issue 20. Is America Dominated by Big Business?
Societal Obstacles?
Issue 22. Is the World a Victim of American Cultural Imperialism?
ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL
PROBLEMS 08/09
36th Edition
Kurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland—College Park
2009 / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780073397689
This Thirty-Sixth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL PROBLEMS
annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated table
of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews for
each section; and an online instructor’s resource guide with testing
materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is
offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles
are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
Unit 1: Introduction: The Nature of Social Problems and General
Critiques of American Society
1. Social Problems: Definitions, Theories, and Analysis
2. The Fragmentation of Social Life,
3. How to Re-Moralize America
Unit 2: Problems of the Political Economy
Part A. The Polity
4. Who Rules America?
5. Inside the Hidden World of Earmarks
6. Our Incompetent Government
7. Rights, Liberties, and Security
Part B. The Economy
8. Evaluating Economic Change
9. The New Rules
10. Debtor Nation
11. Born to Buy
Part C. Problems of Place
12. Why Aren’t U.S. Cities Burning?0
13. Phantom Menace
14. The Invisible Ones
Unit 3: Problems of Poverty and Inequality
Part A. Inequality and the Poor
15. How Stratification Works
16. Goodbye
17. Can Extreme Poverty Be Eliminated?
Part B. Welfare
18. Welfare Redux
Part C. Racial and Ethnic Inequality and Issues
19. Virtual Equality
20. Why We Hate
21. American Dreamers
Part D. Gender Inequalities and Issues
24. All Happy Families
Unit 4: Institutional Problems
Part A. The Family
25. The Frayed Knot
26. The Opt-Out Myth
28. Overworked, Time Poor, and Abandoned by Uncle Sam 29. Peer
Marriage
Part B. Education
30. Against School
31. Can the Center Find a Solution That Will Hold?
Part C. Health
32. Fixing Hospitals, Robert Langreth
33. Medical Guesswork
Unit 5: Crime, Law Enforcement, and Terrorism
Part A. Crime
34. Fighting Crime
35. The Aggregate Burden of Crime
36. Drugs
Part B. Law Enforcement
37. Causes and Consequences of Wrongful Convictions
38. Reforming Juvenile Justice
39. America Incarcerated
Part C. Terrorism
40. Defeating Terrorism
41. Nightmare in Manhattan
Unit 6: Problems of Population, Environment, Technology, and
the Future
Part A. Population and Environment Issues
42. Enough Already
43. SOS: We Need a Plan B
44. The Science of Climate Change
Part B. Technological Issues
45. Who’s Afraid of Human Enhancement?
46. The Secret Nuclear War
Part C. The Future
47. Update on the State of the Future
48. How Globalization Went Bad
49. Understanding Our Moment in History
110
Sociology
INTERPRETATIONS
3rd Edition
Marriage & the Family
Natasha E Bajema
2009 / 696 pages
ISBN: 9780073379791
NEW
*9780073404363*
PUBLIC AND PRIVATE FAMILIES: A READER
6th Edition
CONTENTS
Andrew J Cherlin, Johns Hopkins University
2010 / 416 pages
ISBN: 9780073404363
This reader examines the family through two lenses--the familiar
private family, in which we live our personal lives, and the public
family, in which we deal with broader societal issues, such as raising
the next generation, and the care of the elderly. Consequently, these
readings look both at intimate, personal concerns, such as whether
to marry, as well as societal concerns, such as governmental policies
that affect families. The reader corresponds exactly to and is published
concurrent with Cherlin’s textbook Public and Private Families: An
Introduction; both the textbook and the reader have 14 chapters of
the same names.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v Almost a third of the readings (8 of 28) are new to this edition.
New readings include: “The Family in Trouble: Since When? For
Whom?” (Steven M. Tipton and John Witte, eds.); “Fathers and
Emotional Responsibility” (Andrea Doucet); “The Work-Home Crunch”
(Kathleen Gerson and Jerry A. Jacobs); “Religion and Domestication
of Men” (Bradford Wilcox); “Children’s Adjustment Following Divorce:
Risk and Resilience Perspectives” (Joan B. Kelly and Robert E.
Emery); and “Beyond the Two-Parent Family: How Teenagers Fare
in Cohabiting Couple and Blended Families” (Sandi Nelson, Rebecca
L. Clark, and Gregory Acs).
v Chapter 8 (Work and Families) now includes an article from
Contexts by Kathleen Gerson and Jerry A. Jacobs on trends in hours
of paid work within a family. This article details findings from their book,
“The Time Divide: Work, Gender, and Gender Inequality.”
v A thoroughly revised and updated chapter on Domestic Violence
features two new readings, “A Typology of Domestic Violence”
(Michael P. Johnson) and “Controversies Surrounding Mandatory
Arrest Policies and the Police Response to Intimate Partner Violence”
(Amy Leisenring).
v Chapter 12 (Divorce) now includes a reading from two
psychologists who assert that in considering the effects of divorce on
children, we must differentiate between pain (sad, painful memories
of the event) and pathology (effects that cause problem’s in a child’s
later life).
CONTENTS
(* indicates a new reading)
Preface
Part One: Introduction
Chapter 1: Public and Private Families
Chapter 2: The History of the Family
Part Two: Gender, Class, and Race-Ethnicity
Chapter 3: Gender and Families
Chapter 4: Social Class and Families
Chapter 5: Race, Ethnicity and Families
Part Three: Sexuality, Partnership, and Marriage
Chapter 6: Sexualities
Chapter 7: Cohabitation and Marriage
Chapter 8: Work and Families
111
Sociology
FAMILIES: A SOCIOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVE
Part Four: Links across the Generations
Chapter 9: Children and Parents
Chapter 10: The Elderly and Their Families
Part Five: Conflict, Disruption, and Reconstitution
Chapter 11: Domestic Violence
Chapter 12: Divorce
Chapter 13: Remarriage and Stepfamilies
Part Six: Family and Society
Chapter 14: The Family, the State, and Social Policy
David M Newman, Depauw University
ISBN: 9780073404165
http://www.mhhe.com/newman1
Sociology of Families is an exciting new text from David Newman that
successfully connects to students’ personal lives while showing how
sociologists understand and explain families. It is not only informative
in terms of current sociological knowledge of families, but meaningful
in terms of contemporary family debates and applicable to students’
own family experiences. What Does it All Mean?, Going Global,
and See for Yourself sections appear throughout the text allowing
students to think and perform experiments like sociologists to explore
theoretical concepts to better understand their own family lives as
well as those of others.
MARRIAGE AND FAMILY: THE QUEST FOR
INTIMACY
7th Edition
ISBN: 9780073404288
CONTENTS
http://www.mhhe.com/lauermf7
Marriage & Family combines a positive and practical approach to
the study of marriage and family life with a manageable amount of
sociological theory and research citations. The text not only provides
students with a basic understanding of marriage and family life but
helps them apply the knowledge to enrich their lives and nurture their
own intimate relationships.
CONTENTS
List of Figures
List of Tables
Preface
A Guided Tour
Part One. The Context of Intimacy
l. Marriage and Family in America: Needs, Myths, and Dreams
2. Diversity in Families
3. Gender Roles: Foundation for Intimacy
4. Sexuality
Part Two: Seeking Intimate Relationships
5. Getting Involved
6. Falling in Love
7. Selecting a Life Partner
Part Three: The Intimate Couple
8. Getting Married
9. The Challenge of Communication
10. Power and Conflict in Marriage
11. Work and Home
Part Four: Intimacy in Families
12. Becoming a Parent
13. The Family Life Cycle
Part Five: Challenges to Intimacy
14. Family Crises
15. Separation and Divorce
16. Remarriage and Stepfamilies
Epilogue: The Quest Revisited: Why Bother?
Glossary
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
Part I Families And Society
1 Defining Families
2 Declining and Enduring Families
3 Measuring Families
Part II Families and Social Inequalities
4 Gendered Families
5 Diverse Families/Similar Families
6 Unequal Families
Part III Families and Relationships
7 Love, Sexuality, and Relationship Formation
8 Marriage and Cohabitation
9 Work and Family
Part IV Families Over The Life Course
10 Entering Parenthood
11Childhood and Adolescence
12 Adulthood and Later Life
Part V Families and Challenges
13 Intimate Violence
14 Divorce and Remarriage
15 Change, Stability, and Future Families
112
Sociology
Marriage & the Family –
Readers
NEW
*9780078135880*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: THE
FAMILY 10/11
36th Edition
Kathleen R Gilbert, Indiana UniversityBloomington
2010 / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780078135880
NEW TO THIS EDITION
AE_The_Family_1011.pdf
The Family 10/11 with the corresponding chapters in two of our bestselling McGraw-Hill Family textbooks by Newman and DeGonova/
Rice.
19. Prickly Pere
21. Being a Sibling
23. Roles of American Indian Grandparents in Times of Cultural Crisis
Part C. Infidelity
40. A Divided House
41. Civil Wars
Article Rating Form
CONTENTS
6. Pillow Talk
113
Sociology
Sociology of Family
NEW
*9780073515403*
NEW
VIEWS IN FAMILY AND
PERSONAL
RELATIONSHIPS
8th Edition
*9780073404356*
PUBLIC AND PRIVATE FAMILIES:
AN INTRODUCTION
6th Edition
Elizabeth Schroeder
ISBN: 9780073515403
2010 / 608 pages
ISBN: 9780073404356
Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007351540x.mhtml
www.mhhe.com/cherlin6e
TAKING SIDES: FAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS,
8/e presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format
skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary,
an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with
testing material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES
IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with
practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the
classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing
of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book website.
Visit www.mhcls.com.
Nationally recognized for its sound scholarship and balanced
approach and written by one of the leading authorities in the field,
this text examines the family through two lenses: the familiar private
family in which we live most of our personal lives, and the public family
in which we, as adults, deal with broader societal issues such as the
care of the elderly, the increase in divorce, and childbearing outside
of marriage. The book looks at intimate personal concerns, such as
whether to marry, as well as societal concerns, such as governmental
policies that affect families. Distinctive chapters - Chapter 9, “Children
and Parents;” Chapter 10, “Older Persons and Their Families;” and
Chapter 14, “The Family, the State and Social Policy” - examine
issues of great current interest, such as income assistance to poor
families, the effects of out-of-home childcare, and the costs of the
Social Security and Medicare programs.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v An updated theory section stresses the four perspectives that are
most widely used in sociology of the family: exchange theory, symbolic
interaction theory, feminist theory, and postmodern theory.
v Added coverage of “master identity,” “hooking up,” “Multiple
Partner Fertility,” the role of a woman’s salary in family life, and a
broader discussion of stepfamilies address important contemporary
issues impacting families.
v New Families and Public Policy essays include “Do Employers
Discriminate Against Women?”, “Do Children Have Rights?”, and
“Homelessness by the Numbers.”
v A number of new “Families Across Cultures” essays have been
added or expanded, including “Asia’s Missing Girls”, “Moving up by
Sending Children Abroad,” and “The Child Care Crisis in Low-Income
Countries.”
v New material on the transformation of Barack Obama’s image
in the African-American community during the presidential campaign,
to the acceptance of his authenticity as a symbol of African-American
accomplishments, reflects the belief that race is a social construct
rather than a natural one.
v Streamlined organization distributes the content of the prior
edition’s chapter 15, Social Change and Families, throughout the text,
adding a new discussion of postmodern life and its consequences
for families in Chapter 1.
CONTENTS
Part II: Gender, Class, and Race-Ethnicity
Chapter 5: Race, Ethnicity, and Families
114
Sociology
Part III: Sexuality, Partnership, and Marriage
Part IV: Links Across the Generations
Part V: Conflict, Disruption, and Reconstitution
Chapter 12: Divorce
Part VI: Family and Society
Chapter 15: Social Change and Families
CONTENTS
Part Two: Gender, Class, and Race-Ethnicity
Chapter 5: Race, Ethnicity and Families
Part Three: Sexuality, Partnership, and Marriage
Part Four: Links across the Generations
Part Five: Conflict, Disruption, and Reconstitution
Chapter 12: Divorce
Part Six: Family and Society
NEW
*9780073404363*
PUBLIC AND PRIVATE FAMILIES: A READER
6th Edition
2010 / 416 pages
ISBN: 9780073404363
This reader examines the family through two lenses--the familiar
private family, in which we live our personal lives, and the public
family, in which we deal with broader societal issues, such as raising
the next generation, and the care of the elderly. Consequently, these
readings look both at intimate, personal concerns, such as whether
to marry, as well as societal concerns, such as governmental policies
that affect families. The reader corresponds exactly to and is published
concurrent with Cherlin’s textbook Public and Private Families: An
Introduction; both the textbook and the reader have 14 chapters of
the same names.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v Almost a third of the readings (8 of 28) are new to this edition.
New readings include: “The Family in Trouble: Since When? For
Whom?” (Steven M. Tipton and John Witte, eds.); “Fathers and
Emotional Responsibility” (Andrea Doucet); “The Work-Home Crunch”
(Kathleen Gerson and Jerry A. Jacobs); “Religion and Domestication
of Men” (Bradford Wilcox); “Children’s Adjustment Following Divorce:
Risk and Resilience Perspectives” (Joan B. Kelly and Robert E.
Emery); and “Beyond the Two-Parent Family: How Teenagers Fare
in Cohabiting Couple and Blended Families” (Sandi Nelson, Rebecca
L. Clark, and Gregory Acs).
v Chapter 8 (Work and Families) now includes an article from
Contexts by Kathleen Gerson and Jerry A. Jacobs on trends in hours
of paid work within a family. This article details findings from their book,
“The Time Divide: Work, Gender, and Gender Inequality.”
v A thoroughly revised and updated chapter on Domestic Violence
features two new readings, “A Typology of Domestic Violence”
(Michael P. Johnson) and “Controversies Surrounding Mandatory
Arrest Policies and the Police Response to Intimate Partner Violence”
(Amy Leisenring).
v Chapter 12 (Divorce) now includes a reading from two
psychologists who assert that in considering the effects of divorce on
children, we must differentiate between pain (sad, painful memories
of the event) and pathology (effects that cause problem’s in a child’s
later life).
MARRIAGE AND FAMILY: THE QUEST FOR
INTIMACY
7th Edition
ISBN: 9780073404288
http://www.mhhe.com/lauermf7
Marriage & Family combines a positive and practical approach to
the study of marriage and family life with a manageable amount of
sociological theory and research citations. The text not only provides
students with a basic understanding of marriage and family life but
helps them apply the knowledge to enrich their lives and nurture their
own intimate relationships.
CONTENTS
List of Figures
List of Tables
Preface
A Guided Tour
Part One. The Context of Intimacy
l. Marriage and Family in America: Needs, Myths, and Dreams
2. Diversity in Families
3. Gender Roles: Foundation for Intimacy
4. Sexuality
Part Two: Seeking Intimate Relationships
5. Getting Involved
6. Falling in Love
7. Selecting a Life Partner
Part Three: The Intimate Couple
8. Getting Married
9. The Challenge of Communication
10. Power and Conflict in Marriage
11. Work and Home
Part Four: Intimacy in Families
12. Becoming a Parent
13. The Family Life Cycle
Part Five: Challenges to Intimacy
14. Family Crises
15. Separation and Divorce
16. Remarriage and Stepfamilies
Epilogue: The Quest Revisited: Why Bother?
Glossary
115
Sociology
Sociology of Family –
Readers
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
FAMILIES: A SOCIOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVE
David M Newman, Depauw University
ISBN: 9780073404165
NEW
*9780078135880*
http://www.mhhe.com/newman1
Sociology of Families is an exciting new text from David Newman that
successfully connects to students’ personal lives while showing how
sociologists understand and explain families. It is not only informative
in terms of current sociological knowledge of families, but meaningful
in terms of contemporary family debates and applicable to students’
own family experiences. What Does it All Mean?, Going Global,
and See for Yourself sections appear throughout the text allowing
students to think and perform experiments like sociologists to explore
theoretical concepts to better understand their own family lives as
well as those of others.
CONTENTS
Part I Families And Society
1 Defining Families
2 Declining and Enduring Families
3 Measuring Families
Part II Families and Social Inequalities
4 Gendered Families
5 Diverse Families/Similar Families
6 Unequal Families
Part III Families and Relationships
7 Love, Sexuality, and Relationship Formation
8 Marriage and Cohabitation
9 Work and Family
Part IV Families Over The Life Course
10 Entering Parenthood
11Childhood and Adolescence
12 Adulthood and Later Life
Part V Families and Challenges
13 Intimate Violence
14 Divorce and Remarriage
15 Change, Stability, and Future Families
ANNUAL EDITIONS: THE
FAMILY 10/11
36th Edition
Kathleen R Gilbert, Indiana UniversityBloomington
2010 / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780078135880
NEW TO THIS EDITION
AE_The_Family_1011.pdf
The Family 10/11 with the corresponding chapters in two of our bestselling McGraw-Hill Family textbooks by Newman and DeGonova/
Rice.
CONTENTS
6. Pillow Talk
116
Sociology
19. Prickly Pere
21. Being a Sibling
23. Roles of American Indian Grandparents in Times of Cultural
Crisis
Part C. Infidelity
40. A Divided House
41. Civil Wars
Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780073515403*
VIEWS IN FAMILY AND
PERSONAL
RELATIONSHIPS
8th Edition
Elizabeth Schroeder
ISBN: 9780073515403
Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007351540x.mhtml
TAKING SIDES: FAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS,
skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary,
an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with
testing material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES
of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book website.
Visit www.mhcls.com.
117
Sociology
Race, Class, Gender,
and Sexuality
RECONSTRUCTING GENDER: A
MULTICULTURAL ANTHOLOGY
5th Edition
Estelle Disch, University of Mass-Boston
ISBN: 9780073380063
Website: http://mhhe.com/disch5
Reconstructing Gender is an anthology that addresses the
contemporary experiences from a variety of women and men.
Drawing from a wide range of sources including research articles,
critical essays, and personal narratives, Disch has chosen accessible,
engaging, and provocative readings that represent many perspectives
and experiences. Eleven part-opening introductions identify important
issues in the general field of study, describe the readings, remind the
reader about some of the central themes emerging throughout the
book, and raise questions for students to consider.
CONTENTS
* indicates new reading
General Introduction
Part I: It’s not just about Gender
1. The Puerto Rican Dummy and the Merciful Son, Martín Espada
2. From Nothing, A Consciousness, Helen Zia
3. The Past is Ever Present: Recognizing the New Racism, Patricia
Hill Collins
4. Angry Women Are Building: Issues and Struggles Facing American
Indian Women Today, Paula Gunn Allen
5. “J.A.P.”-Slapping: The Politics of Scapegoating, Ruth Atkin and
Adrienne Rich
*6. Latinas in the Fault Lines of Citizenship, Alejandra Marchevsky
and Jeanne Theoharis
7. White Privilege: Unpacking the Invisible Knapsack, Peggy
McIntosh
8. Controlled or Autonomous: Identity and the Experience of the
Network, Women Living Under Muslim Laws, Farida Shaheed
*9. Under and (Inside) Western Eyes: At the Turn of the Century,
Chandra Talpade Mohanty
10. Patriarchy, the System: An It, Not a He, a Them or an Us, Allan
Johnson
Part II: Gender Socialization
11. The Social Construction of Gender, Judith Lorber
12. Boyhood, Organized Sports, and the Construction of Masculinities,
Michael A. Messner
13. Who’s the Fairest of Them All?, Jill Nelson
14. He Defies You Still: The Memoirs of a Sissy, Tommi Avicolli
15. Growing Up Hidden, Linnea Due
*16. Masculinity as Homophobia, Michael Kimmel
Part III: Embodiment
*17. Making Up Is Hard To Do, Sheila Jeffreys
18. “A Way Outa No Way”: Eating Problems among African American,
Latina, and White Women, Becky W. Thompson
19. Yellow Woman and a Beauty of the Spirit, Leslie Marmon Silko
20. Just Walk on By: A Black Man Ponders His Power to Alter Public
Space, Brent Staples
21. Taking It, Leonard Kriegel
22. I’m Not Fat, I’m Latina, Christy Haubegger
23. The Tyranny of the Esthetic: Surgery’s Most Intimate Violation,
Martha A. Coventry
Part IV: Communication
24. For the White Person Who Wants to Know How to Be My Friend,
Pat Parker
*25. Men and Women are from Earth, Rosalind Barnett and Caryl
Rivers
26. Real Men Don’t Cry … and Other “Uncool” Myths, Phil W.
Petrie
27. The New Momism, Susan J. Douglas and Meredith W.
Michaels
28. Claiming Jezebel: Black Female Subjectivity and Sexual
Expressions in Hip-Hop, Ayana Byrd
29. Where are the women? The strange case of the missing feminists.
When was the last time you saw one on TV?, Laura Zimmerman
Part V: Sexuality
*30. A Pornographic World [What is normal?], Robert Jensen
31. The Myth of the Sexual Athlete, Don Sabo
*32. Passing Last Summer, Domenika Bednarska
33. The Impact of Multiple Marginalization, Paula C. Rust
Part VI: Families
*34. Contemporary Challenges to Black Women’s Reproductive
Rights, Jeanne Flavin
35. Bloodmothers, Othermothers, and Women-Centered Networks,
Patricia Hill Collins
36. Dilemmas of Involved Fatherhood, Kathleen Gerson
37. Man Child: A Black Lesbian Feminist’s Response, Audre Lorde
38. I Am a Man, Raul E. Ybarra
39. What is marriage for?, E.J. Graff
*40. Free to Marry, At Last—May 17, 2004, Pat Gozemba and Karen
Kahn
Part VII: Education
41. Missing in Interaction, Myra and David Sadker
42. “What About the Boys?” What the Current Debates Tell Us--and
Don’t Tell Us--About Boys in Schools, Michael S. Kimmel
43. Does Gender Matter?, Ben A. Barres
44. Black and Female: Reflections on Graduate School, bell hooks
*45. Mentors in Violence Program, Jackson Katz
Part VIII: Paid Work and Unemployment
*46. The End of Welfare as We Know It: An Overview of the PRWORA,
Alejandra Marchevsky and Jeanne Theoharis
47. Sixty Cents to a Man’s Dollar, Ann Crittenden
48. “Global Woman” by Barbara Ehrenreich and Arlie Russell
Hochschild
49. America’s Dirty Work: Migrant Maids and Modern-Day Slavery,
Joy M. Zarembka
50. The Globetrotting Sneaker, Cynthia Enloe
*51. The Center of Masculine Production: Gay Athletes in Professional
Sports, Eric Anderson
*52. Men at War: Vietnam and Agent Orange, Cynthia R. Daniels
*53. Fort Bragg: Command, Jeffrey McGowan
Part IX: Violence
54. Women, Violence, and Resistance, Melanie Kaye/Kantrowitz
*55. Eminem’s Popularity is a Major Setback for Girls and Women,
Jackson Katz
*56. Pictures of Boyhood, Richard Hoffman
*57. Injury, Gender, and Trouble, Laurie Schaffner
58. Homophobia in Straight Men, Terry A. Kupers
59. The Ultimate Growth Industry: Trafficking in Women and Girls,
Jan Goodwin
60. How Safe Is America?, Desiree Taylor
61. Wielding Masculinity Inside Abu Ghraib: Making Feminist Sense
of an American Military Scandal, Cynthia Enloe
*62. The Private War of Women Soldiers, Helen Benedict
Part X: Health and Illness
63. Masculinities and Men’s Health: Moving toward Post—Superman
Era Prevention, Don Sabo
*64. Health Care Reform – A Woman’s Issue, Catherine DeLowry,
Dr.PH
65. Reproductive Issues Are Essential Survival Issues for the AsianAmerican Communities, Connie S. Chan
66. Why the Precautionary Principle? A Meditation on Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) and the Breasts of Mothers, Sandra Steingraber
67. Does Silencio = Muerte? Notes on Translating the AIDS Epidemic,
Rafael Campo
68. To Be Poor and Transgender, Kai Wright
118
Sociology
Part XI: A World That Is Truly Human
69. Statement of Principles, National Organization for Men Against
Sexism
*70. New Black Man, Mark Anthony Neal
*71. Feminism’s Future: Young Feminists of Color Take the Mic, Daisy
Hernández and Pandora L. Leong
*72. Tapping Our Strength, Eisa Nefertari Ulen
*73. The Women’s Peace Movement in Israel, Gila Svirsky
*74. Women and Human Rights, Rita Arditti
THE SOCIAL CONSTRUCTION OF
DIFFERENCE AND INEQUALITY: RACE,
CLASS, GENDER AND SEXUALITY
4th Edition
Tracy E Ore, St Cloud State University
ISBN: 9780073380087
Website: http://mhhe.com/ore4
This anthology examines the social construction of race, class, gender,
and sexuality and the institutional bases for these relations. While
other texts discuss various forms of stratification and the impact of
these on members of marginalized groups, Ore provides a thorough
discussion of how such systems of stratification are formed and
perpetuated and how forms of stratification are interconnected. Critical
thinking questions at the end of each reading and part opening essays
aid students in understanding how the material relates to their lives
and how their own attitudes, actions, and perspectives may serve to
perpetuate a stratified system. 13 new readings have been added
focusing on the experiences of immigrants, contemporary issues in
social institutions, current examples of how the media portrays events
and much more.
EXPERIENCING RACE, CLASS, AND
GENDER IN THE UNITED STATES
5th Edition
Roberta Fiske-Rusciano, Rider University
ISBN: 9780073528144
http://www.mhhe.com/fiske5
Through individual stories, essays, and critical analyses, this
anthology introduces issues of race, class, and gender within an
interdisciplinary framework. Themes of identity, power, and change
are examined from many different perspectives and voices. New
articles covering environmental and post-Katrina issues provide the
reader with information about recent concerns of Americans living in
the United States.
CONTENTS
Identity
Part I: Racial and Ethnic Identity
Part II: Gender Identity
Part III: Sexual Identity
Power
Part V: Power and Racism
Part VI: Power and Sexism
Part VII Power and Classism
Change
Part VIII: Taking Action
Part IX: Change Makers
Part X: Race, Class, and Gender After 9/11 and Post-Katrina
CONTENTS
* An asterisk indicates a new reading.
Preface
Part I: Constructing Differences
Race & Ethnicity
1. Racial Formations- Michael Omi and Howard Winant
2. Optional Ethnicities: For Whites Only?- Mary C. Waters
*3. We are All Suspects Now: Untold Stories from Immigrant
Communities after 9/11- Tram Nguyen
4. How Jews Became White Folks and What that Says about Race
in America- Karen Brodkin
Social Class
5. Race, Wealth, and Equality- Melvin L. Oliver and Thomas M.
Shapiro
6. Media Magic: Making Class Invisible- Gregory Mantsios
*7. Doubly Divided: The Racial Wealth Gap- Meizhu Lui
*8. Getting Corporations off the Public Dole- Janice Shields
Sex & Gender
9. The Social Construction of Gender- Judith Lorber
*10. The Five Sexes, Revisited- Anne Fausto-Sterling
11. The Transgender Paradigm Shift toward Free Expression- Holly
Boswell
12. Masculinity as Homophobia: Fear, Shame, and Silence in the
Construction of Gender Identity- Michael S. Kimmel
Sexuality
13. The Invention of Heterosexuality- Jonathan Ned Katz
*14. Sexuality and Gender in Children’s Daily Worlds- Barrie Thorne
and Zella Luria
15. Sexual Identity and Bisexual Identities: The Struggle for SelfDescription in a Changing Sexual Landscape- Paula C. Rust
16. Naming All the Parts- Kate Bornstein
Part II: Maintaining Inequalities: Systems of Oppression &
Privilege
Social Institutions
Family
17. Our Mothers’ Grief: Racial Ethnic Women and the Maintenance
of Families- Bonnie Thornton Dill
18. Families on the Fault Line: America’s Working Class Speaks About
the Family, the Economy, Race, and Ethnicity- Lillian B. Rubin
19. Stability and Change in Chicano Men’s Family Lives- Scott
Coltrane
*20. Gay and Lesbian Families Are Here- Judith Stacey
Education
21. Savage Inequalities: Children in America’s Schools- Jonathan Kozol
22. Preparing for Power: Cultural Capital and Curricula in America’s
Elite Boarding Schools- Peter W. Cookson, Jr and Caroline Hodges
Persell
119
Sociology
23. Civilize Them with a Stick- Mary Crow Dog and Richard Erdoes
24. Missing in Interaction- Myra Sadker and David Sadker
*25. Schools and the Social Control of Sexuality- Melinda Miceli
Work & the Economy
26. Jobless Ghettos: The Social Implications of the Disappearance
of Work in Segregated Neighborhoods- William J. Wilson
27. “We’d Love to Hire Them But?”: The Meaning of Race for
Employers- Joleen Kirschenman and Kathryn M. Neckerman
28. The Glass Escalator: Hidden Advantages for Men in the ‘Female’
Professions- Christine L. Williams
29. Cause of Death: Inequality- Alejandro Reuss
The State & Public Policy
*30. Welfare Reform, Family Hardship, and Women of Color- Linda
Burnham
*31. Beyond Crime and Punishment- Bruce Western and Becky Petit
32. A Half Century of Class and Gender in American Television
Domestic Sitcoms- Richard Butsch
33. The Effects of Affirmative Action on Other Stakeholders- Barbara
Reskin
34. The Possessive Investment in Whiteness: Racialized Social
Democracy and the “White” Problem in American Studies- George
Lipsitz
Media
35. A Half Century of Class and Gender in American TV Domestic
Sitcoms- Richard Butsch
36. Distorted Reality: Hispanic Characters in TV Entertainment- Robert
*37. Gay Characters in Conventional Spaces: Will and Grace and
the Situation Comedy Genre- Kathleen Battles and Wendy HiltonMorrow
*38. Metahors Matter: Disaster Myths, Media Frames, and Their
Consequences in Hurricane Katrina- Kathleen Tierney, Christine
Bevc, and Erica Kuligowski
Language & Culture
39. Racism in the English Language- Robert B. Moore
40. Self, Identity & the Naming Question: Reflections on the Language
of Disability- Irving Kenneth Zola
41. How to Tame a Wild Tongue- Gloria Anzaldúa
42. The Dark Side of Sports Symbols- Stanley D. Eitzen and Maxine
Baca Zinn
Violence & Social Control
43. Where Race and Gender Meet: Racism, Hate Crimes, and
Pornography- Helen Zia
44. Fraternities and Collegiate Rape Culture: Why are Some
Fraternities More Dangerous Places for Women?- A. Ayres Boswell
& Joan Z. Spade
45. The Construction of Masculinity and the Triad of Men’s ViolenceMichael Kaufman
46. Homophobia as a Weapon of Sexism- Suzanne Pharr
Part III: Experiencing Difference & Inequality in Everyday Life
47. Making Systems of Privilege Visible- Stephanie M. Wildman with
Adrienne D. Davis.
48. “Yes, I Follow Islam, But I’m Not a Terrorist”- Nada El Sawy
49. A Dozen Demons- Ellis Cose
*50. Always Running- La Vida Loca, Gang Days in L.A.- Luis
Rodriguez
51. The Story of My Body- Judith Ortiz Cofer
53. “Gee, You Don’t Seem Like An Indian From the Reservation”Barbara Cameron
*54. Living Fearlessly With and Within Differences: My Search for
Identity Beyond Categories and Contradictions- Shefali MilczarekDesai
55. Nickel and Dimed: On (Not) Getting by in America- Barbara
Ehrenreich
56. I Am Your Welfare Reform- Annie Downey
57. Learning to Fight- Geoffrey Canada
58. Bisexuality, Feminism, Men, and Me- Robyn Ochs
Part IV: Resistance & Social Change
59. Toward a New Vision: Race, Class, and Gender as Categories of
Analysis and Connection- Patricia Hill Collins
60. Cultural Resistance: Reconstructing Our Own Images- Yen Le
Espritu
*61.Good for the Hood?- Anmol Chaddha
62. Seeing More Than Black & White: Latinos, Racism, and the
Cultural Divides- Elizabeth Martinez
*63. How White People Can Serve as Allies to People of Color in the
Struggle to End Racism- Paul Kivel
64. Dismantling Noah’s Ark: Gender and Equality- Judith Lorber
*65. Voices of a New Movimiento- Roberto Lovato
Index
THE MEANING OF DIFFERENCE: AMERICAN
CONSTRUCTIONS OF RACE, SEX AND
GENDER, SOCIAL CLASS, AND SEXUAL
ORIENTATION
5th Edition
Karen E Rosenblum, George Mason University
Toni-Michelle C Travis, George Mason University
2009 / 544 pages
ISBN: 9780073380056
Website: http://mhhe.com/rosenblum5
The Meaning of Difference focuses on the social construction of
difference as it operates in American formulations of race and ethnicity,
sex and gender, social class, sexual orientation, and disability. The
conceptual structure of this text-reader comes from four framework
essays addressing the construction of difference, the experience
of difference, the social meaning of difference, and social action
that might bridge differences. Each framework essay is followed
by a set of readings selected for readability, conceptual depth, and
applicability to a variety of statuses. Boxed inserts throughout offer
first-person accounts from real people, many of them students.
This edition features an expanded focus on disability and 29 new
readings, including articles on how immigration is transforming the
nature of American race and ethnic categories, the changing shape
of higher education, and the experience of Americans of MiddleEastern descent.
CONTENTS
Section I - Framework Essay: Constructing Categories Of
Difference
What is Race?
What Is Sex? What Is Gender?
What Is Social Class?
What Is Sexual Orientation?
What is Disability?
Section II - Framework Essay: Experiencing Difference
Race and Ethnicity
Sex and Gender
Sexual Orientation
Social Class
Disability
Section III - Framework Essay: The Meaning Of Difference
Intersectionality
Law, Politics, and Policy
Language
Section IV - Framework Essay: Bridging Differences
120
Sociology
NEW
*9780078050527*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
GENDER 10/11
Bobby Hutchison
2010 / 272 pages
ISBN: 9780078050527
and Resilience
26. When Sex Hurts
Course Perspective
Theory in Action
32. Peer Marriage
Doing about It
Consequences
43. Fall Girls
Article Rating Form
CONTENTS
2. Framed before We Know It: How Gender Shapes Social Relations
Experiments
9. Gender Bender
Engineering
121
Sociology
Medical Sociology –
Readers
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN GENDER
4th Edition
ISBN: 9780073515298
CONTENTS
for Children?
Unit 5 From 9 to 5: Gender in the World of Work
Women’s Lives?
Workplace?
Societal Obstacles?
to Teens?
Constraints?
NEW
*9780073545660*
VIEWS ON BIOETHICAL
ISSUES
13th Edition
Carol Levine, United Hospital Fund
ISBN: 9780073545660
TAKING SIDES: BIOETHICAL ISSUES, 13/e presents current
com.
CONTENTS
Unit 1 Medical Decision Making
Issue 1. Is Informed Consent Still Central to Medical Ethics?
Issue 2. Should Truth-Telling Depend on the Patient’s Culture?
Issue 3. Does Direct-to-Consumer Drug Advertising Enhance Patient
Choice?
Unit 2 End-of-Life Dilemmas
Issue 4. Have Advanced Directives Failed?
Issue 5. Do Standard Medical Ethics Apply in Disaster Conditions?
Issue 6. Should Physicians Be Allowed to Assist in Patient Suicide?
Issue 7. Should Doctors Be Able to Refuse Demands for “Futile”
Treatment?
Unit 3 Choices in Reproduction
Issue 9. Should a Pregnant Woman Be Punished for Exposing Her
Fetus to Risk?
Unit 4 Children, Adolescents, and Bioethics
Issue 10. Should Adolescents Be Allowed to Make Their Own Lifeand-Death Decisions?
Issue 11. Is It Ethical to Use Steroids and Surgery to Stunt Disabled
Children’s Growth?
Issue 12. Should Vaccination for HPV Be Mandated for Teenage
Girls?
Unit 5 Genetics
Issue 13. Is Genetic Enhancement an Unacceptable Use of
Technology?
Issue 14. Are Experiments That Combine Animal and Human Genes
Ethical?
Unit 6 Human Experimentation
Issue 15. Should Prisoners Be Allowed to Participate in Research?
Issue 16. Should New Drugs Be Given to Patients Outside Clinical
Trials?
Unit 7 Bioethics and Public Policy
122
Sociology
Issue 17. Does Military Necessity Override Medical Ethics?
Issue 18. Should Performance-Enhancing Drugs Be Banned from
Sports?
Issue 19. Is It Ethical to Remove Patients’ Hearts for Transplantation
Immediately after Cardiac Death?
Issue 20. Should Pharmacists Be Allowed to Deny Prescriptions on
Grounds of Conscience?
Issue 21. Should Public Health Override Powers over Individual
Liberty in Combatting Bioterrorism?
NEW
*9780078127731*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
AGING 09/10
22nd Edition
Harold Cox, Indiana State University-Terre
Haute
Gerontology / Sociology
of Aging – Readers
ISBN: 9780078127731
NEW
*9780078050596*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING 10/11
23rd Edition
Harold Cox
2011 / 224 pages
ISBN: 9780078050596
for more details.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
AE_Aging_0910.pdf
Aging 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-selling
McGraw-Hill Aging textbooks by Hoyer/Roodin.
CONTENTS
Unit 1: The Phenomenon of Aging
1. Elderly Americans
2. New Age Thinking
3. Living Longer: Diet and Exercise
4. Living Healthy to 100
5. Will You Live to Be 100?
6. Faulty Fountains of Youth
Unit 2: The Quality of Later Life
7. Stop Smoking and Benefits Come Quickly
8. Life after Death
9. Lifetime Achievements
10. We Can Control How We Age
Unit 3: Societal Attitudes toward Old Age
11. Society Fears the Aging Process
12. A Healthy Mind, a Longer Life
14. The Under-Reported Impact of Age Discrimination and Its Threat
to Business Vitality
Unit 4: Problems and Potentials of Aging
15. Alzheimer’s—The Case for Prevention
16. Trust and Betrayal in the Golden Years
17. Elderly Americans at Highest Risk for Suicide: Few Prevention
Programs Target Their Needs, Sarah Skidmore
18. The Extent and Frequency of Abuse in the Lives of Older Women
and Their Relationship with Health Outcomes
123
Sociology
Unit 5: Retirement: American Dream or Dilemma?
19. Retire Righ
20. Money for Life
21. Old. Smart. Productive.
22. Low-Cost Retirement
23. Work/Retirement Choices and Lifestyle Patterns of Older
Americans
Unit 6: The Experience of Dying
24. Development of Hospice and Palliative Care in the United
States
26. Moving toward Peace: An Analysis of the Concept of a Good
Death
27. Mind Frames towards Dying and Factors Motivating Their Adoption
by Terminally Ill Elder
Unit 7: Living Environment in Later Life
28. Making Your House Work
29. The Nursing Home Culture-Change Movement: Recent Past,
Present, and Future Directions for Research
30. The Place of Assisted Living in Long-Term Care and Related
Service Systems
31. Declaration of Independents: Home Is Where You Want to Live
Forever. Here’s How
Unit 8: Social Policies, Programs, and Services for Older Americans
32. The Economic Conundrum of an Aging Population
33. Social Security’s 70th Anniversary: Surviving 20 Years of Reform
34. Age Wave
35. Coverage for All
36. Riding into the Sunset: The Geezer Threat
37. Paying for It
38. As Good as It Gets
39. Population Aging
Article Rating Form
Chapter 8 – Survivors: Understanding the Experience of Loss
Chapter 9 – Last Rites: Funerals and Body Disposition
Chapter 10 – Death in the Lives of Children and Adolescents
Chapter 11 – Death in the Lives of Adults
Chapter 12 – Suicide
Chapter 13 – Risks of Death in the Modern World
Chapter 14 – Beyond Death / After Life
Chapter 15 – The Path Ahead: Personal and Social Choices
Sociology of Death –
Readers
NEW
*9780078127670*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING,
DEATH, AND
BEREAVEMENT 09/10
11th Edition
ISBN: 9780078127670
Sociology of Death
THE LAST DANCE: ENCOUNTERING DEATH
AND DYING
8th Edition
Lynne Ann DeSpelder, Cabrillo College and Albert Lee Strickland
ISBN: 9780073405469
www.mhhe.com/despelder8e
The best-selling textbook in the field, The Last Dance offers an
interdisciplinary approach to the study of death and dying. Integrating
the experiential, scholarly, social, individual, emotional, and intellectual
dimensions of death and dying, the eighth edition of this acclaimed text
has been thoroughly revised to offer cutting-edge and comprehensive
coverage of death studies. Together with its companion volumes, this
new edition of The Last Dance provides solid grounding in theory and
research, as well as practical application to students’ lives.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 – Attitudes Toward Death: A Climate of Change
Chapter 2 – Learning About Death: The Influence of Sociocultural
Forces
Chapter 3 – Perspectives on Death: Cross-Cultural and Historical
Chapter 4 – Health Care Systems: Patients, Staff, and Institutions
Chapter 5 – Death Systems: Matters of Public Policy
Chapter 6 – Facing Death: Living with Life-Threatening Illness
Chapter 7 – End-of-Life Issues and Decisions
NEW TO THIS EDITION
AE_Dying_Death_and Bereavement_0910.pdf
CONTENTS
Lung Cancer
124
Sociology
Expected
Unit 5: Funerals
Unit 6: Bereavement
Article Rating Form
Urban Sociology
NEW
*9780078127717*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
URBAN SOCIETY
14th Edition
Myron Alfred Levine, Wright State UniversityDayton
ISBN: 9780078127717
CONTENTS
UNIT 1: Urban Growth, Decline, and Renaissance
1. Can Buffalo Ever Come Back?
2. Skipping the City for the Suburbs
3. Return to Center
4. Predatory Lending: Redlining in Reverse
5. Bridge Blockade after Katrina Remains Divisive Issue
UNIT 2: Gentrification, Globalization and the City
6. Movers & Shakers: How Immigrants Are Reviving Neighborhoods
Given up for Dead
7. Measuring Globalization
8. Microsoft’s Call-Center Business in India Gets an American
Accent
9. The Rise of the Creative Class, Richard Florida, The Rise of the
Creative Clas
10. Too Much Froth
11. The Gentry, Misjudged as Neighbors
UNIT 3: Competitive Pressures and Economic Development
12. WiFi Free-for-All
13. Throwaway Stadium
14. Skybox Skeptics
15. “A Lot of Hooey”: Heywood Sanders on Convention Center
Economics
16. Eminent Domain Revisited
17. Legislative and Judicial Reactions to Kelo: Eminent Domain’s
Continuing Role in Redevelopment
UNIT 4: Citizen Participation
18. Jane Jacobs’ Radical Legacy
19. Neighbor Power: Building Community the Seattle Way
20. New Life in Newark
125
Sociology
UNIT 5: School Choice and School Reform
21. The Performance of Charter Schools in Wisconsin
22. Charter Schools
23. First Principals
24. With More Choice Has Come Resegregation
25. Here Comes the Neighborhood, Damien Jackson
26. The UCLA Civil Rights Project State of Segregation: Fact Sheet,
2007
27. Joint Statement of Nine University-Based Civil Rights Centers on
Today’s Supreme Court Rulings on Voluntary School Desegregation:
McFarland v. Jefferson County Public Schools & Parents Involved in
Community Schools v. Seattle School District No. 1
UNIT 6: Policing and Crime
28. Broken Windows
29. How an Idea Drew People Back to Urban Life
UNIT 7: A Suburban Nation: Suburban Growth, Diversity, and the
Possibilities of a “New Urbanism” and a “New Regionalism”
30. The Six Suburban Eras of the United States
31. Patio Man and the Sprawl People: America’s Newest Suburbs
32. Affluent, but Needy (First Suburbs)
33. Principles of New Urbanism
34. Rocking-Chair Revival: Nostalgic Front Porch Makes a Comeback
in a New Century
35. HOPE VI and the New Urbanism: Eliminating Low-Income Housing
to Make Mixed-Income Communities
36. Regional Coalition-Building and the Inner Suburbs fit.
37. Is Regional Government the Answer?
UNIT 8: Toward Sustainable Cities and Suburbs?
38. Firebugs: Build It in California’s Foothills, and It Will Burn
39. New German Community Models Car-Free Living
40. Traffic: Why It’s Getting Worse, What Government Can Do
41. Is Congestion Pricing Ready for Prime Time?
UNIT 9: The Future of Cities and Suburbs: The United States
and the World
42. Demolishing Delhi: World Class City in the Making
43. Femicide in Ciudad Juárez: What Can Planners Do?
44. Are Europe’s Cities Better?
Article Rating Form
Race and Ethnicity
AMERICAN ETHNICITY: THE DYNAMICS
AND CONSEQUENCES OF DISCRIMINATION
6th Edition
Adalberto Jr Aguirre and Jonathan H Turner of
University of California - Riverside
2009 / Softcover
ISBN: 9780073404219
http://www.mhhe.com/aguirre6e
American Ethnicity is a brief text that provides an accessible
introduction to the dynamics of racial and ethnic relations. Key
concepts and theories are summarized, and the authors develop a
simple theoretical framework that guides the presentation of data
on each of the prominent ethnic groups in America. As a result,
this book examines each ethnic group from the same perspective,
allowing students to compare the dynamics of discrimination against
African Americans, Native Americans, Asian and Pacific Island
Americans, white ethnic Americans, and Latinos. The sixth edition
offers expanded theoretical framework through the inclusion of the
Social Identity Theory.
CONTENTS
Preface
Chapter 1. Ethnicity and Ethnic Relations
Chapter 2. Explaining Ethnic Relations
Chapter 3. The Anglo-Saxon Core and Ethnic Antagonism
Chapter 4. White Ethnic Americans
Chapter 5. African Americans
Chapter 6. Native Americans
Chapter 7. Latinos
Chapter 8. Asian and Pacific Island Americans
Chapter 9. Arab Americans
Chapter 10. The Future of Ethnicity in America
126
Sociology
RETHINKING THE COLOR LINE: READINGS
IN RACE AND ETHNICITY
4th Edition
Charles A. Gallagher, La Salle University
ISBN: 9780073404271
http://www.mhhe.com/gallagher4e
Rethinking the Color Line is a user-friendly text that does not sacrifice
intellectual or theoretical rigor. This anthology of current research
examines contemporary issues and explores new approaches to the
study of race and ethnic relations. The featured readings effectively
engage students by helping them understand theories and concepts,
and encourage active learning in the classroom all while providing
relevance for students from all ethnic, racial, cultural, and economic
backgrounds. The new fourth edition features 8 new readings as well
as a new two-color design that brings attention to the “Seeing the
Big Picture” and “Questions to Consider” boxes found throughout
the text.
CONTENTS
Introduction: Rethinking the Color Line: Understanding How
Boundaries Shift
Part I: Sorting By Color: Why We Attach Meaning To Race
1. How Our Skins Got Their Color
2. Drawing the Color Line
3. Racial Formations
4. Theoretical Perspectives in Race and Ethnic Relations
5. Racialized Social Systems: Understanding Racism
6. An Overview of Trends in Social and Economic Well-Being
7. The Color of Health in the United States
8. Transformative Assets, The Racial Wealth Gap and the American
Dream
9. Defining Race: Comparative Perspectives
10. A Tour of Indian People and Indian Lands
11. Asian American Panethnicity: Contemporary National and
Transnational Possibilities
12. Beyond Black and White: Remaking Race in America
13. Color Blind Privilege: The Social and Political Functions of Erasing
the Color Line in Post Race America
14. The Ideology of Colorblindness
15. The Possibility of a New Racial Hierarchy in the Twenty-FirstCentury United States
Part II: Prejudice, Discrimination, and Racism
16. Race Prejudice as a Sense of Group Position
Seeing the Big Picture: Racism: Group Position or Individual Belief?
17. Discrimination and the American Creed
18. Race and Civil Rights Pre-September 11, 2001: The Targeting
of Arabs and Muslims
19. The Possessive Investment in Whiteness
20. Laissez-Fair Racism, Racial Inequality and the Role of the Social
Sciences
21. Residential Segregation and Neighborhood Conditions in U.S.
Metropolitan Areas
22. The Code of the Streets
23. Environmental Justice in the 21st Century: Race Still Matters
24. Race, Religion, and the Color Line (or is that the Color Wall?)
25. Why Are There No Supermarkets in my Neighborhood: The Long
Search for Fresh Fruit, Produce and Inexpensive Healthy Food
Part III: Racialized Opportunity in Social Institutions
26. No Equal Justice: The Color of Punishment
27. Everyday Racism on the Police Force
28. .…and the Poor Get Prison
29. The Mark of a Criminal Record
30. Kristin v. Aisha; Brad v. Rasheed: What’s in a Name and How it
Effects Getting a Job
31. When the Pot Boils Over; The Irish, Jews, Blacks and Koreans
of New York
32. “There’s No Shame in My Game”: Status and Stigma Among
Harlem’s Working Poor
33. Sweatshops in Sunset Park: A Variation of Late Twentieth-Century
Chinese Garment Shops in New York City
34. Hispanics in the American South and the Transformation of the
Poultry Industry
35. Broadcast News Portrayal of Minorities: Accuracy in Reporting
36. Television and the Politics of Representation
37. Distorted Reality: Hispanic Characters in TV Entertainment
38. Winnebagos, Cherokees, Apaches and Dakotas: The Persistence
of Stereotyping of American Indians in American Advertising
39. Sport in America: The New Racial Stereotypes
Part IV: How America’s Complexion Changes
40. The Melting Pot and the Color Line
41. Who are the Other African Americans? Contemporary African and
Caribbean Immigrants in the United States
42. The Arab Immigrant Experience
43. Ethnic and Racial Identities of Second-Generation Black
Immigrants in New York City
44. Guess Who’s Been Coming to Dinner? Trends in Interracial
Marriage over the 20th Century
45. Captain Kirk Kisses Lieutenant Uhura: Interracial Intimacies
From Hollywood
46. Discovering Racial Borders
47. Redrawing the Color-Line? : The Problems and Possibilities of
Multiracial Families and Group Making
48. Closing the Racial Inequality Gap: A Plan For Action
49. Ten Things You Can Do To Improve Race Relations
Appendix: Race by the Numbers—America’s Racial Report Card
127
Sociology
Race and Ethnicity –
Readers
NEW
*9780078127625*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: RACE
AND ETHNIC RELATIONS
17th Edition
John A Kromkowski, Catholic University of
America
ISBN: 9780078127625
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v Correlation Guide: ww.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/
AE_Race_and_Ethnic_Relations_17e.pdf
Race and Ethnic Relations, 17/e with the corresponding chapters in
two of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by Aguirre/
Turner and Kottak/Kozaitis.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1: Local Experiences of Racial and Ethnic Identity,
Communities, and Diversity in America
1. Cambridge Makes History
2. Chicago and the Irish
3. `Bursting with Pride’ in Little Italy
4. Parishes in Transition: Holding on While Letting Go and Old ¬Order
Changing on South Bend’s West Side
5. In Manassas, the Medium Is the Issue
6. In Brooklyn, an Evolving Ethnicity
7. Mélange Cities
8. The Hotel Africa
9. The Fixer
UNIT 2: The Legal Construction of Diversity and Disparity
Section A
10. Racial Restrictions in the Law of Citizenship
11. Dred Scott v. Sandford
12. Brown et al. v. Board of Education of Topeka et al
13. How the GOP Conquered the South
14. `Bakke’ Set a New Path to Diversity for Colleges
15. Shaare Tefila Congregation v. CobbandSaint Francis College v.
Al-Khazraji
Section B
16. Historical Discrimination in the Immigration Laws
17. The Diversity Visa Lottery—A Cycle of Unintended Consequences
in United States Immigration Policy
UNIT 3: The Demography of Ethnicity
18. Ancestry 2000: Census 2000 Brief
19. Minority Population Tops 100 Million and More than 300 Counties
Now “Majority-Minority”
20. Irish-American Heritage Month (March) and St. Patrick’s Day
(March 17) 2008
21. A Profile of Today’s Italian Americans: A Report Based on the Year
2000 Census Compiled by the Sons of Italy
22. Polonia in Numbers: How Many of Us Are out There?
23. Still Unmelted after All These Years
UNIT 4: Indigenous Ethnic Groups
24. Who Is a Native American?
25. American Indian and Alaska Native Heritage Month: November
2008
26. Tribal Philanthropy Thrives
UNIT 5: African Americans
27. Black History Month: February 2008, U.S. Department of
Commerce
28. Who Is an African American?
29. That’s a Bare-Knuckles Kiss
30. African American Philanthropy
31. For Black Politicians, a Rocky Road but a Steady Climb
UNIT 6: Hispanic/Latina/o Americans
32. Inventing Hispanics: A Diverse Minority Resists Being Labeled
33. Hispanic Heritage Month and Cinco De Mayo
34. Minority-Owned Firms More Likely to Export
UNIT 7: Asian Americans
35. To Be Asian in America
36. Lands of Opportunity
37. Asian/Pacific American Heritage Month and Revenues for AsianOwned Firms Up 24 Percent
UNIT 8: European and Mediterranean Ethnics
38. Miracle: American Polonia
39. This Writer’s Life: Gay Talese, Michael Luongo, Ambassador: The
National Italian American Foundation
40. Forces That Shape Ethnic Opinion: What Ethnic Americans
Really Think
41. Neither Natural Allies Nor Irreconcilable Foes: Alliance Building
Efforts between African Americans and Immigrants
42. The Study of Jewish American History and Dutch American History
in Several Settings
UNIT 9: The Presidential Election 2008
43. A More Perfect Union
44. Pulling the Race Card from the Deck
45. Polonia and the Elections: Why We Matter?
46. White Seniors Energize McCain Campaign
47. Is Obama the End of Black Politics?
UNIT 10: Understanding International Aspects of Ethnic
Relations
48. Obama & Israel
49. American Self-Interest and the Response to Genocide
50. Never Underestimate the Power of Ethnicity in Iraq
51. Is Ethnic Conflict Inevitable?
Article Rating Form
128
Sociology
Political Sociology
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN RACE
AND ETHNICITY
7th Edition
Raymond D’Angelo, Saint Joseph’s College
Herbert Douglas, Rowan University
ISBN: 9780073515373
NEW
*9780078111563*
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN RACE AND ETHNICITY,
skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an
issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing
material is available online for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES
of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by our student
website, www.mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
Part 1 Race, Ethnicity and American Identity
Issue 1. Do Americans Need a Common Identity?
Issue 2. Does Immigration Contribute to a Better America?
Issue 3. Do Recent Immigration Trends Challenge Existing Ideas of
America’s White Identity?
Issue 4. Is Today’s Immigration Debate Racist?
Part 2 Race Still Matters: Prejudice, Discrimination, and Racial
Minorities
Issue 5. Is Race Prejudice a Product of Group Position?
Issue 6. Do Minorities and Whites Engage in Self-segregation?
Issue 7. Is the Emphasis on a Color-Blind Society an Answer to
Racism?
Issue 8. Is the Claim of White Skin Privilege a Myth? ?
Part 3 Persistence of Discrimination
Issue 9. Is Racism a Permanent Feature of American Society?
Issue 10. Is Racial Profiling Defensible Public Policy?
Issue 11. Did Hurricane Katrina Expose Racism in New Orleans?
Issue 12. Is the Reservation the Only Source of Community for Native
Americans?
Part 4 Persistent Conflicts: Dynamics of a Changing Population
Issue 13. Are America’s Public Schools Resegregating?
Issue 14. Is There Room for Bilingual Education in American
Schools?
Issue 15. Is It Time to De-emphasize Diversity?
Issue 16. Are Asian Americans a Model Minority?
Part 5 Policy Issues for the Twenty-First Century
Issue 17. Does Latino Immigration Threaten African American
Workers?
Issue 18. Should Race Be Included Among the Many Factors
Considered for Admission to Selective Colleges?
Issue 19. Is Affirmative Action Necessary to Achieve Racial Equality
in the United States Today?
Issue 20. Is Now the Time for Reparations for African Americans?
WHO RULES AMERICA?
POWER, POLITICS, AND
SOCIAL CHANGE
6th Edition
G William Domhoff, University of CaliforniaSanta Cruz
ISBN: 9780078111563
Drawing from a power elite perspective and the latest empirical data,
this classic text is an invaluable tool for teaching students about how
power operates in U.S. society. Domhoff argues that the owners
and top-level managers in large income-producing properties are
far and away the dominant figures in the U.S. Their corporations,
banks, and agribusinesses come together as a corporate community
that dominates the federal government in Washington and their real
estate, construction, and land development companies form growth
coalitions that dominate most local governments. By providing
empirical evidence for his argument, Domhoff encourages students
to think critically about the power structure in American society and
its implications for our democracy.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v Updated content throughout reflects the latest research findings
on the structure and distribution of power in the U.S., new scholarship
on the role of public opinion, the most recent government statistics
on key power issues, new cabinet level appointments for 2008, and
the most up-to-date campaign finance data.
v A reorganized and updated Chapter 4, The Policy-Planning
Network, provides clearer and more cohesive coverage, up-to-date
data on the role of foundations in the inner city, and expanded
material on the importance of foundations to middle-class charitable
and educational groups.
v Expanded perspectives on problem solving include additional
emphasis on practical solutions to the contemporary issues raised
in the text as well as more on the difficulties of progressive social
change and possible answers.
v Expanded perspectives on problem solving include additional
emphasis on practical solutions to the contemporary issues raised
in the text as well as more on the difficulties of progressive social
change and possible answers.
v
Stronger emphasis on Globalization throughout the book.
CONTENTS
Introduction
1. Class and Power in America
2. The Corporate Community
3. The Corporate Community and the Upper Class
4. The Policy-Planning Network
5. The Role of Public Opinion
6. Parties and Elections
7. How the Power Elite Dominates Government
8. The Big Picture
9. Potential Challenges to Class Domination
Appendix A: Indicators of Upper-Class Standing
129
Sociology
NEW
*9780078127816*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
DEVELOPING WORLD 10/11
20th Edition
Robert J Griffiths, University of NCGreensboro
2010 / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780078127816
24. Will the Kenyan Settlement Hold?
25. Mexico’s Drug Wars Get Brutal
26. Dangerous Liaisons
27. Call in the Blue Helmets
Unit 4: Political Change in the Developing World
28. Asia’s Democracy Backlash
29. India Held Back
30. `Bring Me My Machine Gun’
31. Who Will Speak for Islam?
32. Free at Last?
33. Iran in Search of Itself
34. Lula’s Brazil
35. An Empty Revolution
Unit 5: Population, Resources, Environment, and Health
36. Booms, Busts, and Echoes
37. Emerging Water Shortages
38. Water Warriors
39. Soot from Third World Stoves Is New Target in Climate Fight
40. Population, Human Resources, Health, and the Environment
41. Protecting Climate Refugees
42. Reversal of Fortune
Unit 6: Women and Development
43. Women’s Rights as Human Rights
45. Education: It’s Not Just about the Boys. Get Girls into School
46. Women in the Middle East: Progress and Backlash
47. Women in Developing Countries 300 Times More Likely to Die
in Childbirth
48. Recession Hits Women in Developing Countries
Article Rating Form
NEW TO THIS EDITION
AE_Health_1011.pdf
Health 10/11 with the corresponding chapters in three of our bestselling McGraw-Hill Health textbooks by Hahn et al., Payne et al.,
and Insel/Roth.
CONTENTS
Unit 1: Understanding the Developing World
1. The New Face of Development
2. How Development Leads to Democracy
3. The Ideology of Development
4. Africa’s Village of Dreams
5. The Case against the West
6. Development as Poison
Unit 2: Political Economy and the Developing World
7. Industrial Revolution 2.0
8. The Toxins Trickle Downward
9. The Poor Man’s Burden
10. Social Justice and Global Trade
11. Cotton: The Huge Moral Issue
12. Across Globe, Empty Bellies Bring Rising Anger
13. The Politics of Hunger
14. The New Colonialists
15. Power to the People
16. The Micromagic of Microcredit
17. The Coming Revolution in Africa
Unit 3: Conflict and Instability
18. The End of War?
19. Fixing a Broken World
20. The Roots of Failure in Afghanistan
21. Pakistan’s Perilous Voyage
22. The Shiite “Threat” Revisited
23. The Most Dangerous Place in the World
130
Sociology
Social Inequality /
Social Stratification
THE SOCIAL CONSTRUCTION OF
DIFFERENCE AND INEQUALITY: RACE,
CLASS, GENDER AND SEXUALITY
4th Edition
SOCIAL STRATIFICATION AND INEQUALITY
7th Edition
Tracy E Ore, St Cloud State University
ISBN: 9780073380087
Website: http://mhhe.com/ore4
Harold R Kerbo, California Polytechnic State University
ISBN: 9780073380070
Praised for its thorough research and scholarship, Social Stratification
and Inequality provides a comprehensive, up-to-date exploration of
the global economic and social divisions in human societies. While
the book is grounded in the nature of social stratification in the United
States, this edition maintains a commitment to keeping a global
perspective. Comparative information on the United States and other
countries and an overview of changes in social stratification, gives
readers a global perspective on class conflict.
This anthology examines the social construction of race, class, gender,
and sexuality and the institutional bases for these relations. While
other texts discuss various forms of stratification and the impact of
these on members of marginalized groups, Ore provides a thorough
discussion of how such systems of stratification are formed and
perpetuated and how forms of stratification are interconnected. Critical
thinking questions at the end of each reading and part opening essays
aid students in understanding how the material relates to their lives
and how their own attitudes, actions, and perspectives may serve to
perpetuate a stratified system. 13 new readings have been added
focusing on the experiences of immigrants, contemporary issues in
social institutions, current examples of how the media portrays events
and much more.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Perspectives and Concepts in the Study of Social
Stratification
Chapter 2: Dimensions of Inequality in the United States
Chapter 3: Social Stratification in Human Societies: The History of
Inequality
Part Two: Explanations of Social Stratification: Stratification
Theories
Chapter 4: Social Stratification Theory: Early Statements
Chapter 5: Modern Theories of Social Stratification
Part Three: The American Class Structure
Chapter 6: The Upper Class
Chapter 7: The Corporate Class
Chapter 8: The Middle and Working Classes
Chapter 9: Poverty and the Political Economy of Welfare
Chapter 10: Gender Stratification and Inequalities: The Persistence
of Ascription
Chapter 11: Inequalities of Race and Ethnicity:The Persistence of
Ascription
Part Four: The Process of Social Stratification
Chapter 12: Social Mobility: Class Ascription and Achievement
Chapter 13: The Process of Legitimation
Part Five: Social Stratification Beyond the United States
Chapter 14: The World Stratification System:Dominance and
Competition Among Core Nations
Chapter 15: Social Stratification in Japan
Chapter 16: Social Stratification in Germany
Chapter 17: World Stratification and Globalization: The Poor of This
Earth
Preface
Part I: Constructing Differences
Race & Ethnicity
1. Racial Formations- Michael Omi and Howard Winant
2. Optional Ethnicities: For Whites Only?- Mary C. Waters
4. How Jews Became White Folks and What that Says about Race
in America- Karen Brodkin
Social Class
5. Race, Wealth, and Equality- Melvin L. Oliver and Thomas M. Shapiro
6. Media Magic: Making Class Invisible- Gregory Mantsios
*7. Doubly Divided: The Racial Wealth Gap- Meizhu Lui
*8. Getting Corporations off the Public Dole- Janice Shields
Sex & Gender
9. The Social Construction of Gender- Judith Lorber
*10. The Five Sexes, Revisited- Anne Fausto-Sterling
11. The Transgender Paradigm Shift toward Free Expression- Holly
Boswell
12. Masculinity as Homophobia: Fear, Shame, and Silence in the
Construction of Gender Identity- Michael S. Kimmel
Sexuality
13. The Invention of Heterosexuality- Jonathan Ned Katz
*14. Sexuality and Gender in Children’s Daily Worlds- Barrie Thorne
and Zella Luria
15. Sexual Identity and Bisexual Identities: The Struggle for SelfDescription in a Changing Sexual Landscape- Paula C. Rust
16. Naming All the Parts- Kate Bornstein
Part II: Maintaining Inequalities: Systems of Oppression &
Privilege
Social Institutions
Family
17. Our Mothers’ Grief: Racial Ethnic Women and the Maintenance
of Families- Bonnie Thornton Dill
18. Families on the Fault Line: America’s Working Class Speaks About
the Family, the Economy, Race, and Ethnicity- Lillian B. Rubin
19. Stability and Change in Chicano Men’s Family Lives- Scott
Coltrane
*20. Gay and Lesbian Families Are Here- Judith Stacey
Education
21. Savage Inequalities: Children in America’s Schools- Jonathan
Kozol
22. Preparing for Power: Cultural Capital and Curricula in America’s
Elite Boarding Schools- Peter W. Cookson, Jr and Caroline Hodges
Persell
http://www.mhhe.com/kerbo7e
131
Sociology
23. Civilize Them with a Stick- Mary Crow Dog and Richard Erdoes
24. Missing in Interaction- Myra Sadker and David Sadker
*25. Schools and the Social Control of Sexuality- Melinda Miceli
Work & the Economy
26. Jobless Ghettos: The Social Implications of the Disappearance
of Work in Segregated Neighborhoods- William J. Wilson
27. “We’d Love to Hire Them But?”: The Meaning of Race for
Employers- Joleen Kirschenman and Kathryn M. Neckerman
28. The Glass Escalator: Hidden Advantages for Men in the ‘Female’
Professions- Christine L. Williams
29. Cause of Death: Inequality- Alejandro Reuss
The State & Public Policy
*30. Welfare Reform, Family Hardship, and Women of Color- Linda
Burnham
*31. Beyond Crime and Punishment- Bruce Western and Becky Petit
32. A Half Century of Class and Gender in American Television
Domestic Sitcoms- Richard Butsch
33. The Effects of Affirmative Action on Other Stakeholders- Barbara
Reskin
34. The Possessive Investment in Whiteness: Racialized Social
Democracy and the “White” Problem in American Studies- George
Lipsitz
Media
35. A Half Century of Class and Gender in American TV Domestic
Sitcoms- Richard Butsch
36. Distorted Reality: Hispanic Characters in TV Entertainment- Robert
*37. Gay Characters in Conventional Spaces: Will and Grace and
the Situation Comedy Genre- Kathleen Battles and Wendy HiltonMorrow
*38. Metahors Matter: Disaster Myths, Media Frames, and Their
Consequences in Hurricane Katrina- Kathleen Tierney, Christine
Bevc, and Erica Kuligowski
Language & Culture
39. Racism in the English Language- Robert B. Moore
40. Self, Identity & the Naming Question: Reflections on the Language
of Disability- Irving Kenneth Zola
41. How to Tame a Wild Tongue- Gloria Anzaldúa
42. The Dark Side of Sports Symbols- Stanley D. Eitzen and Maxine
Baca Zinn
Violence & Social Control
43. Where Race and Gender Meet: Racism, Hate Crimes, and
Pornography- Helen Zia
44. Fraternities and Collegiate Rape Culture: Why are Some
Fraternities More Dangerous Places for Women?- A. Ayres Boswell
& Joan Z. Spade
45. The Construction of Masculinity and the Triad of Men’s ViolenceMichael Kaufman
46. Homophobia as a Weapon of Sexism- Suzanne Pharr
Part III: Experiencing Difference & Inequality in Everyday Life
47. Making Systems of Privilege Visible- Stephanie M. Wildman with
Adrienne D. Davis.
48. “Yes, I Follow Islam, But I’m Not a Terrorist”- Nada El Sawy
49. A Dozen Demons- Ellis Cose
*50. Always Running- La Vida Loca, Gang Days in L.A.- Luis
Rodriguez
51. The Story of My Body- Judith Ortiz Cofer
53. “Gee, You Don’t Seem Like An Indian From the Reservation”Barbara Cameron
*54. Living Fearlessly With and Within Differences: My Search for
Identity Beyond Categories and Contradictions- Shefali MilczarekDesai
55. Nickel and Dimed: On (Not) Getting by in America- Barbara
Ehrenreich
56. I Am Your Welfare Reform- Annie Downey
57. Learning to Fight- Geoffrey Canada
58. Bisexuality, Feminism, Men, and Me- Robyn Ochs
Part IV: Resistance & Social Change
59. Toward a New Vision: Race, Class, and Gender as Categories of
Analysis and Connection- Patricia Hill Collins
60. Cultural Resistance: Reconstructing Our Own Images- Yen Le
Espritu
*61.Good for the Hood?- Anmol Chaddha
62. Seeing More Than Black & White: Latinos, Racism, and the
Cultural Divides- Elizabeth Martinez
*63. How White People Can Serve as Allies to People of Color in the
Struggle to End Racism- Paul Kivel
64. Dismantling Noah’s Ark: Gender and Equality- Judith Lorber
*65. Voices of a New Movimiento- Roberto Lovato
Index
THE MEANING OF DIFFERENCE: AMERICAN
CONSTRUCTIONS OF RACE, SEX AND
GENDER, SOCIAL CLASS, AND SEXUAL
ORIENTATION
5th Edition
Karen E Rosenblum, George Mason University
Toni-Michelle C Travis, George Mason University
2009 / 544 pages
ISBN: 9780073380056
Website: http://mhhe.com/rosenblum5
The Meaning of Difference focuses on the social construction of
difference as it operates in American formulations of race and ethnicity,
sex and gender, social class, sexual orientation, and disability. The
conceptual structure of this text-reader comes from four framework
essays addressing the construction of difference, the experience
of difference, the social meaning of difference, and social action
that might bridge differences. Each framework essay is followed
by a set of readings selected for readability, conceptual depth, and
applicability to a variety of statuses. Boxed inserts throughout offer
first-person accounts from real people, many of them students.
This edition features an expanded focus on disability and 29 new
readings, including articles on how immigration is transforming the
nature of American race and ethnic categories, the changing shape
of higher education, and the experience of Americans of MiddleEastern descent.
CONTENTS
Section I - Framework Essay: Constructing Categories of
Difference
What is Race?
What Is Sex? What Is Gender?
What Is Social Class?
What Is Sexual Orientation?
What is Disability?
Section II - Framework Essay: Experiencing Difference
Race and Ethnicity
Sex and Gender
Sexual Orientation
Social Class
Disability
Section III - Framework Essay: The Meaning of Difference
Intersectionality
Law, Politics, and Policy
Language
Section IV - Framework Essay: Bridging Differences
132
Sociology
Sociological Theory
CLASSICAL SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY
5th Edition
George Ritzer, University of Maryland–College Park
2008 / 552 pages
ISBN: 9780073528175
NEW
*9780078026652*
CLASSICAL SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY
6th Edition
George Ritzer, University of Maryland—College Park
2011 / 544 pages
ISBN: 9780078026652
CONTENTS
NEW
*9780078111679*
SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY
8th Edition
2011 / 768
ISBN: 9780078111679
The fifth edition of Classical Sociological Theory by George Ritzer,
one of the foremost authorities on sociological theory, gives readers a
comprehensive overview of the major classical theorists and schools
of sociological thought. Key theories are integrated with biographical
sketches of theorists, and theories are placed in their historical and
intellectual context. This helps students to better understand the
original works of classical authors as well as to compare and contrast
classical theories.
Biographical and Autobiographical Sketches
Preface
Part I. Introduction To Sociological Theory
Chapter 1. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Early
Years
Chapter 2. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Later
Years
Part II: Classical Sociological Theory
Chapter 3. Alexis de Tocqueville
Chapter 4. August Comte
Chapter 5. Herbert Spencer
Chapter 6. Karl Marx
Chapter 7. Emile Durkheim
Chapter 8. Max Weber
Chapter 9. Georg Simmel
Chapter 10. Early Women Sociologists and Classical Sociological
Theory, 1830-1930
Chapter 11. W.E.B. DuBois
Chapter 12. Thorstein Veblen
Chapter 13. Karl Mannheim
Chapter 14. George Herbert Mead
Chapter 15. Alfred Schutz
Chapter 16. Talcott Parsons
References
Permissions Acknowlegments
Index
133
Sociology
MODERN SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY
7th Edition
SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY
7th Edition
George Ritzer, University of Maryland–College Park
ISBN: 9780073404103
ISBN: 9780071101776 [IE]
Available: May 2007
George Ritzer, University of Maryland-College Park
2008 / 816 pages
ISBN: 9780073528182
ISBN: 9780071284066 [IE]
The seventh edition of Modern Sociological Theory by George Ritzer,
one of the foremost authorities on sociological theory, gives readers
a comprehensive overview of the major contemporary schools of
sociological thought. Key theories are integrated with biographical
intellectual context. This helps students to better understand the original
works and helps them appreciate the diversity of contemporary theory.
The seventh edition of Sociological Theory by George Ritzer, one
of the foremost authorities on sociological theory, gives readers
a comprehensive overview of the major theorists and schools of
sociological thought. Key theories are integrated with biographical
intellectual context. This helps students to better understand the
original works of classical and modern theorists as well as to compare
and contrast the latest substantive theories.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Early
Years
Chapter 2. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Later
Years <BR
Part II: Modern Sociologial Theory: The Major Schools
Chapter 3. Structural Functionalism, Neofunctionalism, and Conflict
Theory
Chapter 4. Varieties of Neo-Marxian Theory
Chapter 5. Systems Theory
Chapter 6. Symbolic Interactionism
Chapter 7. Ethnomethodology
Chapter 8. Exchange, Network, and Rational Choice Theories
Chapter 9. Modern Feminist Theory
Part III: Recent Integrative Developments in Sociological
Theory
Chapter 10. Micro-Macro and Agency-Structure Integration
Part IV: From Modern to Postmodern Social Theory
Chapter 11. Contemporary Theories of Modernity
Chapter 12. Globalization Theory
Chapter 13. Structuralism, Poststructuralism, and the Emergence of
Postmodern Social Theory
Chapter 14. Cutting Edge Developments in Contemporary Theory
Appendix: Sociological Metatheorizing and a Metatheoretical Schema
for Analyzing Sociological Theory
CONTENTS
Part I: Classical Sociological Theory
Chapter 1: A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Early Years
Chapter 2: Karl Marx
Chapter 3: Emile Durkheim
Chapter 4: Max Weber
Chapter 5: Georg Simmel
Part II: Modern Sociological Theory: The Major Schools
Chapter 6: A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Later
Years
Chapter 7: Structural Functionalism, Neofunctionalism, and Conflict
Theory
Chapter 8: Varieties of Neo-Marxian Theory
Chapter 9: Systems Theory
Chapter 10: Symbolic Interactionism
Chapter 11: Ethnomethodology
Chapter 12: Exchange, Network, and Rational Choice Theories
Chapter 13: Contemporary Feminist Theory
Part III: Recent Integrative Developments in Sociological
Theory
Chapter 14: Micro-Macro Integration and Agency-Structure
Integration
Part IV: From Modern to Postmodern Social Theory (and
Beyond)
Chapter 15: Contemporary Theories of Modernity
Chapter 16: Globalization Theory
Chapter 17: Structuralism, Poststructuralism, and the Emergence of
Postmodern Social Theory
Appendix: Sociological Metatheorizing and a Metatheoretical Schema
for Analyzing Sociological Theory
134
Sociology
NEW
CONTEMPORARY SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY
AND ITS CLASSICAL ROOTS: THE BASICS
2nd Edition
*9780073404196*
2007 / 320 pages
ISBN: 9780072997590 (No Selling Rights)
ISBN: 9780071107327 [IE]
THE DISCOVERY OF
SOCIETY
8th Edition
Randell Collins, University of Pennsylvania
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/ritzer2
CONTENTS
Chapter 2. Classical Theories-I
Chapter 3. Classical Theories-II
Chapter 4. Contemporary Grand Theories-I
Chapter 5. Contemporary Grand Theories-II
Chapter 6. Contemporary Theories of Everyday Life
Chapter 7. Contemporary Integrative Theories
Chapter 8. Contemporary Feminist Theories (by Patricia Madoo
Lengermann and Jill Niebrugge)
Chapter 9. Postmodern Grand Theories
Chapter 10. Globalization Theory
ISBN: 9780073404196
Available: April 2009
NEW TO THIS EDITION
contemporary life.
Sociological Theory –
Readers
CONTENTS
NEW
*9780078111556*
READINGS IN SOCIAL THEORY
6th Edition
James Farganis, Vassar College
2011 / 448 pages
ISBN: 9780078111556
and Mead
Parsons
Index
135
Sociology
Sociology of Women
FEMINIST FRONTIERS
8th Edition
Verta Taylor and Leila J Rupp of University of California-Santa Barbar
Nancy Whittier, Smith College
ISBN: 9780073404301
WOMEN’S VOICES, FEMINIST VISIONS:
CLASSIC AND CONTEMPORARY READINGS
4th Edition
www.mhhe.com/taylorff8e
Susan Shaw and Janet Lee of Oregon State
University
ISBN: 9780073512280
www.mhhe.com/shaw4e
Women’s Voices is an introductory women’s studies reader crafted to
include a balance of recent contemporary readings with historical and
classic pieces. This student-friendly text provides short, accessible
readings reflecting the diversity of women’s experiences. Chapter
introductions provide background information on each chapter’s topic,
including explanations of key concepts and ideas and references to
the subsequent reading selections. This new edition includes revised
chapter framework essays that reflect the most up-to-date research
and theory in the field.
CONTENTS
Preface
1 Women’s Studies: Perspectives and Practices
2 Systems of Privilege and Inequality in Women’s Lives
3 Learning Gender in a Diverse Society
4 Sex, Power, and Intimacy
5 Inscribing Gender on the Body
6 Health and Reproductive Rights
7 Family Systems, Family Lives
8 Women’s Work Inside and Outside the Home
9 Women Confronting and Creating Culture
10 Resisting Violence Against Women
11 State, Law, and Social Policy
12 Religion and Spirituality in Women’s Lives
13 Activism, Change, and Feminist Futures
Suggestions for Further Reading
Credits CIndex I-
The most widely used anthology of feminist writings and the first to
incorporate issues of sexual identity and sexual diversity, Feminist
Frontiers has stood the test of time. With both classic and contemporary
readings on cutting-edge topics that cut across disciplinary and
generational lines, this text presents the full diversity of women’s
lives, exploring commonalities as well as interconnected differences.
Feminist Frontiers offers analyses of the causes and consequences
of gender inequality in interaction with class, race, ethnicity, sexuality,
ability, and nationality. This anthology also introduces students to
feminist theory and methodology. This edition maintains consistent
coverage of diverse ethnicities and a global perspective, with greater
attention to transgender issues and disability.
CONTENTS
Preface
Section One: Diversity and Difference
Section Two: Theoretical Perspectives
Part Two: Gender, Culture, and Socialization
Section Three: Representation, Language, and Culture
Section Four: Socialization
Part Three: Social Organization of Gender
Section Five: Work
Section Six: Families
Section Seven: Sexualities
Section Eight: Bodies
Section Nine: Violence against Women
Part Four: Social Change
Section Ten: Global Politics and the State
Section Eleven: Social Protest and the Feminist Movement
136
Sociology
Sociology of Gender
RECONSTRUCTING GENDER: A
MULTICULTURAL ANTHOLOGY
5th Edition
Estelle Disch, University of Mass-Boston
ISBN: 9780073380063
Website: http://mhhe.com/disch5
Reconstructing Gender is an anthology that addresses the
contemporary experiences from a variety of women and men.
Drawing from a wide range of sources including research articles,
critical essays, and personal narratives, Disch has chosen accessible,
engaging, and provocative readings that represent many perspectives
and experiences. Eleven part-opening introductions identify important
issues in the general field of study, describe the readings, remind the
reader about some of the central themes emerging throughout the
book, and raise questions for students to consider.
CONTENTS
* indicates new reading
General Introduction
Part I: It’s not just about Gender
1. The Puerto Rican Dummy and the Merciful Son, Martín Espada
2. From Nothing, A Consciousness, Helen Zia
3. The Past is Ever Present: Recognizing the New Racism, Patricia
Hill Collins
4. Angry Women Are Building: Issues and Struggles Facing American
Indian Women Today, Paula Gunn Allen
5. “J.A.P.”-Slapping: The Politics of Scapegoating, Ruth Atkin and
Adrienne Rich
*6. Latinas in the Fault Lines of Citizenship, Alejandra Marchevsky
and Jeanne Theoharis
7. White Privilege: Unpacking the Invisible Knapsack, Peggy
McIntosh
8. Controlled or Autonomous: Identity and the Experience of the
Network, Women Living Under Muslim Laws, Farida Shaheed
*9. Under and (Inside) Western Eyes: At the Turn of the Century,
Chandra Talpade Mohanty
10. Patriarchy, the System: An It, Not a He, a Them or an Us, Allan
Johnson
Part II: Gender Socialization
11. The Social Construction of Gender, Judith Lorber
12. Boyhood, Organized Sports, and the Construction of Masculinities,
Michael A. Messner
13. Who’s the Fairest of Them All?, Jill Nelson
14. He Defies You Still: The Memoirs of a Sissy, Tommi Avicolli
15. Growing Up Hidden, Linnea Due
*16. Masculinity as Homophobia, Michael Kimmel
Part III: Embodiment
*17. Making Up Is Hard To Do, Sheila Jeffreys
18. “A Way Outa No Way”: Eating Problems among African American,
Latina, and White Women, Becky W. Thompson
19. Yellow Woman and a Beauty of the Spirit, Leslie Marmon Silko
20. Just Walk on By: A Black Man Ponders His Power to Alter Public
Space, Brent Staples
21. Taking It, Leonard Kriegel
22. I’m Not Fat, I’m Latina, Christy Haubegger
23. The Tyranny of the Esthetic: Surgery’s Most Intimate Violation,
Martha A. Coventry
Part IV: Communication
24. For the White Person Who Wants to Know How to Be My Friend,
Pat Parker
*25. Men and Women are from Earth, Rosalind Barnett and Caryl
Rivers
26. Real Men Don’t Cry … and Other “Uncool” Myths, Phil W. Petrie
27. The New Momism, Susan J. Douglas and Meredith W.
Michaels
28. Claiming Jezebel: Black Female Subjectivity and Sexual
Expressions in Hip-Hop, Ayana Byrd
29. Where are the women? The strange case of the missing feminists.
When was the last time you saw one on TV?, Laura Zimmerman
Part V: Sexuality
*30. A Pornographic World [What is normal?], Robert Jensen
31. The Myth of the Sexual Athlete, Don Sabo
*32. Passing Last Summer, Domenika Bednarska
33. The Impact of Multiple Marginalization, Paula C. Rust
Part VI: Families
*34. Contemporary Challenges to Black Women’s Reproductive
Rights, Jeanne Flavin
35. Bloodmothers, Othermothers, and Women-Centered Networks,
Patricia Hill Collins
36. Dilemmas of Involved Fatherhood, Kathleen Gerson
37. Man Child: A Black Lesbian Feminist’s Response, Audre Lorde
38. I Am a Man, Raul E. Ybarra
39. What is marriage for?, E.J. Graff
*40. Free to Marry, At Last—May 17, 2004, Pat Gozemba and Karen
Kahn
Part VII: Education
41. Missing in Interaction, Myra and David Sadker
42. “What About the Boys?” What the Current Debates Tell Us--and
Don’t Tell Us--About Boys in Schools, Michael S. Kimmel
43. Does Gender Matter?, Ben A. Barres
44. Black and Female: Reflections on Graduate School, bell hooks
*45. Mentors in Violence Program, Jackson Katz
Part VIII: Paid Work and Unemployment
*46. The End of Welfare as We Know It: An Overview of the PRWORA,
Alejandra Marchevsky and Jeanne Theoharis
47. Sixty Cents to a Man’s Dollar, Ann Crittenden
48. “Global Woman” by Barbara Ehrenreich and Arlie Russell
Hochschild
49. America’s Dirty Work: Migrant Maids and Modern-Day Slavery,
Joy M. Zarembka
50. The Globetrotting Sneaker, Cynthia Enloe
*51. The Center of Masculine Production: Gay Athletes in Professional
Sports, Eric Anderson
*52. Men at War: Vietnam and Agent Orange, Cynthia R. Daniels
*53. Fort Bragg: Command, Jeffrey McGowan
Part IX: Violence
54. Women, Violence, and Resistance, Melanie Kaye/Kantrowitz
*55. Eminem’s Popularity is a Major Setback for Girls and Women,
Jackson Katz
*56. Pictures of Boyhood, Richard Hoffman
*57. Injury, Gender, and Trouble, Laurie Schaffner
58. Homophobia in Straight Men, Terry A. Kupers
59. The Ultimate Growth Industry: Trafficking in Women and Girls,
Jan Goodwin
60. How Safe Is America?, Desiree Taylor
61. Wielding Masculinity Inside Abu Ghraib: Making Feminist Sense
of an American Military Scandal, Cynthia Enloe
*62. The Private War of Women Soldiers, Helen Benedict
Part X: Health and Illness
63. Masculinities and Men’s Health: Moving toward Post—Superman
Era Prevention, Don Sabo
*64. Health Care Reform – A Woman’s Issue, Catherine DeLowry,
Dr.PH
65. Reproductive Issues Are Essential Survival Issues for the AsianAmerican Communities, Connie S. Chan
66. Why the Precautionary Principle? A Meditation on Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) and the Breasts of Mothers, Sandra Steingraber
67. Does Silencio = Muerte? Notes on Translating the AIDS Epidemic,
Rafael Campo
68. To Be Poor and Transgender, Kai Wright
Part XI: A World That Is Truly Human
69. Statement of Principles, National Organization for Men Against
Sexism
137
Sociology
*70. New Black Man, Mark Anthony Neal
*71. Feminism’s Future: Young Feminists of Color Take the Mic, Daisy
Hernández and Pandora L. Leong
*72. Tapping Our Strength, Eisa Nefertari Ulen
*73. The Women’s Peace Movement in Israel, Gila Svirsky
*74. Women and Human Rights, Rita Arditti
NEW
*9780078049941*
GENDER
5th Edition
2011 / 416 pages
ISBN: 9780078049941
NEW
*9780078050527*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
GENDER 10/11
Bobby Hutchison
2010 / 272 pages
ISBN: 9780078050527
Experiments
9. Gender Bender
Engineering
and Resilience
26. When Sex Hurts
Course Perspective
Theory in Action
32. Peer Marriage
Doing about It
Consequences
43. Fall Girls
Article Rating Form
CONTENTS
Relations
138
Sociology
Social Psychology
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN GENDER
4th Edition
ISBN: 9780073515298
NEW
CONTENTS
Childhood
for Children?
Unit 5 From 9 to 5: Gender in the World of Work
Women’s Lives?
Workplace?
Societal Obstacles?
to Teens?
Constraints?
*9780073370668*
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
10th Edition
2010 / 752 pages
ISBN: 9780073370668
ISBN: 9780071220002 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/myers10e
Reflecting your students and their world. How many of the students
in your Social Psychology course are Psychology majors? Business?
Sociology? Education? In the 10th edition of Social Psychology,
David Myers once again weaves an inviting and compelling narrative
that speaks to ALL of your students regardless of background or
intended major. Through examples and applications as well as
marginal quotations from across the breadth of the liberal arts and
sciences, Myers draws students into the field of social psychology.
At the same time, Myers is also in tune with the ever-changing state
of social psychology research. Boasting over 650 new citations in
the 10th edition, Social Psychology is as current as it is captivating.
Research Close-Up and Inside Story features throughout the book
provide deeper exposure to key research and researchers. Marginal
quotations, examples and applications throughout each chapter, and
the concluding “Applying Social Psychology” chapters all ensure
that regardless of your students’ interests and future plans, Social
Psychology will engage them. This 10th edition also features the
contributions of Jean Twenge, author of Generation Me and The
Narcissism Epidemic, further bolstering the direct connection to
today’s students.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v Research that reflects what we currently know about the
world of social psychology. With over 650 new citations, Social
Psychology presents the state of the field as it stands today. As always,
Myers presents this research in meaningful and digestible ways that
promise to engage all students.
v Guest contributions reflect topics of particular interest
to today’s students. New to the 10th edition, Jean Twenge has
contributed to Chapter 2, “The Self in a Social World.” Drawing
on her extensive knowledge and research on the self and cultural
changes, the author of Generation Me and The Narcissism Epidemic
collaborated on the revision of this chapter.
TS_Social_Psychology_3e.pdf
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introducing Social Psychology
Part One: Social Thinking
Chapter 2: The Self in a Social World
Chapter 3: Social Beliefs and Judgments
Chapter 4: Behavior and Attitudes
Part Two: Social Influence
Chapter 5: Genes, Culture, and Gender
Chapter 6: Conformity and Obedience
Chapter 7: Persuasion
139
Sociology
Chapter 8: Group Influence
Part Three: Social Relations
Chapter 9: Prejudice: Disliking others
Chapter 10: Aggression: Hurting Others
Chapter 11: Attraction and Intimacy: Liking and Loving Others
Chapter 12: Helping
Chapter 13: Conflict and Peacemaking
Part Four: Applying Social Psychology
Chapter 14: Social Psychology in the Clinic
Chapter 15: Social Psychology in Court
Chapter 16: Social Psychology and the Sustainable Future
Epilogue
EXPLORING SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
5th Edition
ISBN: 9780073370644
ISBN: 9780071280426 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/myersesp5
This brief, modular introduction to social psychology offers streamlined
focus on issues such as belief and illusion, prejudice and diversity,
and love and hate. The brevity of each of the book’s 31 stand-alone
modules makes this the perfect text for covering the core concepts
in the field. By introducing social psychology in an essay format and
by writing in a voice that is both solidly scientific and warmly human,
Exploring Social Psychology is able to reveal social psychology as
an investigative reporter might, by providing a current summary of
important social phenomena, by showing how social psychologists
uncover and explain such phenomena, and by reflecting on their
human significance. The new edition includes discussion of the
Hurricane Katrina aftermath as an illustration of hindsight bias and
availability heuristic, the Iraq War and belief perseverance, and
terrorism and group polarization.
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
5th Edition
Stephen L Franzoi, Marquette University
ISBN: 9780073370590
ISBN: 9780071285438 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/franzoi5
CONTENTS
Readable research. This distinctive, theory-driven text uses “The Self”
as a theme to give students a meaningful context for exploring the
key concepts of social psychology. “Applications” sections have been
incorporated into most chapters, and “Featured Study” sections at the
end of every chapter summarize the purpose, method, and results
of recently published scientific articles. Retaining the emphasis on
methodology, the text also continues the tradition of strong gender
coverage, while expanding the coverage of social cognition and
social neuroscience.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introducing Social Psychology
Chapter 2 Conducting Research in Social Psychology
Chapter 3 The Self
Chapter 4 Social Cognition and Person Perception
Chapter 5 Attitudes and Persuasion
Chapter 6 Stereotyping, Prejudice, and Discrimination
Chapter 7 Social Influence
Chapter 8--Group Behavior
Chapter 9 Interpersonal Attraction
Chapter 10 Intimate Relationships
Chapter 11 Aggression
Chapter 12 Prosocial Behavior: Helping Others
Part One Introducing Social Psychology
Module 1 Doing Social Psychology
Module 2 Did You Know It All Along?
Part Two Social Thinking
Module 3 Self-Concept: Who Am I?
Module 4 Self-Serving Bias
Module 5 The Power of Positive Thinking
Module 6 The Fundamental Attribution Error
Module 7 The Powers and Perils of Intuition
Module 8 Reasons for Unreason
Module 9 Behavior and Belief
Module 10 Clinical Intuition
Module 11 Clinical Therapy: The Powers of Social Cognition
Part Three Social Influence
Module 12 Human Nature and Cultural Diversity
Module 13 Gender, Genes, and Culture
Module 14 How Nice People Get Corrupted
Module 15 Two Routes to Persuasion
Module 16 Indoctrination and Inoculation
Module 17 The Mere Presence of Others
Module 18 Many Hands Make Diminished Responsibility
Module 19 Doing Together What We Would Never Do Alone
Module 20 How Groups Intensify Decisions
Module 21 Power to the Person
Part Four Social Relations
Module 22 The Challenge of Diversity
Module 23 The Roots of Prejudice
Module 24 The Nature and Nurture of Aggression
Module 25 Does the Media Influence Social Behavior?
Module 26 Who Likes Whom?
Module 27 The Ups and Downs of Love
Module 28 Causes of Conflict
Module 29 Blessed Are the Peacemakers
Module 30 When Do People Help?
Module 31 Social Psychology and the Sustainable Future
References
Art Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
140
Sociology
Readers
Issue 16. Should Social Psychologists Study the Accuracy of
Stereotypes?
Issue 17. Does True Altruism Exist?
Issue 18. Does Media Violence Cause Aggression?
Research Methods
NEW
*9780078139413*
VIEWS IN SOCIAL
PSYCHOLOGY
3rd Edition
NEED TO KNOW: SOCIAL SCIENCE
RESEARCH METHODS
Lisa J. McIntyre, Washington State University — Pullman
2005 / 400 pages / Softcover
ISBN: 9780767413176
ISBN: 9780071232586 [IE]
Jason A Nier, Connecticut College
2010 / 432 Pages
ISBN: 9780078139413
CONTENTS
NEW TO THIS EDITION
TS_Social_Psychology_3e.pdf
Chapter One: Why You Need to Know
Chapter Two: The Nature of the Scientific Enterprise
Chapter Three: The Logic of Inquiry
Chapter Four The Vocabulary of Science
Chapter Five: Doing the Right Thing Ethics in Social Research
Chapter Six: Sampling
Chapter Seven: Elements of Research Design
Chapter Eight: Experiments
Chapter Nine: Survey Research: Part 1: The Art of Asking Questions
Chapter Ten: Survey Research: Part 2: Design and Implementation
Chapter Eleven: Unobtrusive Methods
Chapter Twelve: Qualitative Research Methods
Appendix A: Using the Internet
Appendix B: American Sociological Association, Ethical Prnciples
Appendix C: Tables and Figures
Appendix D: Statistics
Appendix E: Writing Research Reports
Index/Glossary
Bibliography
CONTENTS
Unit 1 Ethical Issues in Social Psychology
Issue 1. Is Deception of Human Participants Ethical?
Issue 2. Should Social Psychologists Try to Solve Social
Problems?
Issue 3. Can Experimental Social Psychology and Social
Constructionism co-exist?
Unit 2 Social Cognition
Issue 4. Are Our Social Perceptions Often Inaccurate?
Issue 5. Does Cognitive Dissonance Explain Why Behavior Can
Change Attitudes?
Issue 6. Are Self-Esteem Programs Misguided?
Issue 7. Can People Accurately Detect Lies?
Issue 8. Are Repressed Memories Real?
Issue 9. Do Positive Illusions Lead to Healthy Behavior?
Unit 3 Social Influence
Issue 10. Do Milgram’s Obedience Experiments Help Explain the
Nature of the Holocaust?
Issue 11. Does the Stanford Prison Experiment Help Explain the
Effects of Imprisonment?
Issue 12. Is Subliminal Persuasion a Myth?
Issue 13. Can People Really Be Brainwashed?
Unit 4 Social Relations
Issue 14. Is Stereotyping Inevitable?
Issue 15. Does the Implicit Association Test (IAT) Measure Racial
Prejudice?
141
Sociology
Chapter 11: Hypothesis Tests Involving Three or More Population
Means: Analysis of Variance
Chapter 12: Bivariate Correlation and Regression
Chapter 13: Multivariate Methods: Partial Tables and Multiple
Regression
Chapter 14: Regression Analysis with a Dichotomous Dependent
Variable: Logit and Probit Models
Appendix A: A Review of Basic Mathematical Operations
Appendix B: Statistical Tables
Appendix C: References
QUALITATIVE METHODS IN SOCIAL
RESEARCH
Kristin Esterberg, University of Massachusetts-Lowell
ISBN: 9780767415606
ISBN: 9780071131292 [IE]
CONTENTS
1. What Is Social Research? Some Practical and Theoretical
Concerns
2. Strategies for Beginning Research
3. Ethical Issues
4. Observation: Participant and Otherwise
5. Interviews
6. Unobtrusive Measures: Analyzing Texts And Material Artifacts
7. Action Research
8. Making Sense of Data / Making Sense of Qualitative Data: A
Process of Making Meaning
9. Narrative Analysis
10. Writing
SPSS / SAS
READY, SET, GO! A STUDENT GUIDE TO
SPSS® 13.0 AND 14.0 FOR WINDOWS®
2nd Edition
Thomas Pavkov, Purdue Univ-Calumet-Hammond
2007 / 96 pages
ISBN: 9780073126654
ISBN: 9780071252973 [IE - without CD]
Statistics
CONTENTS
STATISTICS FOR CRIMINOLOGY AND
CRIMINAL JUSTICE
3rd Edition
Ronet Bachman, University of Delaware
Raymond Paternoster, University of Maryland-College Park
ISBN: 9780073129242
http://www.mhhe.com/bachman3e
Statistical Methods for Criminology and Criminal Justice discusses
the basic statistical procedures comprehensively while keeping
it approachable and readable for students. Useful at both the
introductory and intermediate levels, this text contains in-depth
coverage of descriptive statistics, including graphical displays
of data and exploratory data analysis, along with bivariate and
multivariate analyses. Emphasis is placed equally on calculation and
interpretation. The newly revised third edition offers new up-to-date
crime data information and new research examples including specifics
relating to youth crime, youth violence, hate crime and much more.
Preface
Assignment 1 Learning the Basics of SPSS
Assignment 2 Looking at Frequency Distributions and Descriptive
Statistics
Assignment 3 Presenting Data in Graphic Form
Assignment 4 Testing Research Hypotheses for Two Independent
Samples
Assignment 5 Testing Research Hypotheses About Two Related
Sampled
Assignment 6 Comparing Independent Samples with One-Way
ANOVA
Assignment 7 Comparing Related Samples with One-Way ANOVA
Assignment 8 Measuring the Simple Relationship Between Two
Variables
Assignment 9 Describing the Linear Relationship Between Two
Variables
Assignment 10 Assessing the Association Between Two Categorical
Variables Appendix
Entering Data Using Programs Other Than SPSS
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: The Purpose of Statistics in the Criminological Sciences
Chapter 2: Levels of Measurement and Aggregation
Chapter 3: Understanding Data Distributions
Chapter 4: Measures of Central Tendency
Chapter 5: Measures of Dispersion
Chapter 6: Probability Theory and Probability Distributions
Chapter 7: Point Estimation and Confidence Intervals
Chapter 8: From Estimation to Statistical Test: Hypothesis Testing
for One
Chapter 9: Data Analysis With Teo Categorical Variables: The ChiSquare Test and Measures of Association
Chapter 10: Hypothesis Tests Involving Two Population Means or
Proportions
142
Sociology
Drugs & Society
DRUGS, SOCIETY, AND HUMAN BEHAVIOR
13th Edition
NEW
*9780073380759*
DRUGS IN PERSPECTIVE
7th Edition
Carl L Hart, Columbia University
Charles J Ksir, University of Wyoming-Laramie
Oakley S Ray (deceased)
ISBN: 9780073380797
ISBN: 9780071285599 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/hart13e
Designed for the introduction to drugs and substance abuse course
as taught in departments of health education, psychology, biology,
sociology, and criminal justice, this full-color market-leading text
provides the latest information on drugs and their effects on society
and human behavior. For over thirty years, instructors and students
have relied on it to examine drugs and behavior from the behavioral,
pharmacological, historical, social, legal, and clinical perspectives.
Richard Fields, Private Counseling Practice
Tuscon AZ and Redmond Washington
ISBN: 9780073380759
CONTENTS
http://www.mhhe.com/fields7e
This text is designed for the drug and substance abuse counseling
course that prepares future health professionals to work with patients,
clients, and families of abusers. It provides perspective on the
aspects and problems associated with addiction and discusses the
fundamentals of the dynamics of chemical dependency. The new
edition improves topic flow for easier understanding and brings the
research base into the 21st century.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v A new chapter on Etiology (cause) explores the multiple causes
and complexities of drug use.
v Streamlined content and organization makes it easier for the
readier to integrate the material in a framework that helps them
gain their perspective on alcohol/drug causes, assessment, family
prevention, intervention, treatment and relapse prevention.
v Updated case studies allow for an improved application of
concepts.
CONTENTS
Section I: Understanding Substance Abuse
1 Putting Drugs in Perspective
2 Why Do People Abuse Drugs?
3 Drug-Specific Information
4 Definitions of Substance Abuse, Dependence, and Addiction
Section II: Family
5 Substance Abuse and Family Systems
6 Parenting
7 Growing Up in an Alcoholic Family System
Section III: Prevention, Intervention, and Treatment
8 Prevention of Substance-Abuse Problems
9 Change, Motivation & Intervention for Substance-Abuse
Problems
10 Disorders Co-Occurring with Substance Abuse
11 Alcohol/Drug Treatment and Relapse Prevention
Appendix A: Trends in Annual Prevalence of Use of Various Drugs
for Eight, Tenth, and Twelfth Graders
Appendix B: Alcohol/Drug Screening Inventories
Appendix C: Medication Examples
Appendix D: At-Risk Factors For Substance Abuse
Section One: Drug Use in Modern Society
1: Drug Use: An Overview
2: Drug Use as a Social Problem
3: Drug Products and Their Regulation
Section Two: How Drugs Work
4: The Nervous System
5: The Actions of Drugs
Section Three: Uppers and Downers
6: Stimulants
7: Depressants and Inhalants
8: Medication for Mental Disorders
Section Four: Alcohol
9: Alcohol
Section Five: Familiar Drugs
10: Tobacco
11: Caffeine
12: Dietary Supplements and Over-the-Counter Drugs
Section Six: Restricted Drugs
13: Opioids
14: Hallucinogens
15: Marijuana
16: Performance-Enhancing Drugs
Section Seven: Prevention and Treatment
17: Preventing Substance Abuse
18: Treating Substance Abuse and Dependence
Appendix A Drug Names
Appendix B Resources for Information and Assistance
Glossary
143
Sociology
Drugs & Society –
Readers
NEW
*9780078127632*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS,
SOCIETY, AND BEHAVIOR
09/10
24th Edition
NEW
*9780078050664*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS, SOCIETY, AND
BEHAVIOR 10/11
25th Edition
Hugh T Wilson, CA State University Sacramento
ISBN: 9780078127632
Hugh T Wilson, California State University-Sacramento
2011 / 224 pages
ISBN: 9780078050664
NEW
*9780078127564*
DRUGS AND SOCIETY
9th Edition
Raymond Goldberg, State University of NY-Cortland
2010 / 512 pages
ISBN: 9780078127564
NEW TO THIS EDITION
AE_Drugs_Society_and_Behavior_0910.pdf
Drugs, Society, and Behavior 09/10 with the corresponding chapters
in one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Health textbooks by Hart et al.
CONTENTS
Unit 1: Living with Drugs
1. History of Alcohol and Drinking around the World
2. Under the Weather at J&J
3. The Myth of ADHD and the Scandal of Ritalin: Helping John
Dewey Students Succeed in Medicine-Free College Preparatory and
Therapeutic High School
4. Smoking, Drugs, Obesity Top Health Concerns for Kids
5. Did Prohibition Really Work?
6. Pass the Weed
7. Crystal Meth Boom Adds to South Africa’s Health Challenges
8. Living the High Life: The Role of Drug Taking in Young People’s Lives
Unit 2: Understanding How Drugs Work–Use, Dependency, and
Addiction
9. Reducing the Risk of Addiction to Prescribed Medications
10. Alcohol and Frontal Lobe Impairment: Fascinating Findings
11. Neuropeptide Promotes Drug-Seeking and Craving in Rats
12. Stress and Drug Abuse
Unit 3: The Major Drugs of Use and Abuse
13. Helping Students Stay Clean and Sober
14. An Update on the Effects of Marijuana and Its Potential Medical
Use: Forensic Focus
15. Prescription for Danger
16. A Pipeline for Cocaine
Unit 4: Other Trends in Drug Use
17. Salvia Divinorum, an Old Psychedelic Drug with New Appeal
18. FATAL Breaths
144
Sociology
19. Studies Identify Factors Surrounding Rise in Abuse of Prescription
Drugs by College Students
20. A Nation without Drunk Driving
21. Euro Now Currency Favored by Traffickers
22. Hard Data on Hard Drugs, Grabbed from the Environment
23. A Dose of Reality: States Find Battle against Counterfeit Drug
Market Difficult
24. Teens and Prescription Drugs: An Analysis of Recent Trends on
the Emerging Drug Threat
Unit 5: Measuring the Social Costs of Drugs
25. Crystal’s Sexual Persuasion
26. The Role of Substance Abuse in U.S. Juvenile Justice Systems
and Populations
27. How Do Club Drugs Impact HIV Prevention?
28. The Problem with Drinking
Unit 6: Creating and Sustaining Effective Drug Control Policy
29. Reorienting U.S. Drug Policy
30. America on Drugs
31. The Golden Age
32. Methamphetamine Precursor Regulation: Are We Controlling or
Diverting the Drug Problem?
33. Medical Marijuana, Compassionate Use, and Public Policy: Expert
Opinion or Vox Populi?
34. Durbin, Grassley Introduce Bipartisan Bill to Combat Meth
35. Small Town Drug Enforcement
Unit 7: Prevention, Treatment, and Education
36. Parent Power
38. Mental Illness among Juvenile Offenders—Identification and
Treatment
39. What Parents Need to Know about Pot
41. No Longer Theory: Correctional Practices That Work
Article Rating Form
Criminology
NEW
*9780073401584*
CRIMINOLOGY
7th Edition
Freda Adler and William S Laufer of University of Pennsylvania
Gerhard O.W. Mueller, Rutgers University-Newark
2010 / 544 pages
ISBN: 9780073401584
http://www.mhhe.com/adlercrim7e
Criminology is known for its lucid style, student-oriented approach,
and interdisciplinary perspective. This text discusses criminological
problems, their origins, and possible solutions in a clear, practical,
straightforward fashion. Students develop a thorough understanding
of today’s issues in criminology and are prepared to address and
resolve the issues of tomorrow. The new seventh edition features
coverage of new white-collar and corporate crimes related to the
current economic downturn. New research and statistical information
include coverage of neuro-criminology, evidence-based criminology,
and much more.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v Expansion of white-collar and corporate crime and effects of
the “our” current global economic downturn including the expansion
of our coverage of mortgage fraud.
v Four chapters on the criminological approach to the criminal
justice system were moved to the Online Learning Center
v New research on the connection between biology and
criminology including coverage of neuro-criminology (advances in
brain imaging allowing criminologists to make connections between
the neuro-anatomy of the brain and criminal behavior)
v Coverage of evidence-based criminology and public
policy make chapter material more scientifically based, so that the
student can see exactly how programs and techniques compare in
effectiveness
v “World News” boxes present current issues and problems
reported by the international media, such as the spike of car thefts
in Pakistan.
CourseSmart.com (ISBN 0-07-732339-4).
TS_Crime_and_Criminology_9e.pdf
Crime and Criminology, 9/e with the corresponding chapters in
three of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Criminal Justice textbooks by
Bohm/Haley, Inciardi, and Adler et al.
CONTENTS
Part I: Understanding Criminology
Chapter 1. The Changing Boundaries of Criminology
Chapter 2. Counting Crime and Measuring Criminal Behavior
Chapter 3. Schools of Thought throughout History
Part II: Explanations of Crime and Criminal Behavior
Chapter 4. Psychological and Biological Perspectives
Chapter 5. Strain and Cultural Deviance Theories
Chapter 6. The Formation of Subcultures
Chapter 7. Social Control Theory
145
Sociology
Sociology of Law –
Readers
Chapter 8. Labeling, Conflict, and Radical Theories
Chapter 9. Environmental Theory
Part III: Types of Crime
Chapter 10. Violent Crimes
Chapter 11. Crimes against Property
Chapter 12. White-Collar and Corporate Crime
Chapter 13. Public Order Crimes
Chapter 14. International and Comparative Criminology
NEW
*9780078127595*
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON
LEGAL ISSUES
14th Edition
Criminology – Readers
M Ethan Katsh, University of Mass-Amherst
2010 / 448 pages
ISBN: 9780078127595
NEW
*9780078139437*
VIEWS IN CRIME AND
CRIMINOLOGY
9th Edition
Thomas J Hickey, University of Tampa
2010 / 432 pages
ISBN: 9780078139437
NEW TO THIS EDITION
TS_Crime_and_Criminology_9e.pdf
Crime and Criminology, 9/e with the corresponding chapters in
three of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Criminal Justice textbooks by
Bohm/Haley, Inciardi, and Adler et al.
146
Sociology
Sociology of Sport
Sociology of Education –
Readers
SPORTS IN SOCIETY: ISSUES AND
CONTROVERSIES
10th Edition
NEW
*9780078049972*
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON
EDUCATIONAL ISSUES
16th Edition
Jay Coakley, University of Colorado
ISBN: 9780073376547
ISBN: 9780071285285 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/coakley10e
Sports in Society is the definitive text for the sport sociology course.
Taking a global, issues-oriented approach to the study of the role
of sport in society, this text encourages the discussion of current
sports-related controversies and helps students develop critical
thinking skills.
CONTENTS
1: The Sociology of Sport: What is it and why study it?
2: Producing Knowledge About Sports in Society: What is the Role
of Research and Theory?
3: Studying the Past: Does It Help us Understand Sports Today?
4: Sports and Socialization: Who Plays and What Happens to
Them?
5: Sports and Children: Are Organized Programs Worth the Effort?
6: Deviance in Sports: Is It Out of Control?
7: Violence in Sports: How Does It Affect Our Lives?
8: Gender and Sports: Does Equity Require Ideological Changes?
9: Race and Ethnicity: Are They Important in Sports?
10: Social Class: Do Money and Power Matter in Sports?
11: Sports and the Economy: What Are the Characteristics of
Commercial Sports?
12: Sports and the Media: Could They Survive Without Each
Other?
13: Sports and Politics: How Do Governments and Globalization
Influence Sports?
14: Sports in High School and College: Do Varsity Sport Programs
Contribute to Education?
15: Sports and Religion: Is It a Promising Combination?
16: Sports in the Future: What Can We Expect?
References
Name Index
Subject Index
By James Wm Noll, University of Maryland-College Park
2011 / 416 pages
ISBN: 9780078049972
http://www.mhhe.com/takingsides
in the Classroom is also an excellent instructor resource. Visit www.
mhhe.com/takingsides for more details.
NEW
*9780078135859*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: EDUCATION 10/11
37th Edition
Rebecca B Evers, Winthrop University
2010 / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780078135859
www.mhcls.com/text_data/catalog.0078135850.html
147
Sociology
ANNUAL EDITIONS: EDUCATION 09/10
36th Edition
NEW
*9780073545653*
VIEWS ON EDUCATIONAL
ISSUES, EXPANDED
15th Edition
Rebecca B Evers, Winthrop University
ISBN: 9780073516387
ISBN: 9780073545653
This THIRTY-SIXTH EDITION of ANNUAL EDITIONS: EDUCATION
annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated
table of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews
for each section; a topical index; and an online instructor’s resource
guide with testing materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE
CLASSROOM is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL
EDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.
com/online.
CONTENTS
James Wm Noll, University of MarylandCollege Park
TAKING SIDES: EDUCATIONAL ISSUES, 15/e EXPANDED presents
current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to
stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each
issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue
introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing
material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN
THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with
practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in
the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated
listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book
website. Visit www.mhcls.com.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
TS_Educational_Issues_15eX.pdf
Educational Issues, 15/e Expanded with the corresponding chapters
in two of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Education textbooks by Spring
and Nelson et al.
CONTENTS
Unit 1 Basic Theoretical Issues
Issue 1. Should Schooling Be Based on Social Experiences?
Issue 2. Should the Curriculum Be Standardized for All?
Issue 3. Should Behaviorism Shape Educational Practices?
Issue 4. Is Constructivism the Best Philosophy of Education?
Issue 5. Should Global Competition Steer School Reform?
Unit 2 Current Fundamental Issues
Issue 6. Can the Public Schools Produce Good Citizens?
Issue 7. Has Resegregation Diminished the Impact of Brown?
Issue 8. Can Federal Initiatives Rescue Failing Schools?
Issue 9. Do High-Stakes Assessments Improve Learning?
Issue 10. Should “Public Schooling” Be Redefined?
Unit 3 Current Specific Issues
Issue 11. Has the Supreme Court Reconfigured American Education?
Issue 12. Do Charter Schools Merit Public Support?
Issue 13. Is Privatization the Hope of the Future?
Issue 14. Is Full Inclusion of Disabled Students Desirable?
Issue 15. Can Current High School Reform Curtail Dropouts?
Issue 16. Is “Intelligent Design” a Threat to the Curriculum?
Issue 17. Is There a Crisis in the Education of Boys?
Issue 18. Should Homework Be Abolished?
Issue 19. Do Computers Negatively Affect Student Growth?
Issue 20. Should Alternative Teacher Training Be Encouraged?
Issue 21. Can Merit Pay Accelerate School Improvement?
Unit 4 Bonus Issues
Issue 22. Are Undocumented Immigrants Entitled to Public Education?
Issue 23. Is No Child Left Behind Irretrievably Flawed?
Unit 1 Assessment and Research: Do They Inform Our Teaching
Practices?
1. Where Have All the Strong Poets Gone?
2. Proficiency for All?
3. Bridging the Gap Between Research and Practice
4. Learning to Love Assessment
5. The Case for and Against Homework
Unit 2 Reformatting Our Schools
6. George’s Complaint
7. Assessing Applied Skills
8. From the Mouths of Middle Schoolers: Important Changes for High
School and College
9. Charting a New Course for Schools
10. A Choice That Works
11. Five Trends for Schools
Unit 3 The Challenges of Diversity and Poverty
12. As Diversity Grows, So Must We
13. Mélange Cities
14. What Families Want
15. African American Parents: Improving Connections with Their
Child’s Educational Environment
16. Becoming Adept at Code-Switching
17. Nine Powerful Practices
Unit 4 Education That is Relevant to the Real World
18. The Essential Cognitive Backpack
19. High Schools Have Got It Bad for Higher Ed—And That Ain’t
Good
20. All of Our Students Thinking
21. Industrial Arts: Call It What You Will, the Need Still Exists
Unit 5 Preparing Teachers to Teach All Students in All Schools
22. Teacher Dispositions as Predictors of Good Teaching
23. “Not Writing It Out But Writing It Off”
24. Why Teacher Networks (Can) Work
25. Letters to a Young Teacher
Unit 6 Issues in the Inclusive Classroom
27. Overcoming Lethargy in Gifted and Talented Education with
Contract Activity Packages
28. Confronting Ableism
29. Books That Portray Characters with Disabilities
30. Facing High Stakes in High School
Unit 7 Cornerstone to Learning: Reading Is Fundamental
31. Drop Everything and Read—But How?
32. “You Should Read This Book!”
33. Getting Children in 2 Books
34. Using Literature Circles with English Language Learners
35. Losing the Fear of Sharing Control: Starting a Reading
Workshop
36. When Mama Can’t Read
148
Sociology
Sociology of Health –
Readers
Unit 8 Rethinking Discipline: Getting the Behavior You Want and
Need to Teach Effectively
37. Discipline, Doris Walker-Dalhouse
38. Dealing with Rumors, Secrets, and Lies
39. Tackling a Problematic Behavior Management Issue
40. Developing Effective Behavior Intervention Plans
41. Self-Regulation
42. School Resource Officer Programs
Unit 9 Creating Caring Communities of Learners
43. Character and Academics
44. Promoting Altruism in the Classroom
45. Becoming Citizens of the World
46. Democracy and Education
47. Thinking about Patriotism
NEW
*9780077386115*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
HEALTH 10/11
WITH FREE TAKING SIDES:
Clashing Views in Health
and Society, 9/E
31st Edition
CLASSIC EDITION SOURCES: EDUCATION
4th Edition
Craig Kridel, University of South Carolina
2009 / 352 pages
ISBN: 9780073379746
Eileen L Daniel, SUNY-Brockport
2010 / Softcover with Access Card
ISBN: 9780077386115
http://www.mhhe.com/annualeditions
This volume brings together over 40 selections of enduring intellectual
value--classic articles, book excerpts, and research studies--that have
shaped the study of education and our contemporary understanding
of it.This title is supported by www.mhclsdushkin.com, a student Web
site that provides study support tools and links to links to related
Web sites.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Postmodernism, Liberation Pedagogy, and the Conservative/
Moderate Traditions in Educational Thought: An Introductory
Comparison
Chapter 2 The Conservative Tradition in Educational Thought
Chapter 3 Student Experience-Centered “Progressive” Education
Chapter 4 Critical Perspectives in Educational Thought
Chapter 5 Schooling
Chapter 6 Curriculum Theory and Practice
Chapter 7 Curriculum Development and the Language of Educational
Debate
Chapter 8 The Struggle for Freedom in Education
Chapter 9 Perspectives on the Struggle for Freedom in Education
Chapter 10 Women and Education
Chapter 11 The Political Economy of American Education
Chapter 12 The Struggle for Civil Liberty in the Schools
Chapter 13 Testing and the Critical Response to It
Chapter 14 The Cognitive Revolution in Learning
Chapter 15 Social Change
Chapter 16 Culture and Education
Chapter 17 Renewed Alternative Visions for the Future of Education:
Rudolph Steiner and Maria Montessori Revisited (A Plan for Education
Which Can Fit Any Ideological Model)
NEW TO THIS EDITION
AE_Health_1011.pdf
Health 10/11 with the corresponding chapters in three of our bestselling McGraw-Hill Health textbooks by Hahn et al., Payne et al.,
and Insel/Roth.
CONTENTS
Unit 1: Promoting Healthy Behavior Change
1. Are Bad Times Healthy?
2. The Perils of Higher Education
3. We Can Do Better: Improving the Health of the American Peopl
4. On the Road to Wellness
Unit 2: Stress and Mental Health
5. Redefining Depression as Mere Sadnes
6. Stressed Out Nation
7. Seasonal Affective Disorder
8. Dealing with the Stressed
9. Are Your Rituals Driving You Crazy?
Unit 3: Nutritional Health
10. Fat City
11. Eating Well on a Downsized Food Budge
12. Suck on This
13. An Oldie Vies for Nutrient of the Decade
14. What Good is Breakfast?
149
Sociology
Unit 4: Exercise and Weight Management
15. A Big-Time Injury Striking Little Players’ Knee
16. The Skinny Sweep-Stakes
18. “Fat Chance”
Unit 5: Drugs and Health
19. Great Drug, but Does It Prolong Life?
20. Some Cold Medicines Moved Behind the Counter
21. Drinking Too Much, Too Young
22. The Changing Face of Teenage Drug Abuse—The Trend toward
Prescription Drugs
23. Helping Workers Kick the Habit
24. Online Drugs: Mostly Legal
Unit 6: Sexuality and Relationships
25. Scents and Sensibility
26. Love at the Margins
27. Girl or Boy? As Fertility Technology Advances, So Does an
Ethical Debate
28. Is Pornography Adultery?
Unit 7: Preventing and Fighting Disease
29. ‘Diabesity,’ a Crisis in an Expanding Country
31. The Battle Within
32. Who Still Dies of AIDS and Why
33. A Mandate in Texas
Unit 8: Health Care and the Health Care System
34. Pharmacist Refusals: A Threat to Women’s Health
35. Curbing Medical Costs: The ‘unpopular problem’
36. Thanks, But No Thanks.
37. The Silent Epidemic—The Health Effects of Illiteracy
38. Incapacitated, Alone and Treated to Death
Unit 9: Consumer Health
39. Dentists Frown at Overuse of Whiteners
40. Medical Tourism: What You Should Know
41. Caution: Killing Germs May Be Hazardous to Your Health
42. Tattoos: Leaving Their Mark
43. Hazardous Health Plans
Unit 10: Contemporary Health Hazards
44. When Government Makes Us Sick
45. From Smoking Boom, A Major Killer of Women
46. Sound the Alarm? A Swine Flu Bind
47. Chemical in Plastic Bottles Fuels Science
48. HIV Apathy
49. Methicillin-Resistant Staphylococcus Aureus: The Latest Health
Scare
50. The Noisy Epidemic: Physical and Mental Stress in a HighDecibel World
Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078139444*
VIEWS IN HEALTH AND
SOCIETY
9th Edition
Eileen L Daniel, SUNY-Brockport
2010 / 432 pages
ISBN: 9780078139444
NEW TO THIS EDITION
TS_Health_and_Society_9e.pdf
Clashing Views in Health and Society, 9/e with the corresponding
chapters in two of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Health Science
textbooks by Hahn et al. and Payne et al.
CONTENTS
Unit 1 The Health Care Industry
Issue 1. Should the United States Adopt a Single-Payer Plan to Fund
National Health Insurance?
Issue 2. Should Life-Sustaining Medical Care Be Rationed Based
on Age?
Issue 3. Is the Pharmaceutical Industry Responsible for the High Cost
of Prescription Drugs?
Unit 2 Health and Society
Issue 4. Is Drug Testing Vital to the Workplace?
Issue 5. Should Doctors Ever Help Terminally Ill Patients to Commit
Suicide?
Issue 6. Should the Government Regulate the Sale, Advertisement,
and Distribution of Junk Food?
Issue 7. Should Doctors Prescribe Drugs Based on Race?
Issue 8. Should Embryonic Stem Cell Research Be Permitted?
Unit 3 Mind-Body Relationship
Issue 9. Should Addiction to Drugs Be Labeled a Brain Disease?
Issue 10. Do Religion and Prayer Benefit Health?
Unit 4 Sexuality and Gender Issues
Issue 11. Is It Necessary for Pregnant Women to Completely Abstain
from All Alcoholic Beverages?
Issue 12. Should Pro-Life Health Providers Be Allowed to Deny
Prescriptions on the Basis of Conscience?
Issue 13. Should the Cervical Cancer Vaccine for Girls Be
Compulsory?
Issue 14. Is There a Post-abortion Syndrome?
Unit 5 Public Health Issues
Issue 15. Is There a Link between Vaccination and Autism.
Issue 16. Does Anabolic Steroid Use Cause Serious Health Problems
for Athletes?
Issue 17. Will Global Warming Negatively Impact Human Health?
Issue 18. Is Breastfeeding the Best Way to Feed Babies?
150
Sociology
Unit 6 Consumer Health
Issue 19. Is it Safe to Consume Genetically Engineered Foods?
Issue 20. Does Obesity Cause a Decline in Life Expectancy?
CONTENTS
Sociology of Sexuality –
Readers
NEW
*9780078049941*
GENDER
5th Edition
2011 / 416 pages
ISBN: 9780078049941
NEW
*9780078050527*
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
GENDER 10/11
Bobby Hutchison
2010 / 272 pages
ISBN: 9780078050527
Unit 1: Theoretical and Research Perspectives
Relations
Experiments
Unit 2: Gender and Development
9. Gender Bender
Unit 3: Gender and Education
Engineering
Unit 4: Gender, Work, and Health
and Resilience
26. When Sex Hurts
Course Perspective
Unit 5: Genders and Sexualities
Theory in Action
32. Peer Marriage
Unit 6: Gender and Social Issues
Doing about It
Consequences
43. Fall Girls
Article Rating Form
151
Sociology
NEW
*9780073516349*
SEXUALITY
31st Edition
Bobby Hutchison, Modesto Jr College
ISBN: 9780073516349
NEW TO THIS EDITION
AE_Human_Sexualities_31e.pdf
Human Sexualities, 31/e with the corresponding chapters in two of
our best-selling McGraw-Hill Human Sexuality textbooks by Hyde/
DeLamater and Kelly.
CONTENTS
18. Torn between Two Mothers
19. Staying up Late with Sue
Unit 4: Intimacies and Relationships
21. Free as a Bird and Loving It
22. Happily Never Married
24. Pillow Talk
25. Behind the Cloak of Polygamy
26. Love at the Margins: Extreme Relationships Demand Extreme
Commitment
Unit 5: Gender and Sexual Diversity
Part A. Perspectives on Gender
Part B. Perspectives on Sexual Orientation
32. Finding the Switch
34. Broadcast News: The Insider Is Out
Unit 6: Sexual Health and Well-Being
Part A. Problems and Interventions
35. Sex, Health & Happiness
36. Fighting the Cancer a Mammo Can’t Catch
37. When Sex Hurts
Part B. Sexually Transmitted Infections and HIV
38. Popping the Other Question
40. HIV Plan B
41. HIV Apathy
Unit 7: Sexualities and Social Issues
42. Flower Grandma’s Secret,
43. You Can’t Do That on Television
44. Sex, Politics, and Morality at the FDA: Reflections on the Plan B
Decision, Frank Davidoff
45. Guess Who’s Watching Porn
46. Breeder Reaction
47. The Sex Offender Next Door
Doing about It
Article Rating Form
Unit 1: Social and Cultural Foundations
Unit Overview
1. Vox Populi: Sex, Lies, and Blood Sport
2. The Baby Deficit
3. Three `Rules’ That Don’t Apply
5. A Mind Dismembered: In Search of the Magical Penis Thieves
6. Afterbirths in the Afterlife: Cultural Meaning of Placental Disposal
in a Hmong American Community
8. How AIDS Changed America
Unit 2: Biological Foundations
Part A. Reproductive Capacities
10. Success at Last
11. A Man’s Shelf Life
Part B. Pleasure and Desire
12. The Orgasmic Mind
13. Women’s Sexual Desire: A Feminist Critique
Unit 3: Sexualities and Development
14. How to Talk about Sex
15. The Birds and the Bees and Curious Kids
16. What to Tell the Kids about Sex
152
Sociology
NEW
*9780073545639*
VIEWS IN HUMAN
SEXUALITY
11th Edition
Unit 5 Gender and Sexual Orientation
Issue 18. Is Gender Identity Disorder an Appropriate Psychiatric
Diagnosis?
Issue 19. Should Corporations Ensure Equal Rights for Their Lesbian,
Gay, Bisexual, and Transgender Employees?
Issue 20. Should Same Sex-Marriage Be Legal?
GENDER
4th Edition
William J Taverner, Fairleigh Dickinson
University
ISBN: 9780073545639
ISBN: 9780073515298
TAKING SIDES: HUMAN SEXUALITY, 11/e presents current
com.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
TS_Human_Sexuality_11e.pdf
Human Sexuality, 11/e with the corresponding chapters in one of
our best-selling McGraw-Hill Human Sexuality textbooks by Yarber
et al.
CONTENTS
Unit 1 The Nature of Sex
Issue 1. Has sex become too casual?
Issue 3. Does Sexual Medicine Benefit Society?
Issue 4. Is Oral Sex Really Sex?
Issue 5. Is BDSM a healthy form of sexual expression?
Unit 2 Sex Education
Issue 6. Is there something wrong with the content of comprehensive
sex education curricula?
Issue 7. Should Sex Ed Teach about Abstinence?
Issue 8. Does the Availability of “Sexual Health Services” Make Some
College Campuses Healthier than Others?
Unit 3 Sex and Society
Issue 9. Should Children Have an HPV Vaccination before They
Enroll in School?
Issue 10. Should libraries and other places that provide public wifi
restrict sexual content?
Issue 11. Should the FCC Restrict Broadcast “Indecency”?
Issue 12. Should Prostitution Be Legal?
Issue 13. Should Society Support Cohabitation before Marriage?
Unit 4 Reproductive Choices
Issue 14. Should Pharmacists have the Right to Refuse Contraceptive
Prescriptions?
Issue 16. Should There be Restrictions on the Number of Embryos
Implanted during In-Vitro Fertilization?
Issue 17. Should Parents Be Allowed to Select the Sex of Their
Baby?
CONTENTS
Childhood
for Children?
Women’s Lives?
Workplace?
153
Sociology
Societal Obstacles?
to Teens?
Constraints?
GENDER
4th Edition
ISBN: 9780073515298
Sex Roles
NEW
*9780078049941*
GENDER
5th Edition
2011 / 416 pages
ISBN: 9780078049941
CONTENTS
for Children?
Women’s Lives?
Workplace?
Societal Obstacles?
to Teens?
Constraints?
154
Sociology
Technology & Society
NEW
*9780073528540*
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
COMPUTERS IN SOCIETY
09/10
15th Edition
*9780073528588*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: COMPUTERS IN
SOCIETY 10/11
16th Edition
Paul De Palma, Gonzaga University
Paul De Palma, Gonzaga University
2011 / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780073528588
ISBN: 9780073528540
for more details.
CONTENTS
Unit 1: Introduction
1. Five Things We Need to Know about Technological Change
2. On the Nature of Computing
3. A Place for Hype
Unit 2: The Economy
4. Click Fraud: The Dark Side of Online Advertising
5. Online Salvation?
6. The Big Band Era
7. The Beauty of Simplicity
8. The Software Wars: Why You Can’t Understand Your Computer
Unit 3: Work and the Workplace
9. National ID: Biometrics Pinned to Social Security Cards
10. Dilberts of the World, Unite!
11. Computer Software Engineers
12. How Deep Can You Probe?
13. Privacy, Legislation, and Surveillance Software
14. The Computer Evolution
Unit 4: Computers, People, and Social Participation
15. Back-to-School Blogging
16. Romance in the Information Age
17. E-Mail Is for Old People
18. Girl Power
19. Bloggers against Torture
Unit 5: Societal Institutions: Law, Politics, Education, and the
Military
20. Piracy, Computer Crime, and IS Misuse at the University
21. Can Blogs Revolutionize Progressive Politics?
22. Center Stage
23. The Coming Robot Army
24. A Technology Surges
25. Wikipedia in the Newsroom
26. E-Mail in Academia: Expectations, Use, and Instructional
Impact
155
Sociology
Unit 6: Risk and Avoiding Risk
27. Why Spyware Poses Multiple Threats to Security
28. The Virus Underground
29. False Reporting on the Internet and the Spread of Rumors: Three
Case Studies
30. The New Right-Wing Smear Machine
31. A Growing Watch List
Unit 7: International Perspectives and Issues
32. China’s Tech Generation Finds a New Chairman to Venerate
33. Restoring the Popularity of Computer Science
34. China’s Computer Wasteland
35. In Search of a PC for the People
36. In Korea, a Boot Camp Cure for Web Obsession
37. New Tech, Old Habits
Unit 8: The Frontier of Computing
38. A Nascent Robotics Culture: New Complicities for
Companionship
39. Toward Nature-Inspired Computing
40. Google and the Wisdom of Clouds
Article Rating Form
Nanotechnology?
Issue 11. Are Genetically Modified Foods Safe to Eat?
Unit 4 Space
Issue 12. Is NASA Doing Enough to Protect the Earth from Asteroid
and Comet Impacts?
Issue 13. Will the Search for Extraterrestrial Life Ever Succeed?
Issue 14. Is “Manned Space Travel” a Delusion?
Unit 5 The Computer Revolution
Issue 15. Can Machines Be Conscious?
Issue 16. Is Information Technology a Threat to Privacy?
Issue 17. Should the World’s Libraries Be Digitized?
Unit 6 Ethics
Issue 18. Is “Animal Rights” Just Another Excuse for Terrorism?
Issue 19. Is It Ethically Permissible to Clone Human Cells?
Comparative Societies
NEW
NEW
*9780073404189*
*9780078139406*
GLOBAL SOCIOLOGY:
INTRODUCING FIVE
CONTEMPORARY
SOCIETIES
5th Edition
VIEWS IN SCIENCE,
TECHNOLOGY AND
SOCIETY
9th Edition
Linda Schneider & Arnold Silverman, Nassau
County Community College
ISBN: 9780073404189
Thomas A Easton, Thomas College
2010 / 416 pages
ISBN: 9780078139406
http://www.mhhe.com/takingsides
in the Classroom is also an excellent instructor resource. Visit www.
mhcls.com for more information.
CONTENTS
Unit 1 The Place of Science and Technology in Society
Issue 1. Does Politics Come Before Science in Current Government
Decision Making?
Issue 2. Should “Intelligent Design” Be Taught in Public Schools?
Issue 3. Should the Internet Be Neutral?
Unit 2 Energy and the Environment
Issue 4. Are “Space Sunshades” a Possible Answer to Global
Warming?
Issue 5. Is It Time to Revive Nuclear Power?
Issue 6. Will Hydrogen Replace Fossil Fuels for Cars?
Unit 3 Human Health and Welfare
Issue 7. Do Falling Birth Rates Pose a Threat to Human Welfare?
Issue 8. Is There Sufficient Scientific Evidence to Conclude That Cell
Phones Cause Cancer?
Issue 9. Should DDT Be Banned Worldwide?
Issue 10. Should Potential Risks Slow the Development of
NEW TO THIS EDITION
of chapters.
globalization.
156
Sociology
Special Topics
protocol.
CONTENTS
NEW
*9780071270267*
ETHICS AND SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY
Asian and Western Perspectives
Gary Chan and George TL Shenoy
2009 / 592 pages
ISBN: 9780071270267
JAPAN AND SINGAPORE
By Yun Hui Tsu
2006 / 324 pages
ISBN: 9780071256230
Japan and Singapore have a common history going back one
hundred and fifty years. This shared experience is both complex and
contradictory and has many aspects: marriages, friendships, cultural
exchanges, business relations, and mutual learning interlaced with
economic competition, communal rivalry, and war. The strong bilateral
relations between the two countries are likely to continue and remain
vital to both countries’ economic, social and political development. This
volume offers, for the first time, a multidisciplinary survey of JapanSingapore relations. Examining a wide range of topics on prewar
history, economic cooperation, cultural and social trends, and bilateral
trade and diplomacy, this book will be of interest to both specialists
and members of the public concerned about regional affairs.
CONTENTS
1. When “Advancing South” Meets “Looking East”
2. A Social History of the Japanese in Singapore to 1945
3. Indians and Chinese in Japan’s Trade with Singapore before the
Asian-Pacific War
4. The Chinese and the Japanese in Colonial Singapore, 1870s to
1941
5. Japanese Direct Investment in Singapore: Pokka and Kikkoman
6. Japan-Singapore Economic Partnership Agreement: Origins and
Implications
7. Japanese Women Working in Singapore
8. The Culture of Japanese Businessmen in Singapore
9. The Japanese Kindergarten of Singapore: “Internalization” and
“Internationalization”
10. The Learn from Japan Campaign in Singapore
11. Teaching and Learning Japanese in Singapore
Contributors
This book is the result of the collaboration of seven faculty members
of the School of Law, Singapore Management University (SMU), who
have been teaching Ethics and Social Responsibility as a core course
at SMU for many years. Almost all the currently available books on
the subject are of Western origin, with concepts and examples largely
drawn from the West. They deal with some problems that are not
relevant to Asian students and are based on laws that may not find
counterparts in Asia. Conversely, some issues that are of concern
in Asia are either not dealt with at all or not dealt with adequately.
There is a pressing need to correct this imbalance since Asia is
currently home to more than half of the world’s population and hosts
several economic powerhouse countries. This book, while drawing
upon the scholarship of the West, attempts to bridge the gap and
stimulate thinking on ethics and social responsibility issues in a global
perspective that Asians can relate to. The book incorporates a number
of special pedagogical features: An outline of the learning objectives
for each chapter, the use of open-ended questions to provoke further
reflection and discussion, illustrations and case studies to highlight
certain ethical concepts and their applications, and review questions
in each chapter which help consolidate students’ understanding of
the topics. Although conceived as a textbook for students taking the
course Ethics and Social Responsibility at SMU, this book will be
equally useful to students pursuing similar studies at other tertiary
institutions and professional bodies, professionals in the fields of
accounting, law and finance, as well as businessmen and members
of the general public who wish to gain an insight into ethics and
social responsibility.
CONTENTS
Preface
About the Authors
1. An Introduction to Ethics and Ethical Decision-making
2. Theories of Ethics and Social Responsibility: Asian and Western
Perspectives
3. Workplace Ethics I: The Workplace and Society, Sexual Harassment
and Discrimination
4. Workplace Ethics II: Privacy, Conflict of Interest and Whistleblowing
5. Advertising and Marketing Ethics
6. Corporate Social Responsibility
7. Corruption in Commercial Transactions
8. Ethics and the Environment
9. Ethics and Social Responsibility in International Business
10. Professional Ethics
11. Legal Ethics
12. Accounting Ethics and Ethics for Accountants
13. Finance Ethics
Index
157
Sociology
Special Topics – Readers
INTERPRETATIONS
3rd Edition
Understanding The New Security
Environment, Readings And Interpretations
3rd Edition
Natasha E Bajema
2009 / 696 pages
ISBN: 9780073379791
CONTENTS
Natasha E Bajema
2009 / 696 pages
ISBN: 9780073379791
CONTENTS
158
TITLE INDEX
A
Abnormal Psychology Media and Research Update with Mindmap, 4e
Nolen-Hoeksema
67
Abnormal Psychology with Mindmap Plus CD-ROM and Powerweb, 9e
Alloy
68
Halgin
67
Adolescence, 13e
Santrock
32
Adolescence, 8e
Steinberg
33
Adolescence, 9e
Steinberg
32
Adolescence: Continuity, Change, and Diversity, 6e
Cobb
33
Adult Development and Aging, 3e
Papalia
36
Hoyer
35
American Ethnicity: The Dynamics and Consequences of Discrimination, 6e
Aguirre
126
Stickle
34
Cox
37, 123
Cox
36, 123
Annual Editions: Biological Psychology 08/09, 6e
Jubilan
80
Junn
30
De Palma
155
De Palma
155
Griffiths
130
Wilson
71, 144
Wilson
70, 144
Dickinson
Evers
148
Evers
147
Cauley
48
Cauley
48
Hutchison
38, 51, 124
40, 60, 90,
121, 138, 151
Annual Editions: Health 10/11 (with Free Taking Sides: Clashing Views
Daniel
149
in Health and Society, 9/E), 31e
Annual Editions: Human Development 09/10 (2010 Update),38e
Freiberg
25
Freiberg
25
Hutchison
Buskist
17
Buskist
17
Kromkowski
128
Finsterbusch
110
Finsterbusch
108
Annual Editions: SocIology 09/10, 38e
Finsterbusch
105
Gilbert
31, 113, 116
Levine
125
Annual Editions: Violence and Terrorism 10/11, 12e
Badey
109
Williams
159
91, 152
83
TITLE INDEX
C
Child Development with Multimedia Courseware CD and Powerweb, 5e
DeHart
28
Child Development
Patterson
28
Child Development: An Introduction, 12e
Santrock
29
Child Psychology: A Contemporary View Point, 7e
Parke
29
Child Psychopathology
Haugaard
Child’s World, A, 11e
Papalia
27
Children, 11e
Santrock
27
Classic Edition Sources: Education, 4e
Kridel
149
Classic Edition Sources: Sociology, 4e
Finsterbusch
107
Ritzer
133
Ritzer
133
Conceptual History of Psychology, A
Greenwood
Contemporary Sociological Theory and Its Classical Roots: The Basics, 2e
Ritzer
135
Counseling and Psychotherapy Today
Austad
69
Counselling in Schools: Theories, Processes and Techniques
Tan
47
Criminology, 7e
Adler
145
Developmental Psychopathology, 5e
Wenar
39
Dimensions of Human Sexuality, 6e
Byer
89
Discovery of Society, The, 8e
Collins
Fields
69, 143
Drugs, Society, and Human Behavior, 13e
Hart
70, 143
39, 72
86
D
99, 104, 135
E
EdPsych: Modules
Bohlin
45
Educational Psychology, 4e
Santrock
45
Enhancing Cognitive Funtions Applications Across Contexts
Tan
46
Essentials of Life-Span Development
Santrock
23
Essentials of Psychology with Making the Grade CD-ROM
Lahey
15
Essentials of Understanding Psychology, 8e
Feldman
12
Ethics and Social Responsibility: Asian and Western Perspectives
Chan
157
King
10
Experiencing Race, Class, and Gender in the United States, 5e
Fiske-Rusciano
Exploring Social Psychology, 5e
Myers
160
119
56, 140
TITLE INDEX
F
Families: A Sociological Perspective
Newman
112, 116
Feminist Frontiers, 8e
Taylor
136
Fundamentals of Cognitive Psychology, 7e
Hunt
79
G
Schneider
102, 105, 156
H
Health Psychology, 7e
Taylor
62
History of Psychology, 4e
Hothersall
86
Human Development Across the Lifespan, 7e
Dacey
21
Human Development, 11e
Papalia
22
Candell
21
Human Factors in Engineering and Design, 7e
Sanders
83
Infants, Toddlers, and Caregivers: A Curriculum of Respectful, Responsive Care and Education, 8e
Gonzalez-Mena
50
Wilmot
62
Intimate Relationships, 5e
Miller
I
59, 89
J
Japan and Singapore
Tsu
157
L
Last Dance: Encountering Death and Dying, The, 8e
DeSpelder
Life-Span Development, 12e
Santrock
161
51, 124
22
TITLE INDEX
M
M Intro Psych
McGraw-Hill
7
Ferguson
Marriage and Family: The Quest for Intimacy, 7e
Lauer
112, 115
Meaning of Difference: American Constructions of Race, Sex and Gender, Social Class, and
Rosenblum
120, 132
100
Sexual Orientation, The, 5e
Methods in Behavioral Research, 10e
Cozby
75
Modern Sociological Theory, 7e
Ritzer
134
Multicultural Psychology, 2e
Mio
57, 62
N
Need To Know: Social Science Research Methods
McIntyre
141
P
Perception, 5e
Blake
79
Personality Psychology: Domains of Knowledge About Human Nature, 4e
Larsen
57
Practical Skeptic: Core Concepts in Sociology, The, 5e
McIntyre
99
McIntyre
99
Praxis Series of Official Guide with CD-ROM, The, 2e
49
Principles of Research in Behavioral Science, 2e
Whitley
77
Cohen
78
Rahhal
16
Feldman
8
Psychology for Nurses
Salgado
12
Waitley
63
Psychology: An Introduction, 10e
Lahey
14
Feist
9
Passer
14
Passer
7
Cherlin
111, 115
Cherlin
114
Esterberg
142
Q
Qualitative Methods in Social Research
162
TITLE INDEX
R
Farganis
®
®
135
Ready, Set, Go! A Student Guide to SPSS 13.0 and 14.0 For Windows , 2e
Pavkov
77, 142
Reconstructing Gender: A Multicultural Anthology, 5e
Disch
Bordens
76
Bordens
75
Research Methods in Psychology, 8e
Shaughnessy
75
Research Methods in Psychology: Ideas, Techniques and Reports
Spatz
76
Rethinking The Color Line: Readings in Race and Ethnicity, 4e
Gallagher
127
Revisiting Sociology (In Chinese)
Ho
103
118, 137
S
Science of Psychology: An Appreciative View, The
King
15
King
11
Social Cognition, From Brains to Culture
Fiske
58
Social Construction of Difference and Inequality: Race, Class, Gender and Sexuality, The, 4e
Ore
Lauer
108
Myers
55, 139
Franzoi
55, 140
Social Stratification and Inequality, 7e
Kerbo
131
Ritzer
134
Ritzer
133
Sociology Matters, 4e
Schaefer
103
Sociology, 12e
Schaefer
101
Sociology: A Brief Introduction, 8e
Schaefer
103
Sociology: Diversity, Conflict, and Change
Neubeck
104
Sociology: The Core, 9e
Hughes
102
Sport Psychology, 6e
Cox
Sports in Society: Issues and Controversies, 10e
Coakley
147
Statistics for Criminology and Criminal Justice, 3e
Bachman
142
163
119, 131
84
TITLE INDEX
T
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Abnormal Psychology, 5e
Halgin
68
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Adolescence, 2e
Rue
35
Del Campo
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Crime and Criminology, 9e
Hickey
Goldberg
70, 144
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Educational Psychology (with Free Annual Editions), 6e
Abbeduto
48
Schroeder
White
30, 31, 50
146
114, 117
40, 60, 138,
151, 154
White
41, 61, 92, 122,
139, 153, 154
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Health and Society, 9e
Daniel
Taverner
Guest
26
Guest
25
Newman
58
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Race and Ethnicity, 7e
D’Angelo
129
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Science, Technology and Society, 9e
Easton
156
Nier
Levine
122
Noll
147
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Educational Issues, Expanded, 15e
Noll
148
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Legal Issues, 14e
Katsh
146
Slife
Finsterbusch
106, 109
Terrorism and Counterterrorism Understanding the New Security Environment,
Howard
108, 111,
Readings and Interpretations, 3e
150
92, 153
56, 141
18
158
Theories of Personality, 7e
Feist
58
Thinking About Thinking What Educators Need to Know
Ee
47
To Empower, Be Empowered
Yeap
46
Santrock
24
Feldman
13
Domhoff
129
Women and Gender: A Feminist Psychology, 4e
Crawford
60
Women’s Voices, Feminist Visions: Classic and Contemporary Readings, 4e
Shaw
U
Understanding Psychology, 9e
W
164
136
AUTHOR INDEX
A
Abbeduto
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Educational Psychology (with Free Annual Editions), 6e
48
Adler
Criminology, 7e
145
Aguirre
American Ethnicity: The Dynamics and Consequences of Discrimination, 6e
126
Alloy
Abnormal Psychology with Mindmap Plus CD-ROM and Powerweb, 9e
68
Austad
Counseling and Psychotherapy Today
69
B
Bachman
Statistics for Criminology and Criminal Justice, 3e
142
Badey
Annual Editions: Violence and Terrorism 10/11, 12e
109
Blake
Perception, 5e
79
Bohlin
EdPsych: Modules
45
Bordens
76
Bordens
75
Buskist
17
Buskist
17
Byer
Dimensions of Human Sexuality, 6e
89
Candell
21
Cauley
48
Cauley
48
Chan
Ethics and Social Responsibility: Asian and Western Perspectives
Cherlin
Cherlin
114
Coakley
Sports in Society: Issues and Controversies, 10e
147
Cobb
Adolescence: Continuity, Change, and Diversity, 6e
33
Cohen
78
Collins
Discovery of Society, The, 8e
Cox
37, 123
Cox
36, 123
Cox
Sport Psychology, 6e
84
Cozby
Methods in Behavioral Research, 10e
75
Crawford
Women and Gender: A Feminist Psychology, 4e
60
C
157
111, 115
99, 104, 135
165
AUTHOR INDEX
D
D’Angelo
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Race and Ethnicity, 7e
Dacey
Human Development Across the Lifespan, 7e
Daniel
Annual Editions: Health 10/11 (with Free Taking Sides: Clashing Views
129
21
149
in Health and Society, 9/E), 31e
Daniel
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Health and Society, 9e
150
De Palma
155
De Palma
155
DeHart
Child Development with Multimedia Courseware CD and Powerweb, 5e
Del Campo
DeSpelder
Last Dance: Encountering Death and Dying, The, 8e
Dickinson
Disch
Reconstructing Gender: A Multicultural Anthology, 5e
Domhoff
129
Easton
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Science, Technology and Society, 9e
156
Praxis Series of Official Guide with CD-ROM, The, 2e
49
Ee
Thinking About Thinking What Educators Need to Know
47
Esterberg
Qualitative Methods in Social Research
142
Evers
148
Evers
147
Farganis
135
Feist
Feist
Theories of Personality, 7e
58
Feldman
Essentials of Understanding Psychology, 8e
12
Feldman
Feldman
Understanding Psychology, 9e
Ferguson
Fields
Finsterbusch
110
Finsterbusch
108
Finsterbusch
Annual Editions: SocIology 09/10, 38e
105
Finsterbusch
Classic Edition Sources: Sociology, 4e
107
Finsterbusch
Fiske
Social Cognition, From Brains to Culture
Fiske-Rusciano
Experiencing Race, Class, and Gender in the United States, 5e
Franzoi
28
30, 31, 50
51, 124
38, 51, 124
118, 137
E
F
9
8
13
100
69, 143
106, 109
58
119
55, 140
166
AUTHOR INDEX
F (contiuned)
Freiberg
Annual Editions: Human Development 09/10 (2010 Update),38e
25
Freiberg
25
G
Gallagher
Rethinking The Color Line: Readings in Race and Ethnicity, 4e
127
Gilbert
Goldberg
Gonzalez-Mena
Infants, Toddlers, and Caregivers: A Curriculum of Respectful, Responsive Care and Education, 8e
50
Greenwood
Conceptual History of Psychology, A
86
Griffiths
Guest
26
Guest
25
Halgin
67
Halgin
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Abnormal Psychology, 5e
68
Hart
Drugs, Society, and Human Behavior, 13e
Haugaard
Child Psychopathology
Hickey
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Crime and Criminology, 9e
146
Ho
Revisiting Sociology (In Chinese)
103
Hothersall
History of Psychology, 4e
Howard
Terrorism and Counterterrorism Understanding the New Security Environment,
31, 113, 116
70, 144
130
H
70, 143
39, 72
86
108, 111,
Readings and Interpretations, 3e
158
Hoyer
35
Hughes
Sociology: The Core, 9e
Hunt
Fundamentals of Cognitive Psychology, 7e
Hutchison
102
79
40, 60, 90,
121, 138, 151
Hutchison
91, 152
J
Jubilan
Annual Editions: Biological Psychology 08/09, 6e
80
Junn
30
167
AUTHOR INDEX
K
Katsh
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Legal Issues, 14e
146
Kerbo
Social Stratification and Inequality, 7e
131
King
10
King
11
King
Science of Psychology: An Appreciative View, The
15
Kridel
Classic Edition Sources: Education, 4e
149
Kromkowski
128
L
Lahey
Essentials of Psychology with Making the Grade CD-ROM
15
Lahey
Psychology: An Introduction, 10e
14
Larsen
Personality Psychology: Domains of Knowledge About Human Nature, 4e
57
Lauer
Marriage and Family: The Quest for Intimacy, 7e
Lauer
108
Levine
125
Levine
122
112, 115
M
McGraw-Hill
M Intro Psych
7
McIntyre
Need To Know: Social Science Research Methods
McIntyre
Practical Skeptic: Core Concepts in Sociology, The, 5e
99
McIntyre
99
Miller
Intimate Relationships, 5e
59, 89
Mio
Multicultural Psychology, 2e
57, 62
Myers
Exploring Social Psychology, 5e
56, 140
Myers
55, 139
141
N
Neubeck
Sociology: Diversity, Conflict, and Change
104
Newman
Families: A Sociological Perspective
Newman
Nier
Nolen-Hoeksema
Abnormal Psychology Media and Research Update with Mindmap, 4e
Noll
147
Noll
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Educational Issues, Expanded, 15e
148
112, 116
168
58
56, 141
67
AUTHOR INDEX
O
Ore
Social Construction of Difference and Inequality: Race, Class, Gender and Sexuality, The, 4e
119, 131
P
Papalia
36
Papalia
Child’s World, A, 11e
27
Papalia
22
Parke
Child Psychology: A Contemporary View Point, 7e
29
Passer
14
Passer
7
Patterson
Child Development
Pavkov
28
®
®
Ready, Set, Go! A Student Guide to SPSS 13.0 and 14.0 For Windows , 2e
77, 142
R
Rahhal
16
Ritzer
133
Ritzer
133
Ritzer
Contemporary Sociological Theory and Its Classical Roots: The Basics, 2e
135
Ritzer
Modern Sociological Theory, 7e
134
Ritzer
134
Ritzer
133
Rosenblum
Meaning of Difference: American Constructions of Race, Sex and Gender, Social Class, and
120, 132
Sexual Orientation, The, 5e
Rue
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Adolescence, 2e
35
Salgado
Psychology for Nurses
12
Sanders
Human Factors in Engineering and Design, 7e
83
Santrock
Adolescence, 13e
32
Santrock
Child Development: An Introduction, 12e
29
Santrock
Children, 11e
27
Santrock
Educational Psychology, 4e
45
Santrock
Essentials of Life-Span Development
23
Santrock
Life-Span Development, 12e
22
Santrock
24
Schaefer
Sociology Matters, 4e
103
Schaefer
Sociology, 12e
101
Schaefer
Sociology: A Brief Introduction, 8e
103
Schneider
S
169
102, 105, 156
AUTHOR INDEX
S (continued)
Schroeder
114, 117
Shaughnessy
Research Methods in Psychology, 8e
Shaw
Women’s Voices, Feminist Visions: Classic and Contemporary Readings, 4e
Slife
18
Spatz
Research Methods in Psychology: Ideas, Techniques and Reports
76
Steinberg
Adolescence, 8e
33
Steinberg
Adolescence, 9e
32
Stickle
34
Tan
Counselling in Schools: Theories, Processes and Techniques
47
Tan
Enhancing Cognitive Funtions Applications Across Contexts
46
Taverner
Taylor
Feminist Frontiers, 8e
136
Taylor
Health Psychology, 7e
62
Tsu
Japan and Singapore
157
75
136
T
92, 153
W
Waitley
63
Wenar
Developmental Psychopathology, 5e
39
White
41, 61, 92, 122,
139, 153, 154
White
40, 60, 138,
151, 154
Whitley
Principles of Research in Behavioral Science, 2e
77
Williams
83
Wilmot
62
Wilson
71, 144
Wilson
70, 144
Y
Yeap
To Empower, Be Empowered
46
170
EXAMINATION COPY REQUEST FORM
60 Tuas Basin Link
Singapore 638775
Tel (65) 6863 1580
Fax (65) 6862 3354
www.mheducation.asia
u Professors/lecturers who are interested to review titles listed in this catalog
for text adoption consideration, please complete this request form and fax
to your local McGraw-Hill office (see inside back cover for fax number) or
to McGraw-Hill Singapore.
u Requests for examination copies are subject to approval. McGraw-Hill
reserve the right to refuse any requests which do not relate to teaching.
u Please make copies of this form if necessary.
REQUESTED BY
Name
Room #
Department
University
Address
Tel
Fax
Email address
COMP REQUEST
Please indicate ISBN No, Author & Title
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Course Name
Enrolment
Subject
Commencement Date
Decision Date
Current Text Used
Individual Decision
Group Decision
McGRAW-HILL MAILING LIST
60 Tuas Basin Link
Singapore 638775
Tel (65) 6863 1580
Fax (65) 6862 3354
www.mheducation.asia
Please include me in your mailing list for information on McGraw-Hill
books.
Please email information on McGraw-Hill books to my email address at
I am already on your mailing list but my address has changed.
Please update my record to the following new address.
Name
(Mr / Ms / Dr / Prof) (Underline family name)
Position
Department
University
Address
Postal Code
Tel
Fax
Email address
SUBJECT OF INTEREST
o Industrial & Plant Engineering
o History
o Accounting
o Mechanical Engineering
o Law
o Advertising
o Medical Science
o Library Science
o Business Management
o Dentistry
o Mass Communication
o Finance & Investment
o Nursing
o Music
o Marketing
o Agriculture
o Philosophy & Religion
o Economics
o Biology
o Physical Education
o Human Resource Management
o Chemistry
o Political Science
o Insurance & Real Estate
o Forestry
o Psychology
o Training
o Geography & Geology
o Sociology
o Computing
o Physics & Astronomy
o Aeronautical & Aerospace Engineering
o Zoology
o Architecture & Urban Planning
o Mathematics & Statistics
Please return by fax at (65) 6862 3354
to McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)
Singapore office.
o Chemical Engineering
o Art & Humanities
o Civil Engineering
o Education
o Construction
o English
o Electronics & Communications
o English as a 2nd Language/ELT
o Electrical Engineering
o Foreign Language
o General Engineering
o Health & Nutrition
McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) respects your privacy. If
you do not wish to receive further marketing information
from McGraw-Hill Education (Asia), please send an
email to [email protected] or write
to McGraw-Hill Education (Asia), 60 Tuas Basin Link,
Singapore 638775. View The McGraw-Hill Companies
Customer Privacy Policy at http://www.mcgraw-hill.com/
privacy.html. For questions or to learn more about how
McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) applies this policy, please
contact us at the above email or postal address.
0 F * 5 $: + , / / ( ' 8 & $ 7 , 2 1 $ 6 , $ 6,1*$325(
DOVRVHUYLFLQJ0DXULWLXV
0F*UDZ+LOO(GXFDWLRQ$VLD
7XDV%DVLQ/LQN6LQJDSRUH
7HO&XVWRPHU6HUYLFH+RWOLQH
)D[
H0DLOPJKDVLDBVJ#PFJUDZKLOOFRPZHEVLWHZZZPKHGXFDWLRQDVLD
&+,1$
-$3$1
7$,:$1
5HSUHVHQWDWLYH2I¿FH
0F*UDZ+LOO(GXFDWLRQ-DSDQ
0F*UDZ+LOO,QW·O(QWHUSULVHV,QF
.DQGDVXGDFKR
&KL\RGDNX
7RN\R
-DSDQ
7HO
)D[
H0DLOPKHMSQ#PFJUDZKLOOFRP
)1R%R$L5RDG
7DLSHL
7DLZDQ
7HO
)D[
H0DLOPLHWZBPKH#PFJUDZKLOOFRP
6XLWH)637RZHU$
7VLQJKXD6FLHQFH3DUN
1R=KRQJJXDQFXQ(DVW5RDG
+DLGLDQ'LVWULFW
%HLMLQJ35&KLQD
7HO
)D[
H0DLOLQVWUXFWRUFKLQD#PFJUDZKLOOFRP
+21*.21*
6XLWHV6KHOO7RZHU
7LPHV6TXDUH
0DWKHVRQ6WUHHW&DXVHZD\%D\
+RQJ.RQJ
7HO
)D[
H0DLOPLHKNBPKH#PFJUDZKLOOFRP
.25($
DOVRVHUYLFLQJ&DPERGLD/DRV
)-L:RR%OGJ
6HRN\R'RQJ
0DSR.X
6HRXO.RUHD
7HO
)D[
H0DLOPLHNUBPKH#PFJUDZKLOOFRP
0$/$<6,$%581(,
0F*UDZ+LOO0DOD\VLD6GQ%KG
,1',$
DOVRVHUYLFLQJ%DQJODGHVK3DNLVWDQ
1HSDO6UL/DQND
7DWD0F*UDZ+LOO(GXFDWLRQ3ULYDWH
/LPLWHG
%6HFWRU
'LVWW*DXWDP%XGK1DJDU
1RLGD83,QGLD
7HO
)D[
H0DLOVDXUDEKBVKDUPD#PFJUDZKLOOFRP
1R-DODQ3HQJDFDUD8
7HPDV\D,QGXVWULDO3DUN
6KDK$ODP
6HODQJRU'DUXO(KVDQ0DOD\VLD
7HO
)D[
H0DLOPVLDBPKH#PFJUDZKLOOFRP
3+,/,33,1(6
DOVRVHUYLFLQJ*XDP
,1'21(6,$
$SSRLQWHG$JHQW
370HGLD*OREDO(GXNDVL
*UDQG%RXWLTXH&HQWHU%ORN'
-DODQ0DQJJD'XD5D\D
-DNDUWD
,QGRQHVLD
7HO
)D[
H0DLOLQIR#PJHFRLG
7+$,/$1'
0F*UDZ+LOO.RUHD,QF
8QLW-ROOLEHH3OD]D&RQGRPLQLXP
(PHUDOG$YHQXH&RUQHU5XE\6WUHHW
2UWLJDV&HQWHU3DVLJ&LW\
3KLOLSSLQHV
7HO
)D[
H0DLOPJKSKLOV#PFJUDZKLOOFRP
6RL,QWKDPDUD
6XWKLVDUQ5RDG3KD\DWKDL
%DQJNRN7KDLODQG
7HO
)D[
H0DLOPLHWKBPKH#PFJUDZKLOOFRP
9,(71$0
7KH1RPDG2IÀFHV
/HYHO*HPDGHSW7RZHU
/H7KDQK7RQ6WUHHW
%HQ1JKH:DUG'LVWULFW
+R&KL0LQK&LW\
9LHWQDP
7HO
)D[
H0DLOYDQB\HQBTXDQJ#PFJUDZKLOOFRP
Preparing Students for
the World That Awaits
McGraw-Hill Higher Education empowers instructors to help students succeed academically
now and into the Iuture Ey proYiding Áe[iEle superior-Tuality solutions that serYe the
needs oI instructors and students end to end - Irom te[tEooNs and digital instructional
content and tools to innoYate suEMect mastery e[periential learning and assignment
assessment solutions.
Connect.
We connect instructors and students to valuable course content
and resources - and we connect instructors and students to each
other - with the best traditional and digital teaching tools.
Learn.
We enable greater learning and deeper comprehension with the
highest-Tuality tools and content that let students engage with
their courseworN when where and however they learn best.
Succeed.
We provide the learning resources students need to connect
success in the classroom with success in the world that awaits.
60 Tuas Basin Link
Singapore 638775
Tel (65) 6863 1580
Fax (65) 6862 3354
email: [email protected]
website: www.mheducation.asia
C09-000702-X

Sociology Psychology - McGraw

Transcription

Similar documents

Baumrind, D. (1966). Effects of Authoritative Parental Control on

How to Subscribe Daily Thanthi E-paper? Step 1: Log on to http

How to Use a $15 million Virtual Reality Environment to Teach

LETTERS FROM ALUMNI - Stony Brook University

from mhhe.com - McGraw Hill Higher Education

Issue IV | Fall 2002

Department of Psychology

Strenthening Psychology as a Profession.

Sound Healing